GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A
Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5
Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A
Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A

Connection Manual (Hardware)

GFZ-63943EN/02 June 2004

 GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 2004 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B-63943EN/02 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning,
Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s-1
B-63943EN/02 PREFACE

PREFACE
This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications
required for connecting the CNC control unit to a machine tool. The
manual outlines the components commonly used for FANUC CNC
control units, as shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2, and
supplies additional information on using these components.
The manual outlines the I/O unit, servo, spindle, and other
components common to FANUC CNC control units, and supplies
additional information on using these components in this CNC control
unit. For detailed specifications, refer to the manuals of these
components.

For options not covered in this manual, also refer to the manuals of
these components.

Applicable models
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Model name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A 30i Series 30i
FANUC Series 300i-MODEL A 300i Series 300i
FANUC Series 300is-MODEL A 300is Series 300is
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A5
31i Series 31i
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A
FANUC Series 310i-MODEL A5
310i Series 310i
FANUC Series 310i-MODEL A
FANUC Series 310is-MODEL A5
310is Series 310is
FANUC Series 310is-MODEL A
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A 32i Series 32i
FANUC Series 320i-MODEL A 320i Series 320i
FANUC Series 320is-MODEL A 320is Series 320is

p-1
PREFACE B-63943EN/02

Organization of this manuals

This manual consists of chapters 1 to 13 and appendixes at the end of
the book.
Chapter and title Contents
Chapter 1 Provides general information related to the connection of the 30i series, as well as
CONFIGURATION an introduction to detailed information.
Chapter 2 Describes how to connect peripheral units to the 30i series.
TOTAL CONNECTION
DAIGRAMS
Chapter 3 Describes the installation requirements for using the 30i series.
INSTALLATION 1) Required power supply capacity
2) Heat output
3) Locations of connectors on the control unit
4) Action against noise
Chapter 4 Describes how to make connections related to the power supply of the 30i series.
POWER SUPPLAY
CONNECTION
Chapter 5 Describes how to connect the following peripheral devices to the 30i series:
CONNECTION TO CNC 1) Display unit / MDI unit
PERIOHERALS 2) I/O device (RS-232-C)
3) High-speed skip (HDI)
4) Embedded Ethernet
Chapter 6 Describes how to connect spindle-related units to the 30i series.
SPINDLE CONNECTION
Chapter 7 Describes how to connect servo-related units to the 30i series.
SERVO INTERFACE
Chapter 8 Describes how to connect machine interface I/O with the FANUC I/O Link.
CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O
Link
Chapter 9 Describes how to handle the emergency stop signal.
STOP AND EMERGENCY Be sure to read this chapter.
STOP
Chapter 10 Describes how to connect the 30i series to networks.
CONNECTION TO OTHER
NETWORKS
Chapter 11 Describes connection for Series 300is/310is/320is.
CONNECTION FOR Series
300is/310is/320is
Chapter 12 Describes the high–speed serial bus (HSSB) that can be used with the 30i series.
HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS
(HSSB)
Chapter 13 Describes how to connect a PANEL i to the 30i series.
PANEL i
APPENDIX A) OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS
B) 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
C) CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
D) OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
E) LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
F) MEMORY CARD INTERFACE

p-2
B-63943EN/02 PREFACE

Related manuals of
Series 30i/300i/300is- MODEL A
Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A
Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A5
Series 32i/320i/320is- MODEL A
The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i/300i
/300is-A, Series 31i/310i /310is-A, Series 31i/310i /310is-A5, Series
32i/320i /320is-A. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals
Manual name Specification
number
DESCRIPTIONS B-63942EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63943EN *
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63943EN-1
USER’S MANUAL
B-63944EN
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)
USER’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-63944EN-1
USER’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-63944EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63945EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-65950EN
Programming
Macro Compiler / Macro Executor
B-63943EN-2
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Macro Compiler OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-66264EN
C Language Executor OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63944EN-3
PMC
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63983EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63994EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN
DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64044EN
Operation guidance function
MANUAL GUIDE i OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63874EN
MANUAL GUIDE i Set-up Guidance
B-63874EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL

p-3
PREFACE B-63943EN/02

Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αis/αi/βis/βi series

The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR
αis/αi/βis/βi series
Table 2 Related manuals
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series B-65262EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
B-65272EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βis series
B-65302EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series
B-65312EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
B-65282EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series
B-65322EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC SERVO MOTOR βis series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series
B-65325EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
B-65270EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βis series
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series B-65280EN
PARAMETER MANUAL

Any of the servo motors and spindles listed above can be connected to
the CNC described in this manual. However, αi series servo amplifiers
can only be connected to αi series SVMs (for 30i/31i/32i).
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi
series of servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information,
refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually
connected.

p-4
B-63943EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE .................................s-1

PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1 CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 1
1.1 CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT NAMES .............. 2
1.1.1 Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units .............................................2
1.1.2 Configurations of Stand-alone Type Control Units..................................................5
1.1.3 Configurations of Optional Boards ..........................................................................9
1.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW............................................................................ 11
1.2.1 LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview .........................................................11
1.2.2 Stand-alone Type Control Unit Overview..............................................................12

2 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ..................................................... 13

3 INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 18
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE CABINET............... 19
3.1.1 Environmental Conditions outside the Cabinet......................................................19
3.1.2 Installation Conditions of the CNC and Servo Unit in the Cabinet........................20
3.2 POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY ..................................................................... 21
3.2.1 Power Supply Capacities of CNC-related Units ....................................................21
3.3 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC CABINET ................................................................................. 23
3.4 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET ...... 25
3.4.1 Temperature Rise within the Machine Tool Magnetic Cabinet..............................25
3.4.2 Heat Output of Each Unit.......................................................................................26
3.4.3 Thermal Design of Operator's Panel.......................................................................27
3.5 ACTION AGAINST NOISE .......................................................................... 29
3.5.1 Separating Signal Lines..........................................................................................29
3.5.2 Ground....................................................................................................................31
3.5.3 Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control Unit .......................................34
3.5.4 Noise Suppressor....................................................................................................37
3.5.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing.......................................................................39
3.5.6 Measures Against Surges due to Lightning............................................................42
3.6 CONTROL UNIT.......................................................................................... 44
3.6.1 Installing the LCD-mounted Type Control Unit ....................................................44
3.6.2 Installing the Stand-alone Type Control Unit ........................................................45

c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63943EN/02

3.7 CABLING DIAGRAM ................................................................................... 46

3.8 DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND PENDANT BOXES ...... 47
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION......................................................... 48
4.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................... 49
4.2 TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT............. 50
4.2.1 Power Supply for the Control Unit.........................................................................50
4.2.2 External 24 VDC Power Specification and Circuit Configuration.........................51
4.2.3 Power-on Sequence ................................................................................................55
4.2.4 Power-off Sequence ...............................................................................................55
4.3 CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT ................................. 57
4.4 BATTERIES................................................................................................. 58
4.4.1 Battery for Memory Backup in the CNC Control Unit (3 VDC) ...........................58
4.4.1.1 Replacing the lithium battery............................................................................. 59
4.4.2 Batteries for PANEL i (3VDC) ..............................................................................64
4.4.3 Battery for Separate Absolute Pulse Coders (6VDC) ............................................66
4.4.4 Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6VDC)............................68

5 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS ............................................. 69

5.1 CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT
(LCD- MOUNTED TYPE 30i SERIES) ........................................................ 70
5.1.1 Ovoerview ..............................................................................................................70
5.1.2 Connection to the MDI Unit (LCD-mounted Type 30i Series)..............................70
5.1.3 Connection with the Standard MDI Unit................................................................71
5.1.4 Key Layout of MDI................................................................................................72
5.2 CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT
(STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES) .......................................................... 75
5.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................75
5.2.2 Connection with an LCD Unit................................................................................75
5.3 CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES ...................................... 78
5.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................78
5.3.2 Connecting I/O Devices .........................................................................................79
5.3.3 RS-232-C Serial Port..............................................................................................81
5.3.4 RS-232-C Interface Specification...........................................................................83
5.3.5 FANUC Handy FILE .............................................................................................92
5.4 CONNECTING THE HIGH-SPEED SKIP (HDI)........................................... 93
5.4.1 Connecting the High-speed Skip (HDI) .................................................................93
5.4.2 Input Signal Rules for the High-speed Skip (HDI) ................................................95

c-2
B-63943EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.5 Linking The EMBEDDED Ethernet Interface ............................................... 96

5.5.1 Connection to the Ethernet Interface......................................................................96
5.5.2 Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable.......................................................................98
5.5.3 Anti-Noise Measure .............................................................................................101
5.5.4 Network Installation .............................................................................................101

6 SPINDLE CONNECTION .................................................................... 103

6.1 SERIAL SPINDLE...................................................................................... 104
6.1.1 Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles ..........................................................104
6.1.2 Connecting One to Four Serial Spindles ..............................................................107
6.1.3 Connecting Five or Six Serial Spindles................................................................114
6.1.4 Connecting Seven or Eight Serial spindles ..........................................................115

7 SERVO INTERFACE........................................................................... 116

7.1 CONNECTION TO THE SERVO AMPLIFIERS......................................... 117
7.1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................118
7.1.2 Interface to the Servo Amplifiers .........................................................................118
7.2 SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE...................................................... 121
7.2.1 Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification ....................................................123
7.2.2 Connection of Power Supply................................................................................124
7.2.3 Separate Detector Interface (Serial Interface) ......................................................126
7.2.4 Separate Detector Interface (Parallel interface)....................................................128
7.2.5 Input Signal Requirements (Parallel interface) ....................................................130
7.2.6 Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector.........................................132
7.2.7 Connection Between the Basic Unit and Additional Unit....................................134
7.2.8 Connector Locations.............................................................................................135
7.2.9 Installation ............................................................................................................136
7.2.10 Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit ........................................137
7.3 ANALOG INPUT SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE .......................... 139
7.3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................140
7.3.2 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification ..............................143
7.3.3 Connection of Power Supply................................................................................143
7.3.4 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface (Analog 1Vp-p Interface) ..................145
7.3.5 Input Signal Specifications...................................................................................146
7.3.6 Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector.........................................147
7.3.7 Connection Between the Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit and
Additional Unit.....................................................................................................148
7.3.8 Connector Locations.............................................................................................149

c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63943EN/02

7.3.9 Installation ............................................................................................................150

7.3.10 Notes on Installing an Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit ................152

8 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link ................................................... 154

8.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 155
8.2 CONNECTION........................................................................................... 156
8.2.1 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable .............................................158
8.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Optical Fiber Cable ....................................159
8.2.3 Connection when Multiple Channels of FANUC I/O Links are Used .................162
8.3 UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED USING FANUC I/O Link................. 173
8.4 CONNECTION OF CONNECTOR PANEL I/O MODULE.......................... 174
8.4.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................174
8.4.2 Connection Diagram.............................................................................................175
8.4.3 Module Specifications..........................................................................................176
8.4.4 DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment.......................................................................178
8.4.5 DI (Input Signal) Connection ...............................................................................179
8.4.6 DO (Output Signal) Connection...........................................................................181
8.4.7 DI/DO Signal Specifications ................................................................................182
8.4.8 2A Output Connector Pin Allocation ...................................................................184
8.4.9 2A DO (Output Signal) Connection .....................................................................185
8.4.10 2A Output DO Signal Specifications ...................................................................186
8.4.11 Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation ...............................................................187
8.4.12 Analog Input Signal Connections.........................................................................188
8.4.13 Analog Input Signal Specifications ......................................................................189
8.4.14 Analog Input Specifications .................................................................................190
8.4.15 Manual Pulse Generator Connection....................................................................192
8.4.16 Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator...........................................................193
8.4.17 Connection of Basic and Extension Modules.......................................................194
8.4.18 Module Installation...............................................................................................195
8.4.19 Other Notes...........................................................................................................200
8.4.20 Distribution I/O Setting ........................................................................................204
8.5 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O MODULE
(FOR MATRIX INPUT) .............................................................................. 206
8.5.1 Overall Connection Diagram................................................................................206
8.5.2 Power Connection ................................................................................................207
8.5.3 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement.....................................................................208
8.5.4 DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection ...................................................209
8.5.5 DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection ...................................................................211
c-4
B-63943EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

8.5.6 DO (Output Signal) Connection...........................................................................212

8.5.7 Manual Pulse Generator Connection....................................................................215
8.5.8 External View.......................................................................................................216
8.5.9 Specifications .......................................................................................................217
8.5.10 Other Notes...........................................................................................................219
8.6 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O MODULE AND POWER
MAGNETICS CABINET I/O MODULE....................................................... 223
8.6.1 Overall Connection Diagram................................................................................223
8.6.2 Power Connection ................................................................................................224
8.6.3 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement.....................................................................225
8.6.4 DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection ...................................................226
8.6.5 DO (Output Signal) Connection...........................................................................230
8.6.6 Manual Pulse Generator Connection....................................................................232
8.6.7 External View.......................................................................................................232
8.6.8 Specifications .......................................................................................................233
8.6.9 Other Notes...........................................................................................................235
8.7 FANUC I/O LINK CONNECTION UNIT ..................................................... 239
8.7.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................239
8.7.2 Specification.........................................................................................................240
8.7.3 Connection ...........................................................................................................243
8.7.3.1 I/O Link interface ............................................................................................ 243
8.8 CONNECTING THE FANUC SERVO UNIT β SERIES WITH I/O LINK .... 246
8.8.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................246
8.8.2 Connection ...........................................................................................................246
8.8.3 Maximum Number of Units that can be Connected .............................................247
8.8.4 Address Assignment by Ladder............................................................................247
8.9 CONNECTION TO ATANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL.......... 248
8.9.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................248
8.9.2 Total Connection Diagram ...................................................................................250
8.9.3 Each Connections .................................................................................................251
8.9.3.1 Pin assignment ................................................................................................. 251
8.9.3.2 Power supply connection................................................................................. 252
8.9.3.3 I/O link connection .......................................................................................... 253
8.9.3.4 Emergency stop signal connection .................................................................. 254
8.9.3.5 Power ON/OFF control signal connection....................................................... 254
8.9.3.6 General-purpose DI signal connection ............................................................ 255
8.9.3.7 General-purpose DO signal connection........................................................... 257
8.9.3.8 Manual pulse generator connection ................................................................. 258
8.9.3.9 Connector (on the cable side) specifications ................................................... 261
c-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63943EN/02

8.9.4 I/O Address...........................................................................................................262

8.9.4.1 Keyboard of main panel................................................................................... 262
8.9.4.2 Override signals ............................................................................................... 263
8.9.5 I/O Mapping .........................................................................................................264
8.9.6 Outline..................................................................................................................265
8.9.6.1 Outline of main panel ...................................................................................... 265
8.9.6.2 Outline of sub panel A..................................................................................... 266
8.9.6.3 Outline of sub panel D..................................................................................... 267
8.9.6.4 Connector locations of main panel .................................................................. 268
8.9.7 Specifications .......................................................................................................269
8.9.7.1 Environmental requirement ............................................................................. 269
8.9.7.2 Order specification........................................................................................... 269
8.9.7.3 Main panel specification.................................................................................. 269
8.9.7.4 Sub panel A/D specification ............................................................................ 269
8.9.7.5 Power supply specification .............................................................................. 270
8.9.7.6 General-purpose DI signal definition .............................................................. 270
8.9.7.7 General-purpose DO signal definition............................................................. 270
8.9.8 Key Symbol Indication on Machine Operators Panel ..........................................271
8.9.8.1 Meaning of key symbols.................................................................................. 271
8.9.8.2 Detachable key top .......................................................................................... 273
8.9.9 Others ...................................................................................................................274
8.9.10 Maintenance Parts ................................................................................................277

9 STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP ....................................................... 278

9.1 STOP MODES........................................................................................... 279
9.2 SHUTTING OFF THE MOTOR POWER ................................................... 280
9.3 STOPPING THE SPINDLE MOTOR ......................................................... 281
9.4 STOPPING THE SERVO MOTOR ............................................................ 282
9.5 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL................................................................... 283
9.6 CAUTIONS ABOUT MULTIPATH CONTROL ........................................... 286
10 CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS ........................................... 287
11 CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is.................................. 288
11.1 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS .......................................................... 289
11.1.1 LCD-Mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is Control Unit................................289
11.1.2 Display Unit for is Series CNC (Stand-Alone Type) ...........................................290
11.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... 291
11.2.1 Connector Names and Connector Layout.............................................................291
11.2.1.1 LCD-mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is ................................................. 291
11.2.1.2 Display Unit for is Series................................................................................. 292
11.2.2 Environmental Conditions for Control Units .......................................................293

c-6
B-63943EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

11.2.3 Power Supply Capacity ........................................................................................294

11.3 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS .................................................. 295
11.3.1 Main Power Input.................................................................................................295
11.3.2 Backup Unit..........................................................................................................296
11.3.3 Ethernet Interface (10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX)...................................................300
11.3.4 Serial Port and USB Port......................................................................................308
11.3.4.1 Serial port 1 ..................................................................................................... 308
11.3.4.2 Serial port 2 ..................................................................................................... 311
11.3.4.3 USB port (rear side)......................................................................................... 313
11.3.4.4 USB port (front side) ....................................................................................... 314
11.3.5 High-speed Serial Bus (HSSB) [For Stand-alone Type] ......................................315
11.3.6 Buzzer Output.......................................................................................................316

12 HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) .................................................. 317

12.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 318
12.2 CAUTIONS ................................................................................................ 318
12.3 CONNECTION DIAGRAM ......................................................................... 319
12.4 PERSONAL COMPUTER SPECIFICATION ............................................. 320
12.5 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT.............................................................. 320
12.6 PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING PERSONAL COMPUTER
INTERFACE BOARDS .............................................................................. 321
12.7 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS ..................................................................... 321
12.8 RECOMMENDED CABLES....................................................................... 322
13 PANEL i............................................................................................... 323
13.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 324
13.2 CAUTIONS ................................................................................................ 324
13.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS .......................................................... 325
13.4 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................... 326
13.4.1 Installation Environmental Conditions.................................................................326
13.4.2 Power Supply Specification .................................................................................328
13.4.3 Shutdown..............................................................................................................329
13.5 INSTALLATION SPACE ............................................................................ 330
13.5.1 Installation Space of the Basic Unit .....................................................................330
13.5.1.1 Installation space of the 10.4" LCD type basic unit ........................................ 330
13.5.1.2 Installation space of the 12.1" LCD type basic unit ........................................ 331
13.5.1.3 Installation space of the 15.0" LCD type basic unit ........................................ 332
13.5.2 Installation space of the HDD unit .......................................................................333
13.5.2.1 FA full keyboard and an MDI unit other than QWERTY MDI ...................... 333
13.5.2.2 When the QWERTY MDI and 10.4" LCD type basic unit are used ............... 334

c-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63943EN/02

13.5.2.3 QWERTY MDI used in cases other than combination (2) .............................. 334
13.5.3 Ground Terminal Connection of Units.................................................................335
13.6 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND CONNECTION .................................... 336
13.6.1 Connector Layout Diagram ..................................................................................336
13.6.2 Main Power Supply Input ....................................................................................337
13.6.3 Serial Port 1 ..........................................................................................................338
13.6.4 Serial Port 2 ..........................................................................................................340
13.6.5 Parallel Port ..........................................................................................................342
13.6.6 High-speed serial Bus (HSSB) .............................................................................344
13.6.7 Keyboard and Mouse............................................................................................345
13.6.8 Hard Disk Unit .....................................................................................................347
13.6.9 Floppy Disk Drive ................................................................................................348
13.6.10 USB ....................................................................................................................350
13.6.11 Ethernet ................................................................................................................351
13.6.12 Video Port ............................................................................................................352
13.6.13 MDI ....................................................................................................................354
13.6.14 PCMCIA Card......................................................................................................355
13.6.15 PCI Extension Board ............................................................................................356
13.7 Punch Panel for PANEL i .......................................................................... 358
13.7.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................358
13.7.2 Specifications .......................................................................................................358
13.7.3 Configuration .......................................................................................................359
13.7.4 Operating Environment ........................................................................................359
13.7.5 Connection to the PANEL i..................................................................................360
13.7.6 Connection to Peripheral Devices ........................................................................363
13.8 KEY CODES OF SOFT KEYS................................................................... 366

APPENDIX
A OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS ...................................................... 369
B 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES ......................... 439
B.1 BOARD-MOUNTED CONNECTORS ........................................................ 440
B.1.1 Vertical-type Connectors......................................................................................440
B.1.2 Straight and Right-angled Connectors
(for Spring and Screw-fixing Connector Housings).............................................440
B.2 CABLE CONNECTORS ............................................................................ 441
B.2.1 Strand Wire Press-mount Connector ....................................................................441
B.2.2 Soldering Type Connector....................................................................................442

c-8
B-63943EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

B.3 RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE HOUSINGS, AND

CABLES .................................................................................................... 443
B.3.1 Recommended Connectors...................................................................................444
B.3.2 Applicable Cables.................................................................................................445

C CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)................................. 454

D OPTICAL FIBER CABLE .................................................................... 457
E LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) ................................................... 469
F MEMORY CARD INTERFACE............................................................ 472

c-9
B-63943EN/02 1.CONFIGURATION

1 CONFIGURATION

-1-
1.CONFIGURATION B-63943EN/02

1.1 CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT

NAMES

The 30i series control units are divided into two types: the
LCD-mounted type and stand-alone type.
LCD-mounted type control units have a built-in display. Stand-alone
type control units have a separate display unit. In the following
sections, the LCD-mounted type is also referred to as the
LCD-mounted type, and the stand-alone type is also referred to as the
stand-alone type.
The configuration and component names of each type are shown in
the figures given below. This manual explains how to attach the
connectors shown in these figures to devices. The numbers in
parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of the
descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures
are connector numbers.

1.1.1 Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units

LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i control units (A circle indicates
that the corresponding unit is available.)
Display unit Expansion slot Horizontal soft key Vertical soft key 30i 31i 32i
None 5+2 None
7.2"STN monochrome LCD
2 5+2 None
None 5+2 None
8.4"TFT color LCD
2 5+2 None
None 10+2 8+1
10.4"TFT color LCD
2 10+2 8+1
10.4"TFT color LCD None 10+2 8+1
(with touch panel) 2 10+2 8+1
None 10+2 8+1
15"TFT color LCD
2 10+2 8+1
15"TFT color LCD None 10+2 8+1
(with touch panel) 2 10+2 8+1

LCD-mounted type Series 300is/310is/320is control units (A circle

indicates that the corresponding unit is available.)
Horizontal soft Vertical soft
Display unit Expansion slot 300is 310is 320is
key key
None 10+2 8+1
10.4"TFT color LCD
2 10+2 8+1
10.4"TFT color LCD None 10+2 8+1
(with touch panel) 2 10+2 8+1
None 10+2 8+1
12.1"TFT color LCD
2 10+2 8+1
12.1"TFT color LCD None 10+2 8+1
(with touch panel) 2 10+2 8+1
None 10+2 8+1
15"TFT color LCD
2 10+2 8+1
15"TFT color LCD None 10+2 8+1
(with touch panel) 2 10+2 8+1

-2-
B-63943EN/02 1.CONFIGURATION

LCD-mounted type control unit

Vertical soft
keys

Liquid-crystal
display

Memory card
interface

USB port

Horizontal soft
keys

NOTE
1 This figure is a front view of the LCD-mounted type
control unit with an 10.4” TFT color liquid-crystal
display. The configurations of other control units
are basically the same as that shown above.
2 The Series 30i/31i/32i do not support the USB
port.
3 The 7.2” and 8.4” display units do not have vertical
soft keys.

-3-
1.CONFIGURATION B-63943EN/02

LCD-mounted type control unit

Fan unit
Battery

Unit rear panel

Servo unit
connector
[COP10A-1]
[COP10A-2] (7)

Ethernet
Power supply
connector
module
[CD38A] (5.5)

MDI connector Fuse Power supply

[CA55] (5.1) connector
[CPD16A]

Soft key Serial spindle

connector
[JA41] (6.1)

I/O device interface (RS-232-C) or

serial spindle connector I/O-Link connector
[JD56A] (5.3, 6.1) [JD51A] (8.2)

I/O device interface High-speed skip connector

connector (RS-232-C) [JA40] (5.4)
[JD36A/JD54] (5.3)

NOTE
This figure is a rear view of the 30i/31i/32i LCD-mounted type control unit without
option slots.
For the LCD-mounted type 300is/310is/320is control units, see Chapter 11.
The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of the
descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are
connector numbers.

-4-
B-63943EN/02 1.CONFIGURATION

1.1.2 Configurations of Stand-alone Type Control Units

Stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i control units (A circle indicates
that the corresponding unit is available.)
Expansion
Slot rack name 30i 31i 32i
slot
2-slot rack 2
4-slot rack 4

Series 30i/31i/32i display units (A circle indicates that the

corresponding unit is available.)
Horizontal Vertical
Display unit 30i 31i 32i
soft key soft key
10.4"TFT color LCD 10+2 8+1
10.4"TFT color LCD
10+2 8+1
(with touch panel)
15" TFT color LCD 10+2 8+1
15" TFT color LCD
10+2 8+1
(with touch panel)

Series 300i/310i/320i PANEL i (A circle indicates that the

corresponding model is available.)
Horizontal Vertical
Display unit 30i 31i 32i
soft key soft key
10.4"TFT color LCD 10+2 8+1
10.4"TFT color LCD
10+2 8+1
(with touch panel)
15" TFT color LCD 10+2 8+1
15" TFT color LCD
10+2 8+1
(with touch panel)

Series 300is/310is/320is CNC display units (A circle indicates that the

corresponding unit is available.)
Horizontal Vertical
Display unit 300is 310is 320is
soft key soft key
10+2 8+1
10.4"TFT color LCD
10+2 8+1
10.4"TFT color LCD 10+2 8+1
(with touch panel) 10+2 8+1
10+2 8+1
12.1"TFT color LCD
10+2 8+1
12.1"TFT color LCD 10+2 8+1
(with touch panel) 10+2 8+1
10+2 8+1
15"TFT color LCD
10+2 8+1
15"TFT color LCD 10+2 8+1
(with touch panel) 10+2 8+1

-5-
1.CONFIGURATION B-63943EN/02

Stand-alone type control unit

Battery connector

I/O device interface

Battery connector

I/O device interface I/O Link connector

connector

High-speed skip connector

Memory card interface

Serial spindle connector

Ethernet LED

Ethernet connector
LED for blown fuse check

24-VDC power supply connector

[CPD19A] (right)
Optional slot 3
[CPD19B] (left)

Display connector
Optional slot 1

Servo unit (FSSB) LED for status indication

connector and maintenance
[COP10A-1] (lower)
[COP10A-2] (upper)
(7)
LED for alarm indication

Optional slot 4
Rotary switch for maintenance (upper),
Push switch for maintenance (lower)

Optional slot 2
2-slot rack GND connection terminal

4-slot rack

-6-
B-63943EN/02 1.CONFIGURATION

10.4” LCD unit for the stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i control unit

Liquid-crystal
display

Memory card
interface

Soft keys

MDI connector
[CA55] (5.1)

Soft key
connectors

Power supply
Touch panel connector connectors
[CP1A]
[CP1B] (5.2)

Optical connector for

display control
[COP21A] (5.2)

NOTE
The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are
keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in
this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the
figures are connector numbers.

-7-
1.CONFIGURATION B-63943EN/02

15” LCD unit for the stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i control unit

Liquid-crystal
display

Memory card
interface

Soft keys

Fan motor Fan motor

MDI connector
[CA55] (5.1)
Rear view

Soft key
connectors

Power supply
Optical connector for connector
display control [CPD18] (5.2)
[COP21M] (5.2)

NOTE
The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are
keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in
this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the
figures are connector numbers.
For the display units for the Series 300i/310i/320i,
see Chapter 13. For the display units for the
Series 300is/310is/320is, see Chapter 11.

-8-
B-63943EN/02 1.CONFIGURATION

1.1.3 Configurations of Optional Boards

Additional axis board

For I/O-Link
[JD1A] (8.2)

For servo unit

[COP10A] (7)

Additional spindle board

For serial spindle

[JA41L] (6.1)

Fast data server board

For Ethernet
[CD38R] (5.5)

HSSB board

HSSB optical
connector
[COP21N]

NOTE
The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are
keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in
this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the
figures are connector numbers.

-9-
1.CONFIGURATION B-63943EN/02

Profibus master board

For Profibus
[CN1]

Profibus slave board

For Profibus
[CN2]

DeviceNet board

For DeviceNet
[TBL]

FL-net board

For FL-net
[CD38N]

NOTE
The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are
keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in
this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the
figures are connector numbers.

- 10 -
B-63943EN/02 1.CONFIGURATION

1.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW

1.2.1 LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview

Main board
- CPU for controlling CNC
- Power supply
- 2-axis to 24-axis control
- Spindle interface
- LCD/MDI interface
- I/O Link
- PMC control function
- High-speed DI
- RS-232C
- Memory card interface
- PC function
（300is/310is/320is）
Data server board
Data server function
Ethernet communication function

Additional axis board

Basic system
Additional axis control function
I/O Link

Additional spindle board

Additional spindle control function

HSSB interface board

High-speed serial bus interface

Various types of network boards Options

FL-net board
Profibus master board
Profibus slave board
Device Net board

Unit without optional slots

or
Unit having two optional slots

On a unit with optional slots, as many optional boards as the slots can be mounted.

- 11 -
1.CONFIGURATION B-63943EN/02

1.2.2 Stand-alone Type Control Unit Overview

4 slot rack 2 slot rack

Main board

Slot 3 Slot 1

Slot 4 Slot 2

Options (Slot 1 to 4) Basic system

Data server board Main board

Data server function - CPU for controlling CNC
- Power supply
Additional axis board - 2-axis to 24-axis control
Additional axis control function - Spindle interface
I/O Link - DISPLAY interface
- I/O Link
- PMC control function
Additional spindle board - High-speed DI
Additional spindle control function - RS-232C
- Memory card interface
HSSB interface board
High-speed serial bus interface board

Various types of network boards

FL-net board
Profibus master board
Profibus slave board
Device Net board

- 12 -
B-63943EN/02 2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

2 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

- 13 -
2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B-63943EN/02

LCD-mounted type control unit

LCD display unit

Main board
24V-IN(CPD16A) 24 VDC power supply

MDI UNIT

MDI(CA55) CK27

R232-1(JD56A) RS-232-C I/O unit

5th and 6th serial spindles

R232-2(JD36A) RS-232-C I/O unit

Touch panel
HDI(JA40)
High-peed skip input

Distributed I/O Manual pulse generator

board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD51A) JD1B Operator's
JD1A panel

24VDC CPD1 Distributed

Power
JD1B I/O board, magnetics
I/O unit, etc.
JD1A cabinet

SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
3rd and 4th CX1A TB2 CX3
serial PSM CX4
spindles CX1B TB1 JX1B
Position coder

CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A

JA7B JY2
SPM TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B

To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor

TB1 CX2A JX1A

FSSB(COP10A-1) COP10B TB2
SVM Servo motor
COP10A JF1
TB1 CX2B JX1B
FSSB(COP10A-2) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

(In this figure, a 1-axisamplifier is used.)

Separate detector interface unit 1

24VDC CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1

JF102 Linear scale, axis 2
COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4
CNF1 JA4A Absolute scale battery
(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector interface unit 2
CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1
JF102 Linear scale, axis 2
JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
JF104 Linear scale, axis 4

ETHERNET(CD38A) Ethernet

- 14 -
B-63943EN/02 2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

Stand-alone type control unit

Main board
Slot 1 24V-IN(CPD19A) 24 VDC power supply
24V-OUT(CPD19B) To I/O device
Optical fiber ccable
LCD UNIT MDI UNIT
COP21A,B,M
DISPLAY(COP21A)
24VDC CP1A CA55 CK27
CP1B
Memory card
(Touch panel)
PANEL i or personal computer
HDI(JA40) High-peed skip input

Distributed Manual pulse generator

I/O board
DC24V CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD51A) JD1B Operator's
JD1A panel

DC24V CPD1 Distributed

I/O board, Power
JD1B
I/O unit, magnetics
JD1A etc. cabinet

JD1B β amplifier Servo motor

JD1A with I/O Link

R232-1(JD56A)
RS-232-C I/O device
5th, 6th spindles
R232-2(JD36A)
RS-232-C I/O device

SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
CX1A TB2 CX3
PSM CX4
CX1B TB1 JX1B
Position coder

3rd, 4th
spindles CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A
JA7B SPM JY2
TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B

Servo card To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor

Optical fiber cable TB1 CX2A JX1A

COP10B TB2 Axis 1
FSSB(COP10A-1)
SVM servo motor
COP10A JF1
TB1 CX2B JX1B
FSSB(COP10A-2)
COP10B Axis 2
SVM servo motor
COP10A

Axis 3
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A

Axis 4
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A

(In this figure, a 1-axis amplifier is used.)

Separate detector interface unit 1

24VDC CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1

JF102 Linear scale, axis 2
COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4

ETHERNET(CD38A) CNF1 JA4A Battery for absolute scale

(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector
interface unit 2

Ethernet

- 15 -
2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B-63943EN/02

When optional functions are provided

Additional spindle board

Optional slot

SPDL(JA41L)

PSM Position coder

7th spindle
SPM

Additional axis board To 8th spindle

FSSB(COP10A-3) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

Distributed Manual pulse generator

I/O board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD1A) JD1B Operator's
panel
JD1A

24VDC CPD1 Distributed I/O

board, I/O unit,
JD1B etc. Power
magnetics
JD1A cabinet

- 16 -
B-63943EN/02 2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

When optional functions are provided

Fast data server

Optional slot

board

ATA card The user should provide an ATA card.

ETHERNET(CD38R) Ethernet

HSSB ボード

HSSB(COP21N) Personal Computer

or PANEL i (Note 1)

Profibus master
board

PROFI(CN1) Another NC
(another Profibus unit)

Profibus slave
board

PROFI(CN2) Another NC
(another Profibus unit)

DeviceNet board

DVNET(TBL) Another NC
(another DeviceNet unit)

FL-net board

FLNET(CD38N) FL-net unit

Note 1 The 30i/31i/32i model is still used when a

personal computer or PANEL i is
connected using an HSSB interface.

- 17 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

3 INSTALLATION

- 18 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE

CABINET

3.1.1 Environmental Conditions outside the Cabinet

The peripheral units and the control unit have been designed on the
assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In this manual
"cabinet" refers to the following:
• Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing
the control unit or peripheral units;
• Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder,
for housing the LCD/MDI unit or operator's panel.
• Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation
and design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.

Ambient Operating 0°C to 45°C

temperature of Storage, Transport -20°C to 60°C
the cabinet Temperature change 0.3°C/minute or less
Normal 75%RH or less, no condensation
Humidity Short period
95%RH or less, no condensation
(less than 1 month)
Operating 0.5G or less
Vibration
Non-operating 1.0G or less
Meters above Operating Up to 1000 m (Note)
sea level Non-operating Up to 12000 m
Normal machine shop environment
(The environment must be considered if the cabinets
Environment
are in a location where the density of dust, coolant,
organic solvent, and/or corrosive gas is relatively high.)

NOTE
If the CNC is installed 1000 m or higher above sea level, the allowable upper
ambient temperature of the CNC in the cabinet is changed as follows.
Assume that the allowable upper ambient temperature of the CNC in the cabinet
installed 1000 m or higher above sea level decreases by 1.0°C for every 100 m rise
in altitude.
Example)
The upper allowable ambient temperature of the CNC in the cabinet installed
1750 m above sea level is:
55°C - 1750/100 × 1.0°C = 47.5°C
Therefore, the allowable ambient temperature range is from 0°C to 47.5°C.
When a hard disk is used, there are the following installation conditions:
Meters above sea level (operating): -60 to 3000 m
Meters above sea level (non-operating): -60 to 12000 m

- 19 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

3.1.2 Installation Conditions of the CNC and Servo Unit in the

Cabinet

LCD-mounted type control unit Stand-alone type

Condition
and display unit control unit
Operating 0°C to 58°C 0°C to 55°C
Storage,
Ambient −20°C to 60°C
Transport
temperature
Temperature
0.3°C/minute or less
change
Normal 75%RH or less, no condensation
Short period
Humidity
(less than 1 95%RH or less, no condensation
month)
0.5G or less
FANUC conducted an evaluation test under the
following conditions:
10 to 58 Hz: 0.075 mm (amplitude)
Operating
Vibration 58 to 500Hz: 1G
Direction of vibration: Each of the X, Y, and Z directions
Number of sweep cycles: 10
Conforming to IEC68-2-6
Non-operating 1.0G or less
Meters Operating Up to 1000 m (Note in Subsection 3.1.1)
above sea
Non-operating Up to 12000 m
level
Coolant, lubricant, or cutting chips shall not be sprinkled
Environment directly over the CNC or servo unit. No corrosive gas
shall be allowed.

NOTE
If you want to use a PANEL i, see also Chapter 13.

- 20 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

3.2 POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY

3.2.1 Power Supply Capacities of CNC-related Units

The following CNC-related units require an input power supply that
satisfies the indicated current capacities with a power supply voltage
of 24 VDC ±10%. Here, note that momentary voltage changes and
ripples are also within ±10% of the power supply voltage.

Table 3.2.1 (a) Power supply capacity

Power
Unit supply Remarks
capacity
LCD-mounted 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” type display unit 1.6A Note 1)
type control 15” type display unit 2.2A Note 1)
unit
Stand-alone Control unit (alone) 1.6A
type control 10.4” display unit 0.7A
unit 15” display unit 1.5A
Optional board Additional axis board 0.3A
Additional spindle board 0.2A
Fast data server board 0.2A
HSSB board 0.2A
Profibus master board 0.2A
Profibus slave board 0.1A
FL-net board 0.2A
DeviceNet (master) board 0.1A

NOTE
1 The liquid-crystal display and MDI unit are
included. Optional boards are not included.
2 When an RS-232C unit (with power supplied from
the NC) is connected to the RS-232C port, +0.2 A
is further required.
3 Use memory cards that consume no more than 2
W.
4 For the PANEL i, see Chapter 13.
5 For the FS300i/310is/320is, see Chapter 11.
6 For other peripheral units (such as I/O units), see
Table 3.2.1 (b) and also refer to the relevant
manuals.
7 When you select the input DC power supply for the
CNC control section, consider the restrictions other
than the power supply capacity. Be sure to see
also Subsection 4.4.2.

- 21 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

Table 3.2.1 (b) Power supply rating (peripheral units)

Power supply
Unit Remarks
capacity
MDI unit 0A
Standard machine operator’s panel 0.4A
Operator's panel I/O module 0.3A+7.3mA×DI
Connector panel I/O module (basic) 0.2A+7.3mA×DI
Connector panel I/O module 0.1A+7.3mA×DI
(additional)
Separate detector interface unit 0.9A Basic 4-axis unit
only
Separate detector interface unit 1.5A Basic 4 axes +
additional 4 axes

- 22 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

3.3 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE

MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET

When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental

conditions described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic
interference on the screen, noise resistance, and maintenance
requirements must be considered. The cabinet design must meet the
following conditions :

(1) The cabinet must be fully closed.

The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne
dust, coolant, and organic solvent.
(2) The cabinet must be designed so that the permissible temperature
of each unit is not exceeded. For actual heat design, see Section
3.4.
(3) A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air
within. (This is not necessary for a unit with fan.)
The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along
the surface of each installed unit.

CAUTION
If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust
easily adheres to the unit. This may cause the
unit to fail. (This is not necessary for a unit with
fan.)

(4) For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required

between each unit and the wall of the cabinet.
(5) Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in
order to seal the cabinet.
(6) The display unit must not be installed in such a place that coolant
would directly fall onto the unit. The control unit has a
dust-proof front panel, but the unit should not be placed in a
location where coolant would directly fall onto it.
(7) Noise must be minimized.
As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts
that generate noise may be placed near noise-sensitive parts in
the magnetics cabinet.
The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet
design to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being
transmitted to the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.5 for
details of noise elimination/management.
(8) When placing units in the cabinet, also consider ease of
maintenance.
The units should be placed so that they can be checked and
replaced easily when maintenance is performed.
(9) The hard disk drive and floppy disk drive must not be installed
near the source of a strong magnetic field.
(10) The installation conditions of the I/O unit and connector panel
I/O module must be satisfied.

- 23 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit and

connector panel I/O module must be installed in the direction
shown in the following figure. Clearances of 100 mm or more
both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and
ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the
I/O unit and connector panel I/O module.

Top
Connector panel I/O module or
I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall extend
from the bottom of this unit.)

Bottom

- 24 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

3.4 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC

CABINET

The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units
and parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated
heat is radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the
air in the cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels.
If the amount of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface
area of the cabinet, the less the internal temperature rises. The
thermal design of the cabinet refers to calculating the heat generated in
the cabinet, evaluating the surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging
that surface area by installing heat exchangers in the cabinet, if
necessary. Such a design method is described in the following
subsections.

3.4.1 Temperature Rise within the Machine Tool Magnetic Cabinet

The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6
W/°C per 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is
contained in a cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature
of the air in the cabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of
the cabinet refers to the area useful in cooling , that is, the area
obtained by subtracting the area of the cabinet touching the floor from
the total surface area of the cabinet. There are two preconditions :
The air in the cabinet must be circuited by the fun, and the
temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost constant. For
example, the operator’s panel cabinet may contain an LCD-mounted
type control unit or the display of a stand-alone type control unit. To
keep the temperature in the cabinet at 58°C or below when the
ambient temperature is 45°C, the equation below must be satisfied.
Internal heat loss P [W] ≤
6[W/m2⋅°C] × surface area S[m2] × 13[°C] of rise in temperature
(A cooling capacity of 6 W/°C assumes the cabinet is so large that
agitation with the fan motor does not make the temperature
distribution uniform. For a small cabinet like the operator's panel, a
cooling capacity of 8 W/°C, indicated in Subsection 3.4.4, may be
used.)
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4m2 has a cooling
capacity of 24W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to
13°C under these conditions, the internal heat must not exceed
312W. If the actual internal heat is 360W, however, the temperature
in the cabinet rises by 15°C or more. When this happens, the cooling
capacity of the cabinet must be improved using the heat exchanger.
For the power magnetic cabinet containing a stand-alone type control
unit, the internal temperature rise must be suppressed to 55°C or less,
instead of 58°C.

- 25 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

3.4.2 Heat Output of Each Unit

Table 3.4.2 (a) Heat output
Heat
Unit Remarks
output
LCD-mounted 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” type display unit 33Ｗ (Note)
type control unit 15” type display unit 49Ｗ (Note)
Stand-alone type Control unit (alone) 30Ｗ
control unit 10.4” display unit 13Ｗ
15” display unit 34Ｗ
Optional board Additional axis board 4W
Additional spindle board 3W
Fast data server board 3W
HSSB board 4W
Profibus master board 5W
Profibus slave board 2W
FL-net board 5W
DeviceNet (master) board 2W

NOTE
The liquid-crystal display and MDI unit are
included. Optional boards are not included.

Table 3.4.2 (b) Heat output

Heat
Unit Remarks
output
MDI unit 0W
Standard machine operator’s 15W Note 1)
panel
Operator's panel I/O module 12W Note 1)
Connector panel I/O module 8W Note 1)
(basic)
Connector panel I/O module 5W Note 1)
(additional)
Separate detector interface unit 9W Basic 4-axis unit only
Note 2)
Separate detector interface unit 14W Basic 4 axes + additional 4 axes
Note 2)

NOTE
1 The indicated values are when 50% of the module
input signals are ON.
2 Heat output generated within the separate detector
is not included.

- 26 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

3.4.3 Thermal Design of Operator's Panel

With a small cabinet like the operator's panel, the heat dissipating
capacity of the cabinet is as shown below, assuming that there is
sufficient mixing of the air inside the cabinet.
Coated metal surfaces: 8 W/m2°C
Plastic surfaces: 3.7 W/m2°C

An example of the thermal design for the cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.3
is shown below.

Fig. 3.4.3

Assume the following.

Thermal exchange rates
Coated metal surfaces : 8 W/m2⋅°C
Plastic surfaces : 3.7 W/m2⋅°C
Allowable temperature rise : 13°C higher than the exterior
temperature
Also, assume the following.
Dimensions of pendant type cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.3:
560(W) × 470(H) × 150(D) mm
Surface area of metallic sections : 0.5722 m2
Surface area of plastic sections : 0.2632 m2

- 27 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

In this case, the allowable total heat dissipation for the cabinet is:
8 × 0.5722 × 13 + 3.7 × 0.2632 × 13 = 72 W.

In consequence, it can be concluded that the units shown in Table

3.4.3 on the next page can be installed in this cabinet.

Table 3.4.3
LCD-mounted type control unit (10.4” LCD) 33W
Optional board (Fast data server board) 3W
Optional board (Additional axis board) 4W
Standard machine operator's panel 15W
120-mm square fan motor for air mixing 8W
Total heat dissipation of the above 63W

NOTE
The 15 W quoted for the standard machine
operator's panel represents an example heat
output value when half of all the input signals are
turned on. This value varies, depending on the
mechanical configuration.

- 28 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

3.5 ACTION AGAINST NOISE

The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface-mount and
custom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult
to measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise
has many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from
being generated and generated noise from being introduced into the
CNC. This precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool
system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts
generating noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise
sources into the CNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic
induction, and ground loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in
the machine as described in the following section.

3.5.1 Separating Signal Lines

The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in
the following table:
Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.

Group Signal line Action

A Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A separately (Note 1)
Secondary AC power line from groups B and C, or cover group A with an
AC/DC power lines (containing the power electromagnetic shield (Note 2).
lines for the servo and spindle motors) See Section 3.5.4 and connect spark killers or
AC/DC solenoid diodes with the solenoid and relay.
AC/DC relay
B DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid and relay.
DC relay (24VDC) Bind the cables in group B separately from
DI/DO cable between the I/O unit and power group A, or cover group B with an
magnetics cabinet electromagnetic shield.
DI/DO cable between the I/O unit and Separate group B as far from Group C as
machine possible.
24-VDC input power cables connected to the It is more desirable to cover group B with the
control unit and its peripherals shield.
C Cable between the CNC and I/O Unit Bind the cables in group C separately from
Cable for position and velocity feedback group A, or cover group C with an
Cable between the CNC and spindle electromagnetic shield.
amplifier Separate group C as far from Group B as
Cable for the position coder possible.
Cable for the manual pulse generator Be sure to perform shield processing in
Cable between the CNC and the MDI (Note Section 3.5.5.
3)
RS-232C and RS-422 interface cable
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered with the shield

NOTE
- 29 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one

another when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding
between groups with grounded steel plates.
3 The shield is not required when the cable between
the CNC and MDI is shorter than 30 cm.

- 30 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

3.5.2 Ground
The CNC machine tool uses the following three types of grounding:
• Signal grounding
Signal grounding supplies a reference potential (0V) for electrical
signals.
• Grounding for protection
Grounding for protection is performed for safety reasons as well as
to shield against external and internal noise. This type of
grounding includes, for example, the equipment frames, cases and
panels of units, and the shielding on interface cables connecting the
equipment.
• Protective grounding (PE)
Protective grounding (PE) is performed to connect protection
grounds provided for equipment or between units to ground
together at one point as a grounding system.

One of the two grounding methods can be selected for the CNC:
(1) One-point grounding: See Fig. 3.5.2 (a).
(2) Grounding with a nearby ground plate: See Fig. 3.5.2 (b).

Fig. 3.5.2 (a) Example of one-point grounding

- 31 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

Fig. 3.5.2 (b) Example of grounding with a nearby ground plate

Notes on grounding
• The ground resistance in protective grounding (PE) must be 100
Ω or less (type D grounding).
• The cable used for protective grounding (PE) must be of a
sufficient cross section to allow current to flow safely into
protective ground (PE) if an accident such as a short-circuit
occurs. (Generally, a cross section equal to or greater than that
of the AC power cable is required.)
• The cable connected to protective ground (PE) must be
incorporated into the AC power wire such that power cannot be
supplied with the ground wire disconnected.
• A wire for connecting a unit to a nearby plate (path A in Fig.
3.5.2 (b)) must be connected to the plate with the shortest
possible length. The cross section of the wire must satisfy the
IEC connections shown below. When the breaker limits an
input current, however, the wire only needs to satisfy the
requirement of current-carrying capacity of the breaker. When
cross section conditions are defined in the unit manual, the
conditions must be satisfied.
• For plate connection, use path B to connect a PE connection plate
with a unit connection plate as shown in Fig. 3.5.2 (b).
In this case, the cable thickness varies with the capacity of the
AC input power supply for the unit mounted on each metal sheet.
Therefore, when the cross-sectional area is shown in the manual
of each unit, refer the value. Otherwise, see Table 3.5.2 below.
However, when the thickness of the connection cable for
protective earthing (PE) is exceeded, the thickness of the
connection cable for protective earthing (PE) must be used.

- 32 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

Table 3.5.2 Guideline for selecting the cross-sectional area of the

protection copper cable
Rated current of the fuse for protecting
Cross-sectional area of the
an assumed circuit or the rated current of
protection copper cable
the overcurrent protection unit
mm2
A
30 2 or more
50 3.5 or more
100 5.5 or more
150 8 or more
225 14 or more
400 22 or more
600 38 or more
800 50 or more
1000 60 or more
1200 80 or more
1600 100 or more
2000 125 or more
2500 150 or more
3200 200 or more
4000 250 or more
Rated current of the fuse for protecting an assumed circuit or the rated
current of the overcurrent protection unit

When the breaker limits a current, the cable only needs to satisfy the
requirement of current-carrying capacity of the breaker.
Connections made with welding can also be used when they allow a
sufficient current to flow.

* A ground wire for protective grounding must satisfy the

following conditions, as defined in IEC60204.
• Where the cross section of a wire of the connected input
power supply is S:
S ≤ 16 mm2 ... S
16 mm < S ≤ 35 mm2 ... 16 mm2
2

35 mm2< S .. S / 2

- 33 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

3.5.3 Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control Unit

Connecting the 0 V output in the CNC to a protective circuit (ground)

The IEC 204-1 and JIS B 6015 standards specify the following:
- Protection against malfunctions due to ground faults
“To make the control circuit prevent malfunctions of a machine tool
due to a ground fault and not to prevent the machine tool from
stopping, either of the ground and electronic circuits shall be
connected to a protective circuit.”

Note that for each FANUC CNC, the 0V output in the CNC is
connected to a protective circuit (ground).

Machine

24 VDC power
Power supply
magnetics
Output
cabinet
signal
Relay

NC ground terminal
Machine protective circuit (ground) network

Connection to the ground in the user factory

This bold line indicates grounding for the control unit described in the connection manual.
As shown in this figure, by just connecting the ground terminal of the control unit to the machine ground,
the 0 V output of the relay circuit in the power magnetics cabinet is connected to the ground (protective
circuit).

- 34 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

Connecting the ground terminal of an LCD-mounted type control unit

Connect the 0-V line in the control unit with the ground plate of the
cabinet or a nearby plate via the protective grounding terminal (see
above figure).

- 35 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

Connecting the ground terminal of a stand-alone type control unit

For 2-slot rack For 4-slot rack

Signal ground
terminal (Faston
terminal)

Ground cable
2
2 mm or more Grounding plate of
the cabinet

PE

Connect the 0-V lines of the electronic circuits in the control unit to
the ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground terminal.
Use the Faston terminal (FANUC specification: A02B-0166-K330).

- 36 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

3.5.4 Noise Suppressor

The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics
cabinet.
A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices
are turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic
circuits to be disturbed.

Notes on selecting the spark killer

• Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series.
This type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under
AC)
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse
voltage, but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage.
FANUC therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
• The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
(1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
I2 I2
(2) Capacitance (C) : to (µF)
10 20
I : Current at stationary state of the coil
R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer

Spark killer
AC relay

Motor

Spark killer

Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.

NOTE
Use a CR-type noise eliminator. Varistor-type
noise eliminators clamp the peak pulse voltage but
cannot suppress a sharp rising edge.

- 37 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

Diode (used for direct-current circuits)

Diode

Use a diode which can withstand a voltage up

DC relay to two times the applied voltage and a current
up to two times the applied current.

- 38 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

3.5.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing

If a cable connected to the CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, or
other device requires shielding, clamp the cable as shown below.
The clamp both supports and shields the cable. Use this clamp to
ensure stable operation of the system.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp
by the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate
must be made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Ground plate

ƒP [ƒuƒ‹

Cable

Metal fittings for

clamp
40 to 80 mm

Fig. 3.5.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)

NOTE
Select a cable with a proper length.
If the cable is too long, the noise immunity may be
reduced or noise may be caused on other cables.
In addition, when the excess length is coiled, the
inductance is increased and a high voltage is
induced during turning on or off of signals. This
may cause malfunction due to a failure or noise.

- 39 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

Machine side
installation board

Control unit

Ground plate

Metal fittings
for clamp
Shield cover

Fig. 3.5.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)

NOTE
Bring together the cables connected to a CNC or
amplifier near the unit and shield them.

Prepare ground plate like the following figure.

Ground terminal
(grounded)

Hole for securing metal fitting clamp

Mount screw hole

Fig. 3.5.5 (c) Ground plate

For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which

surface is plated with nickel.

- 40 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

Ground plate
8

12

20

Fig. 3.5.5 (d) Ground plate holes

(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.

Max. 55mm

28mm

6mm

17mm

Fig. 3.5.5 (e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp

Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp

A02B-0124-K001 (8 pieces)

- 41 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

3.5.6 Measures Against Surges due to Lightning

To protect the devices from surge voltages due to lightening, it is
recommended to install surge-absorbing elements between the lines of
the input power and between one line and ground. This does not,
however, assure protection from all surges due to lightening.
The recommended items are as follows. (Items made by Okaya
Denki Sangyo Co.)

For the 200-V system

Between lines R⋅A⋅V-781BYZ-2
Between line and ground R⋅A⋅V-781BXZ-4

For the 400-V system

Between lines R⋅A⋅V-152BYZ-2A
Between line and ground R⋅A⋅V-801BXZ-4

Installation procedure
The surge-absorbing elements used for measures against surges due to
lightening must be installed in the input power unit as shown in the
figure below. The figure below shows an example in which an
insulating transformer, shown by dotted lines, is not installed. If an
insulating transformer is installed, surge-absorbing element 2
(between line and ground) is not required.

- 42 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

Notes
(1) For a better surge absorbing effect, the wiring shown by heavy
line must be as short as possible.
Wire Size: The wire diameter must be 2 mm2 or
greater.
Wire length: The sum of the length (a) of the wire for
the connection of surge-absorbing element
1 and that (b) of surge-absorbing element 2
must be 2 m or less.
(2) If conducting dielectric strength tests by applying overvoltages
(1000 VAC and 1500 VAC) to the power line, remove
surge-absorbing element 2. Otherwise, the overvoltages would
activate the element.
(3) The nonfuse breaker (5A) is required to protect the line when a
surge voltage exceeding the capacity of the surge-absorbing
elements is applied and the surge-absorbing elements are
short-circuited.
(4) Because no current flows through surge-absorbing elements 1
and 2 during normal operation, the nonfuse breaker (5A) can be
shared by other electric devices on the machine. It can be used
with the control power supply of the servo unit power supply
module or with the power supply for the fan motor of the spindle
motor.

- 43 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

3.6 CONTROL UNIT

3.6.1 Installing the LCD-mounted Type Control Unit

The control unit has a built-in fan motor.
Air enters the control unit through the bottom and is drawn through
the fan motor which is located on the top of the control unit.
Space A , shown in Fig. 3.6.1, must be provided to ensure
unrestricted air flow. Also, space B should be provided whenever
possible. When space B cannot be provided, ensure that nothing
is placed in the immediate vicinity which could obstruct the air flow.

AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

A A A

50

Unit rear panel

50

B B B

Fig. 3.6.1

- 44 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

3.6.2 Installing the Stand-alone Type Control Unit

The control unit is equipped with a fan motor.
Air is fed into the bottom of the unit and output from the fan motor
mounted on the top of the unit.
The spaces shown in Fig. 3.6.2 (areas A and B ) are always
required to ensure smooth air flow.
Also, adequate service access space is required in front of and at the
top of the unit so that printed circuit boards and the fan motor can be
replaced easily if necessary.
There is a spare connector located at the far end (at middle height) on
the right side of the control unit. This connector is used for
controller testing and other purposes. Therefore, space (area C )
for handling the connector is required.

Space for air flow, and access area for fan replacement

2-slot rack: Approx. 65

4-slot rack: Approx. 95 Approx. 180
30

50 A A

Access space for

spare connector

380 C
Spare connector

50 B B
80

Sufficient space for

replacing a printed circuit
board is required. Unit: mm

Fig. 3.6.2

- 45 -
3.INSTALLATION B-63943EN/02

3.7 CABLING DIAGRAM

For the cabling diagram, see the control unit configuration and
component names in Section 1.1.

- 46 -
B-63943EN/02 3.INSTALLATION

3.8 DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND

PENDANT BOXES

The cabinet and pendant box that house a display and a operator's
panel that are to be designed and manufactured by the machine tool
builder are susceptible to dust, cutting debris, oil mist, etc. Note the
following and make sure that they are structured to prevent their entry.
1) The cabinet and pendant box must be of a hermetically sealed
structure.
2) Apply packing to the panel mounting surface to which a display
and operator's panel are to be mounted.
3) Make sure that the door packing of the cabinet and pendant box
is sealed firmly.
4) For a cabinet or pendant box with a rear cover, apply packing to
the mounting surface.
5) Make sure that the cable entrance is sealed with packing,
connectors for conduits, etc.
6) Make sure that all other openings are blocked, if any.
7) Make sure that the display and operator's panel do not receive
cutting debris and coolant directly.
8) Oil can easily stay on the top of the cabinet and pendant box,
possibly dripping down the display and operator's panel. Make
sure that the cabinet and pendant box is of such a structure that
oil do not collect or that oil do not drip down the display or
panel.

- 47 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

- 48 -
B-63943EN/02 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

4.1 GENERAL

This chapter explains the connection of power supply for control unit.

- 49 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

4.2 TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL

UNIT

4.2.1 Power Supply for the Control Unit

Supply power (24VDC) to the control unit from an external sources.
Provide an ON/OFF circuit for turning the AC power on and off
outside the unit as shown in Fig. 4.2.1. To minimize the effect of
noise or voltage fluctuations to the CNC, it is recommended that a
power to the CNC be provided independently of the power sources to
devices with large noise or load fluctuations.
When the 30i series with PC functions is used, apply countermeasures
to guard against the possible destruction of hard disk storage due to
momentary power failure or power outage, by installing an
uninterruptible power supply, etc.
See Section 3.2 for power capacity.

Fig. 4.2.1

- 50 -
B-63943EN/02 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

4.2.2 External 24 VDC Power Specification and Circuit

Configuration
Specifications of recommended external 24 VDC power supply
(regulated power supply): (The power supply must satisfy UL1950.)
Output voltage:
+24 V ±10% (21.6 V to 26.4 V)
(including ripple voltage and noise. See the figure below.)
Output current:
The continuous load current must be larger than the current
consumption of the CNC.
(At the maximum temperature inside the power magnetics
cabinet in which the power supply is located)
Load fluctuations (including rush current):
The output voltage must not go out of the above range due to
load fluctuations by external DO and other factors.
Instantaneous input interruption retention time:
10 ms (for -100%), 20 ms (for -50%)
Allowable 24-VDC instantaneous interruption time:
0.5 ms (lower than 21.6 V)

Fig 4.2.2 (a) Timing chart

- 51 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

- Notes to take when the vertical axis exists

When the vertical axis exists, select the DC power supply that has a
long voltage hold time to decrease the amount of vertical axis falling
during power-off (including a power failure).
If the operating voltage drops to less than or equal to 21.6V, the CNC
releases servo activation. Therefore, when the hold time for 24 VDC
during AC power-off is too short, servo activation is released before
the breaks are applied because some peripheral circuit detects
power-off. This may increase the amount of vertical axis falling.
Generally, a power supply with sufficient power capacity tends to
increase the hold time during power-off.

- Circuit configurations
The following circuit configurations are not recommended.

Forbidden
<1> Circuit examples that cannot retain the output voltage at an
instantaneous interruption (the voltage reduces to 21.6 V or
below)

Example 1
Rectifier
AC input circuit
CNC unit

Example 2
Rectifier
AC input circuit CNC unit

NOTE
The rectifier circuit means a circuit using diodes for
full-wave rectification.

- 52 -
B-63943EN/02 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

<2> Circuit examples that exceed the output voltage specifications

(21.6 V to 26.4 V) due to an abrupt load change

Example 1

Regulated
AC input power supply CNC unit

Device with
remarkable load
fluctuations

Example 2

Regulated
AC input
power supply CNC unit

Device with large

rush current

For a circuit configuration in <2>, connect another regulated power

supply to be specifically used for the device with remarkable load
fluctuations so that the CNC and other units are not affected.
Avoid the use of a configuration in <2> if possible, even in an
environment with small load fluctuations or rush current. When two
or more units are connected to the same power supply, the 24-VDC
power may not be turned on due to a failure in a unit other than the
CNC. If this happens, it takes much time to locate the failure
because the CNC cannot start and no alarm indication is provided.
When the CNC and other units are connected to the same power
supply because of limited space for the power magnetics cabinet or for
some other reason, careful consideration must be given to possible
rush currents and voltage fluctuations. In addition, to prevent power
supply noise from entering the CNC, a noise filter must be inserted
before the power to the CNC. (Recommended noise filter:
ZGB2203-01U manufactured by TDK)

- 53 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

Recommended
The following circuit configuration is recommended.
The power to the CNC and other units (FANUC I/O Unit MODEL A
(I/O Unit-A), FANUC Servo Unit β series with an I/O link (β
amplifier with an I/O link), and so on in the sample configuration
below) is assumed to be turned on or off at the same time. (The
power to any unit is not assumed to be turned on during operation or
before the power to the CNC is turned on.

On/off Regulated
AC input circuit power CNC unit
supply

I/O Unit-A

β amplifier with
an I/O link

Regulated
power Device with large noise
supply or load fluctuations

Fig 4.2.2 (b)

Caution
Turning the power to units on simultaneously when turning the power
to the CNC:
When the following power-on timing condition is satisfied, the power
to units is assumed to be turned on simultaneously when the power to
the CNC is turned on.
On
Power to the CNC
Off
t1 t2

Power to units On
(including the Power
Mate) Off

t1:200ms Means that the power to units (including the Power Mate)
is turned on within 200 ms before the power to the CNC is
turned on.

- 54 -
B-63943EN/02 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

t2:-500ms Means that the power to units (including the Power Mate)
is turned on within 500 ms after the power to the CNC is
turned on.

Turning the power to units off simultaneously when turning the power
to the CNC off:
This means that the power to units may be turned off within 500 ms
before the power to the CNC control unit is turned off. If the power
to units is turned off earlier, alarm information is left in the NC.
On
Power to the CNC
Off
t1

t1:500ms Means that the power to units are turned off within 500 ms
before the power to the CNC is turned off.
The power to the CNC must not be turned on or off with the power to
units on.

4.2.3 Power-on Sequence

Turn on the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following
sequence:

1 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC)

2 Servo amplifier control power supply (200 VAC)
3 Power to the slave I/O units connected via the I/O link, the separate
detector interface unit, and the stand-alone type LCD unit (24 VDC), power
to the CNC controller (24 VDC), power to the separate detector (scale)

As for a PANEL i, no specific power turn-on sequence for the CNC

control unit is required.

4.2.4 Power-off Sequence

Turn off the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following
sequence:
1 Power to the slave I/O units connected via the I/O link, the separate
detector interface unit, and the stand-alone type LCD unit (24 VDC), power
to the CNC controller (24 VDC)
2 Servo amplifier control power supply (200 VAC), power to the separate
detector (scale)
3 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC)

When turning off the power of the CNC controller, be sure to turn off
the power of units such as the slave I/O devices connected through I/O
Link, β amplifier with I/O Link, Power Mate and separate detector

- 55 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

interface unit, stand-alone type LCD unit, control power supply of the
servo amplifier, and separate detector (such as a scale).
As for a PANEL i, no specific power-off sequence for the CNC
control unit is required.

CAUTION
When the PANEL i is used, the OS must be shut
down before the power to the control unit is turned
off. Be careful not to turn off the power while the
hard disk is being accessed or before the OS has
terminated; otherwise, the hardware contents may
be destroyed.

When the power is turned off or when the power is momentarily

disconnected, processing must be performed from the machine as
necessary, because motor control is disabled.
For example, when movement along a vertical axis is controlled, a
brake should be applied to prevent falling. Usually, the brake clamps
the motor when the servo is not activated or when the motor is not
turning. The clamp is released only when the motor is turning.
When servo axis control is disabled by power-off or momentary
power disconnection, the brake usually clamps the servo motor. In
this case, before the relay for clamping operates, the controlled axis
may fall. So, also consider whether the distance the axis is likely to
fall will cause a problem.
When the power is turned off:
Be sure to apply a brake for clamping before turning off the
power to CNC.
When the power fails:
If a power failure is detected, a brake must be applied
immediately. Select the power supply with a longer DC power
retention time after AC power-off, because the servo is
deactivated if the power to CNC is turned off.

- 56 -
B-63943EN/02 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

4.3 CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT

Supply the power to the control unit from an external 24 VDC power
supply.
CNC control unit External power

CPD16A
1 +24V 24VDC stabilized
2 0V power
3 24VDC ±10%

Cable
CPD16A
AMP Japan
1-178288-3 (housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)
External power

+24V (1) Select a source that

meets the external
0V (2)
power terminal.

Recommended cable : A02B-0124-K830(5m)

(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power
side)

As for an stand-alone type control unit, part of the 24 VDC power

input to CPD19A can be taken out from CPD19B by branching.
CPD19B should be connected as shown below. In this case, the
rating of the external 24 VDC power supplied to CPD19A must be the
sum of the power consumed within the control unit and that supplied
to external equipment via CPD19B. Up to 1.0 A can be supplied to
the external equipment.

CNC control unit External device

CPD19B
1 +24V
2 0V
3

Cable

CPD19B
AMP Japan
2-178288-3 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)
External device
Select a connector that
+24V (1) matches the pin layout
0V (2) of the external device.

- 57 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

4.4 BATTERIES

In a system using this CNC, batteries are used as follows:

Use Component connected to battery

Memory backup in the CNC control CNC control unit
unit
BIOS data backup in the PANEL i PANEL i
Preservation of the current position Separate detector interface unit
indicated by the separate absolute
pulse coder
Preservation of the current position Servo amplifier
indicated by the absolute pulse
coder built into the motor

Used batteries must be discarded according to appropriate local

ordinances or rules. When discarding batteries, insulate them by
using tape and so forth to prevent the battery terminals from
short-circuiting.

4.4.1 Battery for Memory Backup in the CNC Control Unit (3 VDC)
Offset data, and system parameters are stored in SRAM memory
in the control unit. The power to the SRAM memory is backed up
by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit.
The above data is not lost even when the main battery goes dead.
The backup battery is mounted on the control unit at shipping. This
battery can maintain the contents of memory for about a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message "BAT"
blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC.
When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible.
In general, the battery can be replaced within two or three weeks,
however, this depends on the system configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no
longer be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this
state causes system alarm to occur because the contents of memory are
lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing the
battery.
FANUC thus recommends that the battery be replaced periodically,
once a year, regardless of whether a battery alarm is issued.
The following two kinds of batteries can be used.
• Lithium battery built into the CNC control unit.
• Two alkaline dry cells (size D) in the external battery case.

NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the
factory.

- 58 -
B-63943EN/02 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

4.4.1.1 Replacing the lithium battery

Replacing battery for LCD-mounted type control unit

- Replacement procedure
When a lithium battery is used
Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B-0200-K102
(FANUC specification: A98L-0031-0012)).
1 Turn on the power to the CNC. After about 30 seconds, turn off
the power.
2 Remove the old battery from the backside of the CNC control
unit.
First, pull the battery cable to unplug the connector. Then,
remove the battery from the battery case.
The battery case of a control unit without optional slots is located
at the rear of the unit as shown in the figure below. The battery
case of a control unit with optional slots is located next to the fan
on the top of the unit.
3 Insert a new battery and reconnect the connector.
4 Clamp the battery cable as shown in Fig. 4.4.1 (a).

Connector

Battery case

Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102

Fig. 4.4.1 (a) Unit without optional slots

- 59 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

Battery case

Connector

Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102

Fig. 4.4.1 (b) Unit with optional slots

Battery cable

Fig. 4.4.1 (c) Clamping the battery cable

WARNING
Using other than the recommended battery may
result in the battery exploding. Replace the
battery only with the specified battery
(A02B-0200-K102).

CAUTION
Steps 1 to 3 should be completed within 30
minutes. Do not leave the control unit without a
battery for any longer than the specified period.
Otherwise, the contents of memory may be lost.
If steps 1 to 3 may not be completed within 30
minutes, save all contents of the SRAM memory to
the memory card beforehand. Thus, if the
contents of the SRAM memory are lost, the
contents can be restored easily.
For the method of operation, refer to Maintenance
manual.

When discarding a battery, observe the applicable ordinances or other

rules of your local government. Also, cover the terminals of the
battery with vinyl tape or the like to prevent a short-circuit.

- 60 -
B-63943EN/02 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

Replacing the battery for stand-alone type control unit

- Replacing the battery
If a lithium battery is used, have A02B-0200-K102 (FANUC internal
code: A98L-0031-0012) handy.
1 Turn the CNC on. About 30 seconds later, turn the CNC off.
2 Remove the battery from the top area of the CNC unit.
First, pull the battery cable to unplug the connector. Then,
remove the battery from the battery case.
The battery case is provided in the top area of the face plate of
the main CPU board.
3 Replace the battery, then connect the connector.

WARNING
Using other than the recommended battery may
result in the battery exploding. Replace the
battery only with the specified battery
(A02B-0200-K102).

CAUTION
Steps 1 to 3 should be completed within 30
minutes. Do not leave the control unit without a
battery for any longer than the specified period.
Otherwise, the contents of memory may be lost.
If steps 1 to 3 may not be completed within 30
minutes, save all contents of the SRAM memory to
the memory card beforehand. Thus, if the contents
of the SRAM memory are lost, the contents can be
restored easily. For the method of operation, refer
to Maintenance manual.

Discard the dead battery, observing appropriate municipal rules and

regulations. When discarding the battery, insulate the terminal with a
tape so that no short-circuit would occur.

- 61 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

Replacing the alkaline dry cells (size D)

(1) Prepare two new alkaline dry cells (size D).
(2) Leave the power to the CNC turned on for 30 seconds or so.
(3) Turn the CNC off.
(4) Remove the battery case cover.
(5) Replace the batteries, paying careful attention to their orientation.
(6) Replace the battery case cover.

NOTE
When replacing the dry cells, use the same
procedure as that for lithium battery replacement
procedure, described above.

Dry cell × 2

Cover

Connection terminal
on the rear

Battery case Mounting hole × 4

- 62 -
B-63943EN/02 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

Use of alkaline dry cells (size D)

- Connection
Power from the external batteries is supplied through the connector to
which the lithium battery is connected. The lithium battery, provided
as standard, can be replaced with external batteries in the battery case
(A02B-0236-C281) according to the battery replacement procedures
described above.

NOTE
1 Install the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) in a
location where the batteries can be replaced even
when the control unit power is on.
2 The battery cable connector is attached to the
control unit by means of a simple lock system. To
prevent the connector from being disconnected
due to the weight of the cable or tension within the
cable, fix the cable section within 50 cm of the
connector.
3 Separate this battery cable from any part that
generates noise such as a power line.

- 63 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

4.4.2 Batteries for PANEL i (3VDC)

A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the CNC display
unit with PC functions. This battery is factory-set in the PANEL i.
This battery has sufficient capacity to retain BIOS data for one year.
If the voltage of a battery drops, the following message is displayed
on the screen for a self-test performed immediately after power-on,
and the self-test pauses.
CMOS Battery Failure
**System Stopped by Temperature / Fan / Battery Alarm. Turn off the
Power. **
If this condition occurs, replace the battery as soon as possible (within
one week).
FANUC recommends that the battery be replaced once per year
regardless of whether a battery alarm is issued.

Replacing the battery

1 Obtain a new lithium battery (A02B-0200-K102).
2 After power has been supplied for at least five seconds, turn off
the power to PANEL i. Remove the intelligent terminal from
the panel so that replacement work can be done from the rear of
the intelligent terminal.
3 Detach the connector of the lithium battery, and remove the
battery from the battery holder.
4 Attach the connector, and place the battery in the battery holder.
5 Install PANEL i again.
6 Turn on the power, and check that the BIOS data are maintained
(no error message is output at start-up).

NOTE
Between removing an old battery and inserting new
battery, no more than five minutes must be allowed
to elapse.

The BIOS data is usually preserved as long as the battery is replaced

according to the above procedure. If the data is lost, the following
error message is displayed when the power is turned on:
251 : System CMOS checksum bad – Default configuration used.
At this time, check whether the current BIOS settings of the PANEL i
have been changed from the default BIOS settings, and resume your
settings as required.

- 64 -
B-63943EN/02 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

Connector Lithium battery

BAT1 A02B-0200-K102

Fig. 4.4.2 Connecting the lithium battery of a PANEL i

- 65 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

4.4.3 Battery for Separate Absolute Pulse Coders (6VDC)

(1) When the voltage of the battery for absolute pulse coders
becomes low, DS alarms 306 to 308 occur.
(2) When DS alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery
becomes low) occurs, replace the battery as soon as possible. In
general, the battery should be replaced within one or two weeks,
however, this depends on the number of pulse coders used.
(3) If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, DS alarm 306
(battery zero alarm) occurs. In this case, the current positions
for the pulse coders can no longer be maintained.
In this state, DS alarm 300 (reference position return request
alarm) occurs. Return the tool to the reference position after
replacing the battery.
(4) The service life of the batteries is about two years if they are
used in a six-axis configuration with αi/αis/βis series servo
motors and one year if they are used in a six-axis configuration
with α/β series servo motors. FANUC recommends that you
replace the batteries periodically according to the battery service
life.
(5) To connect the battery, use the battery case or incorporate the
battery into the servo amplifier. Note that the attachment
method of the battery depends on the connection method and the
type of servo amplifier.

- 66 -
B-63943EN/02 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

Replacing batteries
To prevent absolute position information in absolute pulse coders
from being lost, turn on the machine power before replacing the
battery. The replacement procedure is described below. (Note:
The turning-on step is not required when the αi or αis series servo
motor or βis series servo motor (β0.4is to β22is) is used.)
(1) Turn the servo amplifier on.
(2) Place the machine in the emergency stop state.
(3) Confirm that servo motors are not active.
(4) Make sure the DC link charge LED is off.
(5) Remove the old battery and then attach a new one.
(6) Now, replacement has been completed. The system power can
be turned off.

NOTE
The absolute pulse coder of the αi/αis/βis (β0.4is to
β22is) series servo motor is incorporated with a
backup capacitor as standard. This backup capacitor
enables an absolute position detection to be
continued for about 10 minutes. Therefore, no zero
point return need be performed if the time during
which servo amplifier power is kept off for battery
replacement is within 10 minutes. If battery
replacement takes 10 minutes or more, the power
must remain turned on.

CAUTION
1 When replacing the battery, be careful not to touch
bare metal parts in the panel. In particular, be
careful not to touch any high-voltage circuits due to
the electric shock hazard.
2 Before replacing the battery, make sure the DC link
charge LED is off. Otherwise, an electric shock may
be received.
3 Be sure to use the specified battery. If another type
of battery is used, it may overheat, blow out, or catch
fire.
4 Install the battery with correct polarity. If the battery
is installed with incorrect polarity, it may overheat,
blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute position
information in absolute pulse coders may be lost.
5 During attachment of the battery, insert the
factory-attached protection socket into the CX5X or
CX5Y connector, whichever is not used. If the +6 V
pin and 0 V pin are short-circuited, the battery may
overheat, blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute
position information in absolute pulse coders may be
lost.

- 67 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

Replacing D-size alkaline dry cells in the battery case

Replace four D-size alkaline batteries (A06B-6050-K061) in the
battery case installed in the machine.
(1) Have four D-size alkaline batteries on hand.
(2) Loosen the screws on the battery case. Remove the cover.
(3) Replace the alkaline batteries in the case. Pay careful attention to
the polarity of the alkaline batteries.
(4) Attach the cover.
Screws

Cover

CAUTION
Install the battery with correct polarity. If the
battery is installed with incorrect polarity, it may
overheat, blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute
position information in absolute pulse coders may
be lost.

4.4.4 Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6VDC)
The battery for the absolute pulse coder built into the motor is
installed in the servo amplifier. For how to connect and replace the
battery, refer to the following manuals:
• FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual
• FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series Maintenance Manual
• FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series (I/O Link option)
Maintenance Manual

- 68 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

- 69 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

5.1 CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT (LCD-

MOUNTED TYPE 30i SERIES)

5.1.1 Overview
Since the controller and display unit of the LCD-mounted type 30i
series are connected internally, they do not need to be connected
externally. Therefore, this section describes how to connect between
the controller and the MDI unit.

5.1.2 Connection to the MDI Unit (LCD-mounted Type 30i Series)

Unit rear panel

CA55

CK27
MDI cable

MDI unit

- 70 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5.1.3 Connection with the Standard MDI Unit

CK27

, Maximum cable length : 20m)

NOTE
For MDI cable connector mating on the CA55 side,
a simple lock mechanism is employed. Ensure
that a load greater than 1 kg is not applied to the
connectors. Moreover, clamp the cable so that
excessive force is not applied due to vibration.
However, shielding and clamping are not required
for a cable of up to 50 cm.

- 71 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

5.1.4 Key Layout of MDI

For Lathe (T series)

- Standard MDI unit (ONG keys)
Help key Reset key Address/numeric keys

Edit keys

Cancel (CAN) key

Case shift key

Shift key Input key

AUX key

CTRL key

ALT key

TAB key

Page change keys Cursor keys Function keys

- Small MDI unit (OGN keys)

Address keys/Numeric keys

Cancel (CAN) key

Input key
Function keys
Shift key

Help key

Page change keys

Reset key

Edit keys

Cursor keys

- 72 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

For Machining center (M series)

- Standard MDI unit (ONG keys)
Help key Reset key Address/numeric keys

Edit keys

Cancel (CAN) key

Case shift key

Shift key Input key

AUX key

CTRL key

ALT key

TAB key

Page change keys Cursor keys Function keys

- Small MDI unit (OGN keys)

Address/numeric keys

Cancel (CAN) key

Input key
Function keys
Shift key

Help key

Page change keys

Reset key

Edit keys

Cursor keys

- 73 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

Common to lathe system / machining center system

- Standard MDI unit (QWERTY keys)
Help key Function keys

Reset key

Address keys
Numeric keys

Case shift key

AUX key

CTRL key
Shift key

ALT key Input key

TAB key

Page change keys Cursor keys Edit keys Cancel (CAN) key

- 74 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5.2 CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT

(STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES)

5.2.1 Overview
This subsection explains connection with the display/MDI units for
the stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i.
For the stand-alone type Series 300i/310i/320i, see Chapter 13. For
the stand-alone type Series 300is/310is/320is, see Chapter 11.

5.2.2 Connection with an LCD Unit

Control unit LCD unit

Optical fiber cable
COP21A COP21A

External power
supply
24VDC ± 10% CP1A

CP1B

CA55

MDI unit

CK27

- 75 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

Connection of a power supply to the LCD unit

An optical fiber cable is used to make the connection between the
CNC control unit and LCD unit.
For details of the optical fiber cable, see Appendix D.

Supply the power to the LCD unit from an external 24 VDC power
supply.
LCD unit External power

CP1A
1 +24V 24VDC stabilized
2 0V power
3 24VDC ±10%

Cable
CP1A
AMP Japan
1-178288-3 (housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)
External power

+24V (1) Select a source that

meets the external
0V (2)
power terminal.
Recommended cable : A02B-0124-K830(5m)
(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power
side)

Part of the 24 VDC power input to CP1A can be taken out from CP1B
by branching. CP1B connection is as shown below. In this case,
the rating of the external 24 VDC power supplied to CP1A must be
the sum of the power consumed within the LCD unit and that supplied
to external equipment via CP1B. Up to 1.0 A can be supplied to the
external equipment.

LCD unit External device

CP1B
1 +24V
2 0V
3

Cable

CP1B
AMP Japan
2-178288-3 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)
External device
Select a connector that
+24V (1) matches the pin layout
0V (2) of the external device.

- 76 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Connection between the LCD unit and MDI unit

For the connection between the connector (CA55) of the LCD unit
and that (CK1) of the MDI unit, see Subsection 5.1.3, “Connection
with the Standard MDI Unit.”
With the LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i, the connector (CA55)
is located on the CNC control unit on the back of the LCD. With the
stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i, the connector is located on the
back of the LCD unit.

- 77 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

5.3 CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

5.3.1 Overview
An input/output device is used to enter information such as CNC
programs and parameters from an external device to the CNC, or to
output information from the CNC to an external device.
The input/output devices usable with this CNC include Handy File.
The interface of the input/output devices electrically conforms to
RS-232-C, so that a connection can be made with a device that has an
RS-232-C interface.
The tables below indicate the serial ports of this CNC.
See Chapter 13, when an PANEL i is used.

(For Series 30i/31i/32i control unit)

Port name Interface location
First channel (JD56A) Main control unit
Second channel (JD36A) Main control unit Note 1

(For 15” LCD-mounted type control unit)

Port name Interface location
First channel (JD56A) Main control unit
Second channel (JD54A) Main control unit Note 1

(For PANEL i)
Port name Interface location
First channel on the PANEL i side (JD33) On the PANEL i Note 2
Second channel on the PANEL i side On the PANEL i
(JD46)

NOTE
1 When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used
for touch panel communication on the CNC side,
so that this port cannot be used as a
general-purpose port.
2 When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used
for touch panel communication on the PC side, so
that this port cannot be used as a general-purpose
port.

- 78 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5.3.2 Connecting I/O Devices

Unit rear panel

R232-1 R232-2 Punch panel

JD56A JD36A

Handy File

This figure shows an

example of connection
for the LCD-mounted
type 30i series.

- 79 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

NOTE
This interface is the RS-232C interface on the CNC
side. When using the PANEL i, usually use the
RS-232C interface on the personal computer for
parameter I/Os, program I/Os, and other similar
operations.
This RS-232C interface on the CNC side can be
used on the 300i/310i/320i only for the following
purposes:
• Ladder uploading or downloading via RS-232-C
using FANUC LADDER or FANUC LADDER II
• Ladder monitoring from an external PC using
FANUC LADDER II
• DNC operation via RS-232-C, external I/O device
control
• Input/output of parameters and programs by
using the CNC screen display function

- 80 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5.3.3 RS-232-C Serial Port

CNC

RELAY CONNECTOR
JD36A, JD56A, JD54
(DBM-25S)
PCR-E20MDK-SL-A
(PCR-EV20MDT) 1 FG
14
2 SD
1 RD 11 SD 15
3 RD
2 0V 12 0V 16
>„ >„ < 4 RS
3 DR 13 ER 17
5 CS
4 0V 14 0V 18
6 DR
5 CS 15 RS 19
7 SG
6 0V 16 0V 20 ER
8 CD
7 CD 17 (*) 21
9
8 0V 18 (+5V)(*) 22
10
9 (*) 19 +24V 23
11
10 +24V 20 (+5V)(*) 24
12
25 +24V
13

NOTE
1 +24 V can be used as the power supply for FANUC
RS-232-C equipment.
2 Do not connect anything to those pins for which
signal names are not indicated.
3 Pins 18 and 20 (+5V) are provided for touch
channel connection.
4 The upper connector name on the CNC side is for
the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector
name, enclosed in parentheses, is for the
stand-alone type.
5 With JD56A, the pins marked with an asterisk (*)
are used for a serial spindle.

- 81 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

For LCD-mounted type

For stand-alone type

NOTE
1 Do not connect anything to those pins for which
signal names are not indicated.
2 The recommended cable connector FI30-20S
(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used
for connectors JD5A and JD5B of the stand-alone
type.

- 82 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5.3.4 RS-232-C Interface Specification

RS-232-C Interface signals

Generally signals as follows are used in RS-232-C interface.

CNC

Output
SD (Send data)

Input RD (Receive data)

RS (Request to Send)
When CS is not used short CS
and RS.
CS (Enable to send)

When DR is not used

ER (Ready) short DR and ER.

DR (Data set ready)

Always short ER and
CD (Check data) CD.

SG (Signal ground)

FG (Frame ground)

Fig. 5.3.4 (a) RS-232-C interface

- 83 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

Signal description of RS-232-C interface

Signal RS-232C I/O Description
name circuit
number
SD 103 Output Sending Start bit Stop bits

data
RD 104 Input Receiving
(When ISO code 0 is sent)
data
RS 105 Output Sending This signal is set to on when NC starts
request sending data and is turned off when
transmission ends.
CS 106 Input Sending When both this signal and the DR signal
permitted are set, the NC can send data. If external
device processing is delayed by a punching
operation, etc., NC data sending can be
stopped by turning off this signal after
sending two characters, including the data
being sent currently. If this signal will not be
used, make sure to strap this signal circuit
to the RS signal circuit.
DR 107 Input Data set When external device is ready to operate,
ready this signal is set. This signal should usually
be connected to the signal indicating
external device power supply being on. (ER
signal of external device). See Note below.
The NC transfers data when this signal is
set. If the signals turned off during data
transfer, alarm 086 is issued. If the DR
signal will not be used, make sure to strap
this signal circuit to the ER signal circuit.
ER 108.2 Output NC ready This signal is set when the NC is ready to
to operate. External device should regard the
operation SD signal as being significant when the ER
signal is set.
CD 109 Input Signal Since this signal is not used in connections
Condition with external device, the signal circuit must
be strapped, inside the connecting cable, to
the ER signal circuit.
SG 102 Signal grounding
FG 101 Frame grounding

NOTE
Signal on/off state is defined as follows;

-3V or lower +3V or higher

Function OFF ON
Signal Condition Marking Spacing

- 84 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Transmission Method of RS-232-C interface

- Start-stop
Generally, two transmission methods are available at the serial
interface. This CNC use the start-stop method.
With this method, start and stop signals are output before and after
each data bit.
One character in start-stop

b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8

Start bit Data bit Stop bits

(8 bit including one parity bit) (2 bits)

- Codes
Transmission codes are as follows:
(i) EIA code and Control codes DC1 to DC4.
(ii) ISO code and Control codes DC1 to DC4 (Optional ISO code
input is necessary.)
The connected external device must be able to recognize the following
control codes, sent from NC.
Control code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC1 Tape reader start ○ ○ ○
DC2 Tape punch ○ ○ ○
designation
DC3 Tape reader stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
DC4 Tape punch release ○ ○ ○

NOTE
The listed control codes are used for both EIA and
ISO.

In this interface, control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.

(a) NC can control external device by issuing codes DC1 to DC4.
(b) When external processing falls behind the pace of the NC signals
(When NC issues data)
(i) External device can temporarily stop NC data output by
using the NC's CS signal. Data output stops within two
characters including a currently transmitting character when
CS OFF signal is input to NC. When CS signal is turned on
again, data transmission start.
(ii) If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output
within ten characters. When control code DC1 is input to
NC, NC starts sending data again.
(c) When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter,
the external device must satisfy the specification shown in Table
5.3.4.

- 85 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

Table 5.3.4
ISO code EIA code Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 ○ ○ ● 0 ○ ● Numeral 0
1 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ 1 ● ○ Numeral 1
2 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ 2 ● ○ Numeral 2
3 ○ ○ ● ○ ○ 3 ○ ● ○ ○ Numeral 3
4 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ 4 ● ○ Numeral 4
5 ○ ○ ● ○ ○ 5 ○ ● ○ ○ Numeral 5
6 ○ ○ ● ○ ○ 6 ○ ● ○ ○ Numeral 6
7 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ 7 ● ○ ○ ○ Numeral 7
8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ● 8 ○ ● Numeral 8
9 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ 9 ○ ○ ● ○ Numeral 9
A ○ ● ○ a ○ ○ ● ○ Address A
B ○ ● ○ b ○ ○ ● ○ ? Address B
C ○ ○ ● ○ ○ c ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ Address C
D ○ ● ○ d ○ ○ ● ○ ? Address D
E ○ ○ ● ○ ○ e ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ? Address E
F ○ ○ ● ○ ○ f ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ Address F
G ○ ● ○ ○ ○ g ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ Address G
H ○ ○ ● h ○ ○ ○ ● Address H
I ○ ○ ○ ● ○ i ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ Address I
J ○ ○ ○ ● ○ j ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ? Address J
K ○ ○ ● ○ ○ k ○ ○ ● ○ Address K
L ○ ○ ○ ● ○ l ○ ● ○ ○ ? Address L
M ○ ○ ● ○ ○ m ○ ○ ● ○ Address M
N ○ ○ ● ○ ○ n ○ ● ○ ○ Address N
O ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ o ○ ● ○ ○ Address O
P ○ ○ ● p ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ Address P
Q ○ ○ ○ ● ○ q ○ ○ ○ ● Address Q
R ○ ○ ○ ● ○ r ○ ○ ● ○ Address R
S ○ ○ ● ○ ○ s ○ ○ ● ○ Address S
T ○ ○ ○ ● ○ t ○ ● ○ ○ Address T
U ○ ○ ● ○ ○ u ○ ○ ● ○ Address U
V ○ ○ ● ○ ○ v ○ ● ○ ○ ? Address V
W ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ w ○ ● ○ ○ Address W
X ○ ○ ○ ○ ● x ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ Address X
Y ○ ○ ○ ● ○ y ○ ○ ○ ● ? Address Y
Z ○ ○ ○ ● ○ z ○ ○ ● ○ Address Z
DEL ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ Del ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ＊
NUL ● Blank ● ＊
BS ○ ○ ● BS ○ ○ ● ○ ＊
HT ○ ● ○ Tab ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ＊
LF or NL ○ ● ○ CR or EOB ○ ●
CR ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ＊
SP ○ ○ ● SP ○ ● ＊
% ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ER ○ ● ○ ○
( ○ ○ ● ( 2-4-5 ) ○ ○ ● ○
) ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ( 2-4-7 ) ○ ○ ● ○
+ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ + ○ ○ ○ ● ＊
- ○ ○ ● ○ ○ - ○ ●
: ○ ○ ○ ● ○
/ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ / ○ ○ ● ○
. ○ ○ ● ○ ○ . ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○
# ○ ○ ● ○ ○
$ ○ ● ○
& ○ ○ ● ○ ○ & ○ ● ○ ○ ＊
○ ● ○ ○ ○ ＊
＊ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ＊
, ○ ○ ○ ● ○ , ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ＊
; ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ＊
< ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ＊
= ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ＊
> ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ＊
? ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ＊
@ ○ ○ ● ＊
” ○ ○ ＊

- 86 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

NOTE
1 When the external device is equipped with an
ISO/EIA converter, the following items must be
noted in Table 5.3.4 (a).
Control out (Comment field start)
Control in (Comment field end)

EIA code (....................)） CR o .. ..................

Condition 1 Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3

ISO code (.....................) LF : ....................

Condition1 Left parenthesis "("of the ISO code

punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 5 when
used in the EIA code.
Right parenthesis ")"of the ISO code
punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 7 when
used in the EIA code.
Condition2 EIA code CR is LF in ISO code.
Condition3 EIA code O is : in ISO code.
2 Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes
output from the NC.
So they need not to be punched on the NC tape.

(3) Transmission rate (Baud rate)

The transmission rate (Baud rate) is the number of bits
transferred per second.
The following baud rates are available depending on the system
parameter.
50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600

[Example]
Baud rate : 110
When using one start bit and two stop bits (totalling 11 bits
per character):
Transmission characters/second= 110/11
=10 characters/second (Max.)
(4) Cable length
The cable length depends on the external device type. Consult
with the device manufacturers for actual connecting cable
lengths.
Cable length is as follows by the specification of NC.
for RS-232C
100m or less 4800 bauds or less
50m or less 9600 bauds or less

- 87 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

Time chart when the NC receives data (Read into memory)

(1) NC outputs DC1.
(2) The I/O device starts sending data upon receiving DC1.
(3) NC sends DC3 when NC processing is delayed.
(4) The I/O device stops sending data to NC after receiving DC3.
The device may send up to 10 characters after receiving DC3. If
it sends more than 10 characters, alarm 087 will occur.
(5) NC reissues DC1 upon completing delayed processing.
(6) The I/O device restarts data output upon receiving the DC1 code
(the data must be the next data to the preceding.)
(7) NC sends DC3 upon completing data read.
(8) The I/O device stops sending data.

10ms or longer 100ms or longer

ER
(output)

RS (output)
DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3

SD (output)
ER code

RD (input)

DR (input)

CS (input)

Up to 10 characters
1ms or longer

- 88 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Time chart when the NC send data (Punch out)

(1) NC output DC2.
(2) NC outputs punch data in succession.
(3) When data processing is delayed at the I/O device.
(a) Data output stops within two characters including a
currently transmitting character when CS signal is turned
off.
When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission starts.
(See Fig. 5.3.4 (b))
(b) If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output
within ten characters. When control code DC1 is input to
NC, NC starts sending data again. (See Fig. 5.3.4 (c))
(4) The NC starts sending the next data if the CS signal is turned on
after the I/O device completes data processing.
(5) The NC issues DC4 upon completing data output.
10ms or longer 100ms or longer

ER (output)

RS (output)
DC2 DC4

SD (output)

RD (input)

CS (input)

1ms or longer Within 2 characters

Fig. 5.3.4 (c)

10ms or longer 100ms or longer

ER (output)

RS (output)
DC2 DC4

SD (output)
DC3 DC1
RD (input)

Within 2 characters

DR (input)

CS (input)

1ms or longer

Fig. 5.3.4 (c)

- 89 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

Connection between RS-232-C interface and external device

CNC side I/O device

side

SD SD

RD RD

RS RS

CS CS

ER ER

DR DR

CD CD

SG SG

FG FG

- 90 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

● Use the connection shown in the figure below when the ER and
DR signals are not used for handshaking.

CNC side I/O device side

SD SD

RD RD

RS RS

CS CS

ER ER

DR DR

CD CD

SG SG

FG FG

he cable for connecting the I/O device to the CNC should be

connected as shown in the below diagram.

Serial interface

SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
ER
DR

2
Cable : twist 10 pairs × 0.18mm , with shield

- 91 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

5.3.5 FANUC Handy FILE

NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector
and relay cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification:
A66L-0001-0284#10P
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set suitable parameters on reader/puncher interface
for FANUC Handy File. The baud rate is 4800
baud in standard.
5 The maximum number of FANUC Handy FILEs that
can be connected to the system is one. The +24V
power supply capacity is exceeded if two or more
channels of FANUC Handy FILE are connected.
6 Make no connections to pins 18 (+5V) and 20 (+5V).
JD5A and JD5B have no +5V pins.
7 The upper connector name on the CNC side is for
the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector
name, enclosed in parentheses, is for the
stand-alone type.
8 With JD56A, the pins marked with an asterisk (*) are
used for a serial spindle.
- 92 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5.4 CONNECTING THE HIGH-SPEED SKIP (HDI)

5.4.1 Connecting the High-speed Skip (HDI)

CNC
JA40
PCR-E20MDK-SL-A
(RCR-EV20MDT)

1 HDI0 11 HDI1
2 0V 12 0V
3 HDI2 13 HDI3
4 0V 14 0V
5 0V 15 HDI5
6 HDI4 16 0V
7 <> 17 HDI6
8 <> 18 0V
9 <> 19 HDI7
10 0V 20 0V

NOTE
1 The upper connector specification of JA40 is for
the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector
specification, enclosed in parentheses, is for the
stand-alone type.
2 No connections must be made to the pins with
angle brackets (<>) because they are reserved for
expansions.

- 93 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

Cable connections
JA40
1
HDI0
2
0V
11
HDI1
12
0V
3
HDI2
4
0V
13
HDI3
14
0V
6
HDI4
5 or 10
0V
15
HDI5
16
0V
17
HDI6
18
0V
19
HDI7
20
0V
7
8
9
10

Shield

Ground plate
Recommended cable connector:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (Molex Japan)

NOTE
The recommended cable connector FI30-20S
(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used
for the stand-alone type.

- 94 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5.4.2 Input Signal Rules for the High-speed Skip (HDI)

Circuit configuration

CNC

DRIVER IiL/IiH FILTER RECEIVER

VH/VL

SHIELD

Absolute maximum rating

Input voltage range Vin: -3.6 to +13.6 V
Input characteristics
Unit Symbol Specification Unit Remark
High level input voltage VH 3.6 to 11.6 V
Low level input voltage VL 0 to 1.0 V
2 (max) mA Vin=5V
High level input current IiH
11 (max) mA Vin=10V
Low level input current IiL -8.0 (max) mA Vin=0V
Input signal pulse duration 20 (min) µs
Input signal delay or
0.02 (max) ms
variations

NOTE
1 The plus (+) sign of IiH/IiL represents the direction
of flow into the receiver. The minus (-) sign of
IiH/IiL represents the direction of flow out of the
receiver.
2 The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be 1
when the input voltage is at the low level and 0
when it is at the high level.
3 The input level for the CNC receiver is high when
the circuit is open. So, the input level for the
external driver must be low.

- 95 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

5.5 Linking The EMBEDDED Ethernet Interface

CAUTION
Before attaching or removing cables, power off the
CNC main unit, and confirm that the power is off.
Ask the respective manufacturers for explanations
about how to build a network and about conditions
for using units (such as a media converter, hub,
transceiver, and cable) other than the CNC unit.
When installing network cables, exercise sufficient
caution so that the network will not be affected by
any noise source. Electrically separate the
network wiring sufficiently from noise sources like
motors and their power lines. Also, ground each
unit as required. If the grounding impedance is
high, it may cause trouble in communication.
Once the equipment is installed, conduct
communication tests to verify normal operation
before starting actual use of the equipment.
FANUC is not liable to any damage related to
trouble arising from any unit other than the CNC
unit.

5.5.1 Connection to the Ethernet Interface

The 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX interfaces are available. A hub
(line concentrator) is used to connect the CNC unit to a system. A
typical connection example is shown below.

CNC unit Twisted-pair cable

Max. 100m
Shield

HUB
(line concentrator)

- 96 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a network

are not dust-proof. Using them in an atmosphere with dust or oil
mist may lead to a communication error or failure. They should be
enclosed in a dust-proof cabinet.

Leading in Ethernet cables

An Ethernet cable should be fixed with a clamp or the like so that
pulling it will not cause tension to be applied to the connector (RJ-45)
at the end of the cable. The clamp not only fixes the cable but also
grounds the shield of the cable.

Control unit

Ethernet cable

Clamp

Grounding plate

Pin arrangement of the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector (CD38A)

CD38A
Pin No. Signal name Description
1 TX+ Transmit +
2 TX- Transmit -
3 RX+ Receive +
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 RX- Receive -
7 Not used
8 Not used

- 97 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

5.5.2 Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable

Cable connection
The connectors of a cable for connecting between the 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX interface (CD38A) and the hub have the pin
arrangement shown below.

CD38A HUB

1 TX+ 1 TX+
2 TX- RJ-45 modular jack 2 TX-
3 RX+ 3 RX+
4 4
5 5
6 RX- 6 RX-
7 7
8 8
Max. 100m

CD38A

1 1
TX+ TX+
2 2
TX- TX-
3 3
RX+ RX+
6 6
RX- RX-

Shield

NOTE
The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the
FANUC- recommended cable for movable
sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable
longer than necessary.

- 98 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Cable Wires
Many cables without a shield (UTP cables) are commercially available
as twisted pair cables conforming to 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX.
To improve noise immunity in factory automation environments,
however, be sure to use twisted pair cables (STP cables) with a
common shield in category 5.

Recommended cables (for fixed parts)

Manufacturer Specification Remark
Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. DTS5087C-4P Twisted wires
Nissei Electric Co., Ltd. F-4PFWMF Single-wire cable

NOTE
No cable recommended for use in fixed sections
shall be used in movable sections. Be sure to use
the following movable-section cables.

Recommended cable (for movable sections)

Manufacturer Specification Remark
Oki Electric Cable AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) Dedicated to
Co., Ltd. FANUC products

Cable specification (FANUC original product, with no connector)

Drawing number: A66L-0001-0453
Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
Specification
- Electrical characteristic:
Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5
The length of the cable to the hub must be kept within 50 m
because of its attenuation performance.
- Structure: Common-shield braided cable with drain wire
The conductors of the cable are AWG26 annealed-copper
strand wire, with a sheath 0.8 mm thick and an outer
diameter of 6.7 ± 0.3 mm
- Fire resistance: UL1581 VW-1
- Oil resistance:
As per FANUC's internal standard (Equivalent to
conventional oil-resistant electrical cable)
- Flex resistance:
Million or more bending cycles with a bending radius of 50
mm (U-shaped bend test)
- UL style No.: AWM20276 (80°C/30V/VW-1)

NOTE
Use the TM21CP-88P(03) connector made by
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. to this cable.

- 99 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

About cable assemblies

Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. can offer a cable assembly that uses the
TM21CP-88P(03) connector made by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. To
get this cable assembly, negotiate directly with the manufacturer on its
specifications (cable length, shipping test, package, etc.).

Connector specification
An 8-pin modular connector called the RJ-45 is used with a
twisted-pair cable for Ethernet interfaces. Use the connector listed
below or equivalent.
Specification Manufacturer Remark
Connector used with cable AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) TM21CP-88P(03) Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. (Note)

NOTE
About TM21CP-88P(03)
Connector (manufacturer's standard product)
Drawing number: A63L-0001-0823#P
Manufacturer: Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Manufacturer's model number: TM21CP-88P(03)
Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5
Ask Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. for explanations about
how to attach the connector to a cable.

(Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. offers the TM21CP-88P(03) Wiring

Procedure Specification (Engineering Specification No.
ATAD-E2367) to explain the related technical information.)

- 100 -
B-63943EN/02 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

5.5.3 Anti-Noise Measure

Separating signal lines

Ethernet cable wires belong to group C. See descriptions elsewhere
for explanations about how to separate them from wires in group A or
B.

Cable clamp and shield processing

If any cable led into the CNC requires shielding, clamp it as shown
below. The same method is used also to shield Ethernet twisted-pair
cables. The clamp shown in the figure works not only for cable
fixing but also for shield processing. Shield processing is very
important to maintain the stable operation of the system. Do not
forget attach this clamp. See Subsection 3.5.5, "Cable Clamp and
Shield Processing," for details.

5.5.4 Network Installation

Even when the machine satisfies its grounding requirements, noise
from the machine may get on communication lines depending on the
way the machine is installed and its environment, resulting in a
communication error. Separating and isolating the Ethernet
backbone cable and PC from the machine can prevent noise from
getting on the communication lines.
An example of connection is shown below.

- 101 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-63943EN/02

NOTE
1 Ground the PC and backbone cable separately from the machine system.
If this is impossible because there is only one grounding point, use separate
grounding wires for the PC/backbone cable and the machine system up to the
grounding point.
The grounding resistance must not be higher than 100 Ω (class 3 grounding). The
grounding wire must not be thinner than the AC power line conductor, and its
cross-sectional area must not smaller than 5.5 mm2.
2 In some cases, the aforementioned isolation/separation method based on
10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX cannot assure normal communication because of
influence by noise. In such worst environments, use optical fiber media to
completely isolate the machine from the PC.

- 102 -
B-63943EN/02 6.SPINDLE CONNECTION

6 SPINDLE CONNECTION
The figure below shows the spindle-related connections. Note that
the number of connectable spindles depends on the configuration.
So, see Section 6.1.

With a Series 30i, eight serial spindles can be connected in total: six
on the main board and two on the additional spindle board.

- 103 -
6.SPINDLE CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

6.1 SERIAL SPINDLE

6.1.1 Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles

CNC Spindle amplifier module

JA41 (main board)

PCR-E20MDK-SL-A JA7B
(PCR-EV20MDT) PCR-EV20MDT
１ SIN 11 １ SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
5 [ ] 15 [ ] 5 15 0V
6 [ ] 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 [ ] 17 [ ] 7 17
8 [ ] 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 [ ] 9 (+5V) 19
10 [ ] 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)

NOTE
1 When an optical cable is used for connection
between the NC and a spindle amplifier, the +5V
signals indicated in parentheses are used to feed
power to the optical adapter. Do not connect
these signals when an optical cable is not used.
The signals in brackets ([ ]) are used when three or
four serial spindles are used.
2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used
with the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector
specification (in parentheses) is used with the
stand-alone type.
3 The second serial spindle is connected as a branch
from the spindle amplifier module.

- 104 -
B-63943EN/02 6.SPINDLE CONNECTION

Cable connection

Connector JA41 Connector JA7B

3 1 SIN
SOUT

4 2 *SIN
*SOUT
CNC Spindle
SIN 1 3 SOUT
amplifier
module
2 4
*SIN *SOUT

12,14,16 12,14,16
0V 0V

Ground plate Ground plate

Recommended cable connector:

PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)
Recommended wire specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)

NOTE
1 In any of the following cases, make a connection
via an optical fiber cable by using an optical
adapter:
• When the cable is 20 m or longer
• When the power magnetics cabinet containing a
spindle amplifier cannot be connected with the
operator's panel cabinet containing a CNC
control unit via a ground wire with a
cross-sectional area of 5.5 mm2 or more
• When the cable is subject to significant noise.
For example, when there is a strong
electromagnetic noise source such as a welding
machine near the cable, or when the cable runs
in parallel with a power line or power magnetics
cable that can generate noise.
2 The conventional optical I/O link adapter
(A13B-0154-B001) cannot be used. Use an
optical adapter (A13B-0154-B003).

- 105 -
6.SPINDLE CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

Outline drawing of an optical adapter

66

40 4-M3

Connector for
connecting a Optical
unit connector
JD1 FANUC COP1

45

18
Ground plate Unit: mm

- 106 -
B-63943EN/02 6.SPINDLE CONNECTION

6.1.2 Connecting One to Four Serial Spindles

With the 30i series , three or four serial spindles can be connected
using the serial spindle connector panel described below.
Serial spindle connector panel specification: A13B-0180-B001
Outside dimensions of the serial spindle connector panel
The outside dimensions of the serial spindle connector panel are the
same as those for the optical adapter (A13B-0154-B003).
45

Connector for connection with a spindle

amplifier JA7A-2 (second channel)
66

40

Connector for connection with a spindle

amplifier JA7A-1 (first channel)

Connector for connection with the CNC

JA48
4-M3
7

18

Conditions for installing the serial spindle connector panel

• The serial spindle connector panel does not have an enclosed
structure. So, install the serial spindle connector panel in an
enclosed cabinet as used for the CNC.
• Ground the case by using the case mounting screws of the serial
spindle connector panel.
• The serial spindle connector panel is light, so that it need not be
secured with screws. However, ensure that the serial spindle
connector panel does not contact other electrical circuits and thus
cause a short circuit. When securing the serial spindle
connector panel to the cabinet, for example, attach an L-shaped
metal fitting as shown below with a case mounting screw (M3) of
the serial spindle connector panel.

L-shaped metal
fitti

- 107 -
6.SPINDLE CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

Connection diagram
(Connection diagram when only electrical cables are used)

Serial spindle
connector panel

SPM SPM
CNC JA7B JA7B
JA7A-1
JA7A JA7A
JA41 JA48
JA7B JA7B
JA7A-2
JA7A JA7A

SPM SPM
Interconnection cable 1

Interconnection cable 2 Interconnection cable 2

(Connection diagram when optical cables are used)

Serial spindle
connector panel SPM

CNC JD1
JA7A-1
COP1
Optical adapter
JA41 JA48

JD1
JA7A-2 COP1

Interconnection cable 3 Optical cable

Interconnection cable 4

SPM SPM

JD1 JA7B JA7B

COP1
JA7A JA7A
Optical adapter

JD1 JA7B JA7B

COP1 JA7A JA7A

SPM SPM

Interconnection cable 4 Interconnection cable 2

(Cable connections when only electrical cables are used)

Cable connection between the CNC and serial spindle connector panel
(Interconnection cable 1)

- 108 -
B-63943EN/02 6.SPINDLE CONNECTION

CNC Serial spindle connector panel

JA41 (main board)

PCR-E20MDK-SL-A JA48
(PCR-E20VMDT) PCR-E20MDT
１ SINA 11 １ SINA 11
2 *SINA 12 0V 2 *SINA 12 0V
3 SOUTA 13 3 SOUTA 13
4 *SOUTA 14 0V 4 *SOUTA 14 0V
5 <> 15 SINB 5 15 SOUTB
6 <> 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 <> 17 *SINB 7 17 *SOUTB
8 <> 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 SOUTB 9 (+5V) 19 SINB
10 *SOUTB 20 (+5V) 10 *SINB 20 (+5V)

NOTE
1 When an optical cable is used for the connection
between the CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals
indicated in parentheses are used to feed power to
the optical adapter.
No connections must be made to the pins with
angle brackets (< >) because they are reserved for
expansions.
2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used
with the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector
specification (in parentheses) is used with the
stand-alone type.
3 The second and fourth serial spindles are
connected as branches from the spindle amplifier
module.

- 109 -
6.SPINDLE CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

Cable connection

JA41 JA48
SINA 1 3
SOUTA
*SINA 2 4
*SOUTA
3 1
SOUTA SINA
4 2
*SOUTA *SINA
15 15
SINB SOUTB
17 17
*SINB *SOUTB
19 19
SOUTB SINB
10 10
*SOUTB 12 *SINB
12
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
16 16
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate

Recommended cable connector:

PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)

Recommended cable specification: A02B-0236-K845

Recommended wire specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)

NOTE
When this cable is installed close to other cables
such as a power line, a shielded wire must be
connected to the ground plate. When the CNC is
installed close to the serial spindle connector
panel, however, no connection to the ground plate
is necessary.

Cable connection between the serial spindle connector panel and a

spindle amplifier
(Interconnection cable 2)

- 110 -
B-63943EN/02 6.SPINDLE CONNECTION

NOTE
When an optical cable is used for the connection
between the CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals
indicated in parentheses are used to feed power to
the optical adapter. Do not connect these signals
when an optical cable is not used.

Cable connection

JA7A-1, 2 JA7B
1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
12 12
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
16 16
0V 0V
Ground Shield
plate Ground
plate

Recommended wire specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)

NOTE
When this cable is installed close to other cables
such as a power line, a shielded wire needs to be
connected to the ground plate. When the serial
spindle connector panel is installed close to the
spindle amplifier module, a connection to the
ground plate is unnecessary.

(Cable connections when optical cables are used)

Cable connection between the CNC and serial spindle connector panel
(Interconnection cable 3)
CNC Serial spindle connector panel

JA41 (main board)

PCR-E20MDK-SL-A JA48
(PCR-EV20MDT) PCR-E20MDT
１ SINA 11 １ SINA 11
2 *SINA 12 0V 2 *SINA 12 0V
3 SOUTA 13 3 SOUTA 13
4 *SOUTA 14 0V 4 *SOUTA 14 0V
5 <> 15 SINB 5 15 SOUTB
6 <> 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 <> 17 *SINB 7 17 *SOUTB
8 <> 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 SOUTB 9 (+5V) 19 SINB
10 *SOUTB 20 (+5V) 10 *SINB 20 (+5V)

- 111 -
6.SPINDLE CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

NOTE
1 No connections must be made to the pins with
angle brackets (< >) because they are reserved for
expansions.
2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used
with the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector
specification (in parentheses) is used with the
stand-alone type.
3 The second and fourth serial spindles are
connected as branches from the spindle amplifier
module.

Cable connection

JA41 JA48
1 3
SINA SOUTA
2 4
*SINA *SOUTA
3 1
SOUTA SINA
4 2
*SOUTA *SINA
15 15
SINB SOUTB
17 17
*SINB *SOUTB
19 19
SOUTB SINB
10 10
*SOUTB *SINB
9 9
+5V +5V
18 18
+5V +5V
20 20
+5V +5V
12 12
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
16 16
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate

Recommended cable connector:

PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)

Recommended cable specification: A02B-0236-K847

Recommended wire specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)

NOTE
When this cable is installed close to other cables
such as a power line, a shielded wire needs to be
connected to the ground plate. When the CNC is
installed close to the serial spindle connector
panel, however, a connection to the ground plate is
unnecessary.

- 112 -
B-63943EN/02 6.SPINDLE CONNECTION

Cable connection between the serial spindle connector panel and

optical adapter and between the spindle amplifier and optical adapter
(Interconnection cable 4)
Serial spindle connector panel
or spindle amplifier Optical adapter
JA7A-1,2(PCR-E20MD) JD1
JA7B(PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR-E20LMDT)
1 SIN 11 1 SIN 11
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 3 SOUT 13
4 *SOUT 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
5 15 5 15
6 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 +5V 8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19 9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V 10 20 +5V

Cable connection

JA7A-1, 2 JD1
JA7B 1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
9 9
+5V +5V
18 18 +5V
+5V
20 20 +5V
+5V
12 12 0V
0V
0V 14 14 0V
16 16 0V
0V

Shield
Ground plate

Recommended cable connector:

PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)

Recommended wire specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)

* Interconnection cable 3 can be used alternatively.

- 113 -
6.SPINDLE CONNECTION B-63943EN/02

6.1.3 Connecting Five or Six Serial Spindles

CNC Spindle amplifier module
JD56A (main board)
PCR-E20MDK-SL-A JA7B
(PCR-EV20MDT) PCR-EV20MDT
１ [ ] 11 [ ] １ SIN 11 0V
2 0V 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 [ ] 13 [ ] 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 0V 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
5 [ ] 15 [ ] 5 15 0V
6 0V 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 [ ] 17 SOUTA 7 17
8 0V 18 *SOUTA 8 18 (+5V)
9 SINA 19 [ ] 9 (+5V) 19
10 [ ] 20 *SINA 10 20 (+5V)

NOTE
1 The optical adapter cannot be used for this
connection.
2 The pins in brackets ([ ]) are used when a
RS-232C device is used.
3 The upper connector specification of JA56A is
used with the LCD-mounted type. The lower
connector specification (in parentheses) is used
with the stand-alone type.

Cable connection
JD56A JA7B
17 1
SOUTA SIN
18 2
*SOUTA *SIN
9 3
SINA SOUT
20 4
*SINA *SOUT
12 12
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
16 16
0V 0V
Shield

Ground plate
Recommended cable connector:
PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)
Recommended cable specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)

NOTE
When this cable is installed close to other cables
such as a power line, a shielded wire must be
connected to the ground plate. When the CNC is
installed close to the spindle amplifier module,
however, no connection to the ground plate is
necessary.

- 114 -
B-63943EN/02 6.SPINDLE CONNECTION

6.1.4 Connecting Seven or Eight Serial spindles

NOTE
When an optical cable is used for the connection
between the CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals
indicated in parentheses are used to feed power to
the optical adapter. Do not connect these signals
when an optical cable is not used. No connections
must be made to the pins with angle brackets (< >)
because they are reserved for expansions.

Cable connection
JA41L JA7B
3 1
SOUTA SIN
4 2
*SOUTA *SIN
1 3
SINA SOUT
2 4
*SINA *SOUT
12 12
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
16 16
0V 0V
Shield

Ground plate
Recommended cable connector:
PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)

Recommended cable specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)

NOTE
When this cable is installed close to other cables
such as a power line, a shielded wire must be
connected to the ground plate. When the CNC is
installed close to the spindle amplifier module,
however, no connection to the ground plate is
necessary.

- 115 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7 SERVO INTERFACE

- 116 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

7.1 CONNECTION TO THE SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Control unit

COP10A-1
COP10A-2

This figure is an example of connecting to control unit a LCD-mounted type.

- 117 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.1.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to connect the servo units to the 30i series .
For details of the connection of the Servo amplifier αi series, refer to
the Servo Amplifier αi series Descriptions (B-65282EN).

7.1.2 Interface to the Servo Amplifiers

The connections between the CNC control unit and servo amplifiers
should be made using optical cables. Up to three FSSB lines can be
connected to the control unit. For the first and second FSSB lines,
the optical connectors are located on the servo card of the main board
(some servo card types do not have an optical connector for the
second FSSB line). For the third FSSB line, the optical connector is
located on the additional axis board (the unit may not have an
additional axis board because it is optional).
The maximum number of axes and the connector name for each FSSB
line depend on the type and control method of the line. See the table
below.
Control method and
maximum number of Connector
Remarks
axes name
HRV2 HRV3 HRV4
16 10 On the servo
First FSSB line 4 axes COP10A-1
axes axes card
On the servo
Second FSSB line 8 axes 8 axes 2 axes COP10A-2
card
On the
10
Third FSSB line 8 axes 4 axes COP10A-3 additional axis
axes
board

The following table lists the maximum number of controlled axes and
control methods in the 30i/31i/32i.
Control method and
maximum number of axes Remarks
HRV2 HRV3 HRV4
30i 32 axes 28 axes 10 axes
31i 20 axes 20 axes 10 axes
32i 9 axes 9 axes HRV4 not usable

- 118 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

NOTE
1 As servo amplifier modules, αi series SVM
(supported by the 30i/31i/32i) or βi series SVM
units must be used.
2 The number of axes that can be controlled varies
also depending on the software series, the servo
card, and the type of an additional axis board.
3 When the number of axes that was set for the first
FSSB line is zero, no axes can be set for the
second FSSB line.
4 Unused optical connectors must be covered with
the caps.

<Cable types>
Cable drawing number Usage
A02B-0236-K851 to K856 For internal Length of 10 m or less
(A66L-6001-0023#~) connection
A66L-6001-0026#~ For external Length of 50 m or less
connection

- 119 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

Control unit Servo amplifier module

1st FSSB line
COP10A-1 COP10B
COP10A

2nd FSSB line

COP10A-2
COP10B
COP10A

COP10B
COP10A

COP10B
COP10A

Separate
detector
interface unit

COP10B
COP10A

Servo amplifier module

COP10B
COP10A

COP10B
COP10A

COP10B
COP10A

COP10B
COP10A

Separate
detector
interface unit

COP10B
COP10A

The third FSSB line may be provided.

- 120 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

7.2 SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE

Separate detector interface unit

CP11A
Servo amplifier module

Control unit or the

previous-stage servo
amplifier module COP10B
COP10A

Digital output
Linear encoder or rotary encoder

- 121 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

CNC

Servo amplifier module

Servo card
Optical fiber cable
COP10A COP10B
COP10A

COP10B
COP10A

COP10B
Optical fiber cable
COP10A

Separate detector interface unit (basic)

COP10B JF101 Linear encoder axis 1

COP10A JF102 Linear encoder axis 2
24VDC CP11A JF103 Linear encoder axis 3
JF104 Linear encoder axis 4
CNF1 JA4A Battery for absolute
position detector

Flat cable
Separate detector interface unit (additional)

CNF2 JF105 Linear encoder axis 5

JF106 Linear encoder axis 6
JF107 Linear encoder axis 7
JF108 Linear encoder axis 8

When a separate detector such as a separate rotary encoder or linear

encoder is used, a separate detector interface unit is required. The
separate detector interface unit is connected through an optical fiber
cable as an unit on an FSSB line.
A separate detector interface unit consists of basic units and additional
units. Up to four pulse coders or liner scales can be connected by
adding an additional unit (up to eight units can be connected as a total).
An additional unit is connected to a basic unit through a flat cable.
The maximum number of separate detector interface units that can be
connected to an FSSB line is two for HRV2 and HRV3 or one for
HRV4. Therefore, for HRV2 and HRV3, up to 16 separate detectors
can be connected per line, and for HRV4, up to 8 separate detectors
can be connected per line.

- 122 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

NOTE
1 The separate detector interface unit connected to
the first or second FSSB line is allowed full close
control with the axis for which the first or second
FSSB line is set. The interface unit is not allowed
full close control with the axis for which the third
FSSB line is set.
2 The separate detector interface unit connected to
the third FSSB line is allowed full close control with
the axis for which the third FSSB line is set. The
interface unit full is not allowed close control with
the axis for which the first or second FSSB line is
set.
3 A separate detector interface unit must support the
FS30i as a basic unit.
4 Unused optical connectors must be covered with
the caps.
5 When using an encoder with an analog output of 1
Vp-p, see the description of the analog input
separate detector interface.

7.2.1 Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification

Item Specification
Power supply capacity Voltage 24 VDC ±10%
Current 0.9 A (basic unit only)
1.5 A (basic unit + additional unit)
Ordering information A02B-0305-C205 (basic)
A02B-0236-C204 (additional)
Method of installation An interface unit can be installed by using screws or
a DIN rail.

- 123 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.2.2 Connection of Power Supply

Power to the separate detector interface unit should be supplied from
an external 24 V DC power supply. An extended unit is powered by
a basic unit.

Separate detector interface unit (basic) External power supply

CP11A
1 +24V 24 VDC regulated power
2 0V supply
3 24 VDC ±10%

GND

Cable

CP11A
AMP JAPAN
1-178288-3 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact) External power supply
Select a connector that
+24V (1)
0V (2) matches the pin layout of
the external power supply.

Recommended cable specification: A02B-0124-K830 (5 m)

(The external power supply end of the cable is provided with M3 crimp terminals.)

The 24 VDC input to CP11A can be output at CP11B for use in

branching. The connection of CP11B is identical to that of CP11A.
In this case, the power supplied to CP11A should be equal to the sum
of the rating of the separate detector interface unit and that of the units
after CP11B.

Be sure to ground the 0-V line of the power supply to the separate
detector interface unit. In addition, keep any noise source (such as
an AC power cable and contactor) away from the power line of the
separate detector interface unit as far as possible to prevent noise from
being picked up through the power line.

Secure the ground line to the ground terminal (GND) for signals of a
separate detector interface unit, which is located at the bottom of the
unit, with an M3 screw as shown in the figure below. Connect the
ground line to the ground plate of the cabinet.

- 124 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

GND

To ground plate of cabinet

NOTE
The torque with which a screw is tightened is 5
kgf⋅cm or less.

- 125 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.2.3 Separate Detector Interface (Serial Interface)

Separate detector interface unit Separate detector

JF101 to JF108
(PCR-EV20MDT)

1 SD 11
2 ＊SD 12 0V
3 13
4 14 0V
5 REQ 15
6 ＊REQ 16 0V
7 (+6V) 17 The +6V signal is provided for absolute
8 18 +5V position detectors that require battery
9 +5V 19 backup.
10 20 +5V

Cable connection

1
SD SD
2
*SD *SD
5
REQ REQ
6
*REQ *REQ
7
(+6V) (+6V)
18
+5V +5V
20
+5V +5V
12
0V 0V
14
0V 0V
16 Shielded drain wire FG
0V (Frame
Shield ground)
Ground plate

Recommended cable:
A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3-pair)
Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (Molex)
FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)

- 126 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

NOTE
1 The +5V signals above can be used to feed power
to the detectors. The supply current per linear
scale is 0.35 A maximum.
Lower limit of the 5V signals: 4.95 V for the basic
unit, and 4.9 V for the additional unit
2 If the cable is connected to JA4A when the
separate absolute pulse coder battery case
contains the battery, the battery voltage is applied
to the battery power supply pin (+6 V) for each of
the feedback connectors (JF101 to JF108). In
this case, if the battery line and 0 V are
short-circuited, the battery may heat up or the
protection circuit within the separate detector
interface unit may fail. First, make sure the
battery case contains no battery or the cable is not
connected to JA4A. Then, complete all cabling
work and confirm cables are correctly connected.
Finally, place the battery or connect the cable to
JA4A.

- 127 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.2.4 Separate Detector Interface (Parallel interface)

Separate detector interface unit Separate detector

JF101 to JF108
(PCR-EV20MDT)

1 PCA 11
2 ＊PCA 12 0V
3 PCB 13
4 ＊PCB 14 0V
5 PCZ 15
6 ＊PCZ 16 0V
7 (+6V) 17
8 (REQ) 18 +5V The +6V and REQ signals are provided for
9 +5V 19 absolute position detectors that require
10 20 +5V battery backup.

Cable connection

1
PCA PCA
2
＊PCA ＊PCA
3
PCB PCB
4
＊PCB ＊PCB
5
PCZ PCZ
6
＊PCZ ＊PCZ
7
(+6V) (+6V)
8
(REQ) (REQ)
9
+5V +5V
18
+5V +5V
20
+5V +5V
12 0V
0V
14
0V 0V
16
0V 0V

Shield
Ground plate
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL
A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3-pair)

Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (Molex)
FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)

- 128 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

NOTE
1 The +5V signals above can be used to feed power
to the detectors. The supply current per detector
is 0.35 A maximum.
Minimum tolerance to 5 V: 4.95 V for main unit
and 4.9 V for added section
2 If the cable is connected to JA4A when the
separate absolute pulse coder battery case
contains the battery, the battery voltage is applied
to the battery power supply pin (+6 V) for each of
the feedback connectors (JF101 to JF108). In
this case, if the battery line and 0 V are
short-circuited, the battery may heat up or the
protection circuit within the separate detector
interface unit may fail. First, make sure the
battery case contains no battery or the cable is not
connected to JA4A. Then, complete all cabling
work and confirm cables are correctly connected.
Finally, place the battery or connect the cable to
JA4A.

- 129 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.2.5 Input Signal Requirements (Parallel interface)

The feedback signals from the separate detectors connected via the
parallel interface are defined as follows:

(1) A and B phase signal input

This is a method to input position information by the mutual 90
degree phase slip of A and B phase signals.
Detection of the position is performed with the state in which the
B phase is leading taken as a shift in the plus direction, and the
state in which the A phase is leading as a shift in the minus
direction.

A phase signal
Shift in plus direction

B phase signal

A phase signal
Shift in minus direction

B phase signal

(2) Phase difference and minimum repeat frequency

A
PCA/*PCA
0.5V
*PCA/PCA
B
PCB/*PCB
0.5V
*PCB/PCB
Td Td Td Td
Tp

(3) Z phase signal input

For the Z phase signal (1 rotation signal), a signal width of more
than 1/4 frequency of the A phase or B phase signals is
necessary.

Z phase signal

Tw

Tw ≥ 1/4 frequency of A phase or B

h

- 130 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

Time requirements
Requirements for the signals at the input pins of input connectors
JF101 to JF108. The signals for these connectors are differential
input signals with A and B phases. An important factor is time TD
from point A, when the potential difference between PCA and *PCA
exceeds 0.5V, to point B, when the potential difference between PCB
and *PCB becomes lower than 0.5V. The minimum value of TD is
0.15 µs. The period and pulse width of the signals must be long
enough to satisfy the above requirements.

Input voltage requirements

The voltage of the A and B phase signals must meet the following
requirements:
High level: 2.4 V or more
Low level: 0.8 V or less

Receiver circuit

PCA
A-phase 110Ω
signal
*PCA
560Ω
The same circuit is used for B-phase
signals (PCB and *PCB)
5V

Rotation directions of a servo motor and separate rotary encoder

If a separate rotary encoder rotates in a direction opposite to the
direction of servo motor rotation when the servo motor is rotating, the
connection of the feedback cable from the separate rotary encoder
must be changed as follows:
(1) Exchange signal PCA with signal PCB.
(2) Exchange signal *PCA with signal *PCB.

- 131 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.2.6 Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector

Separate detector interface unit

Absolute pulse coder battery case

- 132 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

When the separate absolute position detector that needs battery

backup is connected, the battery case for the separate absolute pulse
coder must be connected.

Separate detector interface unit Battery case for the separate

absolute pulse coder
JA4A
(PCR-EV20MDT)
01 11
02 12 (M3 terminal)
03 0V 13
+ -
04 14
+6V 0V
05 15
06 16
07 +6V 17
08 18
09 19
10 20

Cable connection
JA4A Battery case

7 +
+6V +6V
3 -
0V 0V

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL:

≥0.2 mm (7/0.18)
2

Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (Molex)

NOTE
If the cable is connected to JA4A when the
separate absolute pulse coder battery case
contains the battery, the battery voltage is applied
to the battery power supply pin (+6 V) for each of
the feedback connectors (JF101 to JF108). In this
case, if the battery line and 0 V are short-circuited,
the battery may heat up or the protection circuit
within the separate detector interface unit may fail.
First, make sure the battery case contains no
battery or the cable is not connected to JA4A.
Then, complete all cabling work and confirm cables
are correctly connected. Finally, place the battery
or connect the cable to JA4A.

- 133 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.2.7 Connection Between the Basic Unit and Additional Unit

A flat cable is used to make a connection between the basic unit and
additional unit as shown below.
A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be used.

Units viewed from top

Basic unit Additional unit

Mounting
surface

CNF1 CNF2

Marking

mark
mark

Place an order on a flat cable together with separate detector interface

units.

- 134 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

7.2.8 Connector Locations

Connector locations on the basic unit

GND

Connector locations on the additional unit

For the outside dimensions, see Appendix A.

- 135 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.2.9 Installation
1) Notes on installation
(1) Use an interface unit in a completely enclosed cabinet.
(2) Install an interface unit on a vertical surface, and provide a
space of 100 mm above and below the unit. Below an
interface unit, do not place equipment that generates a large
amount of heat.
(3) When using a basic unit and additional unit, place the units
as shown below so that the flat cable connecting the units
does not block the vent holes. A flat cable not longer than
100 mm must be used.

Vent holes Flat cable

Basic unit Additional unit

2) Installation using screws

Basic unit Additinal unit

When using both a basic unit and additional unit, install the units
as shown above, with the mounting holes horizontally separated by 70
to 80 mm.

- 136 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

7.2.10 Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit

CAUTION
To install/remove the unit, a screwdriver must be
inserted obliquely. So, sufficient access
clearances are required on both sides of the unit.
As a guideline, if the front of an adjacent unit
appears flush with the unit or slightly set back,
allow a clearance of about 20 mm between the unit
and the adjacent unit. If the front of an adjacent
unit protrudes beyond the front of the unit, allow a
clearance of about 70 mm between the unit and
the adjacent unit. Also, when installing the unit
near a side of the cabinet, allow a clearance of
about 70 mm between the unit and the side of the
cabinet.

Access clearance near a separate detector interface unit

- 137 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

Installing the unit on the DIN rail

Installing the unit on

the DIN rail

DIN rail

Removing the unit

from the DIN rail

DIN rail

Installing the unit:

1. Hook the unit on the top of the DIN rail.
2. Push the unit in until it clicks.
Removing the unit:
1. Push down the lock by using a screwdriver.
2. Remove the unit by pulling the lower end of the unit towards
you.

CAUTION
When removing the unit, be careful not to damage
the lock by applying excessive force. When
installing and removing the unit, hold the upper and
lower ends of the unit so that stress is not applied
to the side (that surface with the slits) of the unit.

- 138 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

7.3 ANALOG INPUT SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE

Analog input separate detector interface unit

CP11A

Servo amplifier module

Control unit or the COP10B

previous-stage servo
amplifier module COP10A

1 Vp-p output linear encoder or rotary

encoder

- 139 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.3.1 Overview
When a separate detector such as a rotary encoder or linear encoder
with an analog output of 1 Vp-p is used, an analog input separate
detector interface unit is used. The analog input separate detector
unit is connected via an optical cable as a unit on the FSSB line. Up
to four 1-Vp-p output separate detectors can be connected to a basic
unit. One additional unit (A02B-0236-C204) can be connected to the
basic unit with a flat cable. Four separate detectors with digital
output can be connected to the additional unit. When five or more
1-Vp-p output separate detectors are to be used, more than one basic
unit (analog input separate detector interface unit) is required. The
JA4A connector is provided for the battery for absolute position
detectors connected to the additional unit.
The maximum number of separate detector interface units that can be
connected to one FSSB line is two for HRV2 and HRV3 or one for
HRV4, regardless of which input type, the analog input type or digital
input type, is used. Therefore, for HRV2 and HRV3, up to 16
separate detectors can be connected per line; for HRV4, up to eight
separate detectors can be connected.

NOTE
1 The analog input separate detector interface unit
connected to the first or second FSSB line is
allowed full close control with the axis for which the
first or second FSSB line is set. The interface unit
is not allowed full close control with the axis for
which the third FSSB line is set.
2 The analog input separate detector interface unit
connected to the third FSSB line is allowed full
close control with the axis for which the third FSSB
line is set. The interface unit full is not allowed
close control with the axis for which the first or
second FSSB line is set.
3 Unused optical connectors must be covered with
the caps.
4 A digital output encoder refers to an encoder that
outputs A and B rectangular waveforms (parallel)
or a FANUC serial interface output encoder
(serial).
5 No 1-Vp-p output encoder can be connected to
additional units.

- 140 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

(1) Connecting 1-Vp-p output encoders to the 1st to 4th axes

CNC

Servo card Servo amplifier module

Optical fiber cable
COP10A COP10B
COP10A

COP10B
COP10A

COP10B
Optical fiber cable
COP10A

Analog input separate detector interface unit

COP10B JF111 1Vp-p output encoder 1 axis

COP10A JF112 1Vp-p output encoder 2 axes
24VDC CP11A JF113 1Vp-p output encoder 3 axes

JF114 1Vp-p output encoder 4 axes

CNF1 JA4A

(2) Connecting 1-Vp-p output encoders to the 5th to 8th axes

Optical fiber cable

Analog input separate detector interface unit

COP10B JF111
1Vp-p output encoder 1 axis
Optical fiber cable COP10A JF112 1Vp-p output encoder 2 axes
24VDC CP11A JF113
1Vp-p output encoder 3 axes
JF114 1Vp-p output encoder 4 axes
CNF1 JA4A

Analog input separate detector interface unit

JF111
COP10B 1Vp-p output encoder 5 axes
COP10A JF112 1Vp-p output encoder 6 axes
CP11A JF113 1Vp-p output encoder 7 axes
JF114 1Vp-p output encoder 8 axes
CNF1 JA4A

- 141 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

(3) Connecting 1-Vp-p output encoders to the 1st to 4th axes and
digital output encoders to the 1st to 4th axes
Optical fiber cable

Analog input separate detector interface unit

COP10B JF111
1Vp-p output encoder 1 axis
COP10A JF112
1Vp-p output encoder 2 axes
24VDC CP11A JF113
1Vp-p output encoder 3 axes
JF114 1Vp-p output encoder 4 axes
CNF1 JA4A Battery for separate absolute
position detectors connected to
Flat cable additional unit

Separate detector interface unit (additional unit)

CNF2 JF105
Digital output encoder 1 axis
JF106 Digital output encoder 2 axes
JF107
Digital output encoder 3 axes
JF108 Digital output encoder 4 axes

(4) Connecting 1-Vp-p output encoders to the 1st to 4th axes and
digital output encoders to the 5th to 8th axes
Optical fiber cable

Analog input separate detector interface unit

COP10B JF111 1Vp-p output encoder 1 axis

Optical fiber cable
COP10A JF112 1Vp-p output encoder 2 axes
24VDC CP11A JF113 1Vp-p output encoder 3 axes

JF114 1Vp-p output encoder 4 axes

CNF1 JA4A

Separate detector interface unit (basic unit)

COP10B JF101 Digital output encoder 1 axis

COP10A JF102 Digital output encoder 2 axes

24VDC CP11A JF103 Digital output encoder 3 axes

JF104 Digital output encoder 4 axes

CNF1 JA4A Battery for separate absolute

detector

Flat cable
Separate detector interface unit (additional unit)

CNF2 JF105 Digital output encoder 5 axes

JF106 Digital output encoder 6 axes
JF107 Digital output encoder 7 axes

JF108 Digital output encoder 8 axes

- 142 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

7.3.2 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification

Item Specification
Power supply capacity Voltage 24 VDC ±10%
Current 0.9 A (basic unit only)
1.5 A (basic unit + additional unit)
Ordering information A02B-0305-C201 (basic)
Method of installation An interface unit can be installed by using screws or
a DIN rail.

7.3.3 Connection of Power Supply

Power to the analog input separate detector interface unit should be
supplied from an external 24 VDC power supply. An extended unit
is powered by a basic unit.

Analog input separate detector interface unit External power supply

CP11A
1 +24V 24 VDC regulated power
2 0V supply
3 24 VDC ±10%

GND

Cable

CP11A
AMP JAPAN
1-178288-3 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact) External power supply
Select a connector that
+24V (1)
0V (2) matches the pin layout of
the external power supply.

Recommended cable specification: A02B-0124-K830 (5 m)

(The external power supply end of the cable is provided with M3 crimp terminals.)

The 24 VDC input to CP11A can be output at CP11B for use in

branching. The connection of CP11B is identical to that of CP11A.
In this case, the power supplied to CP11A should be equal to the sum
of the rating of the analog input separate detector interface unit and
that of the units after CP11B.

Be sure to ground the 0-V line of the power supply to the analog input
separate detector interface unit. In addition, keep any noise source
(such as an AC power cable and contactor) away from the power line
of the analog input separate detector interface unit as far as possible to
prevent noise from being picked up through the power line.

Secure the ground line to the ground terminal (GND) for signals of an
analog input separate detector interface unit, which is located at the

- 143 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

bottom of the unit, with an M3 screw as shown in the figure below.

Connect the ground line to the ground plate of the cabinet.

GND

To ground plate of cabinet

NOTE
The torque with which a screw is tightened is 5
kgf⋅cm or less.

- 144 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

7.3.4 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface (Analog 1Vp-p

Interface)

Analog Input Separate Detector Interface

Analog 1Vp-p output encoder

JF111 to F114
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1 PCA 11 NC
2 ＊PCA 12 0V
3 PCB 13 NC
4 ＊PCB 14 0V
5 PCZ 15 NC
6 ＊PCZ 16 0V
7 17 Leave NC (No Connection) open.
8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19 NC
10 20 +5V

Cable connection

PCA 1 PCA
＊PCA
2
＊PCA
PCB
3
PCB
＊PCB 4
＊PCB
PCZ 5
PCZ
6
＊PCZ ＊PCZ
+5V 9 +5V
18
+5V +5V
20 +5V
+5V
12
0V 0V
14
0V 0V
16 Shielded drain wire
0V FG
(Frame ground)
Shield
Ground plate

Recommended cable:
A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3-pair)

Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (Molex)
FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)

NOTE
When supplementary descriptions other than warnings and notes are provided, the
above +5V signals can be used as the power supply of detectors.
In this case, the maximum current consumption per detector is 0.35 A.
Lower limit of the 5V signals: 4.95 V for the basic unit, and 4.9 V for the additional
unit

- 145 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.3.5 Input Signal Specifications

A/B (Type I)

VB
a/2
TZ,LZ
VXA,VXB a
VA Z
a/2
c/2 Effective
component c
VOA,VOB
VOZ c/2
0V

A/B (Type II) 0V

VB
VA
b/2
b
VXA
b/2
VXB

VOA,VOXA
0V VOB,VOXB

Item Symbol Min. Standard Max. Unit

spec. spec. spec.
Amplitude (phase Type I a of phase A and phase B 0.6 1.0 1.5 VP-P
A/B) Type II Sum of b of phase A and b of
phase XA Sum of b of phase B and b of
phase XB
Amplitude (phase Sum of c of Z and c of XZ (analog signal) 0.2 0.4 - V
Z)
Center value Type I VOA,VXA ,VOB,VXB
(DC level) Type II VOA,VOXA ,VOB,VOXB 2.0 2.5 3.0 V
VOZ,VOXZ
Offset voltage Type I VOA-VXA , VOB-VXB -0.1 0 +0.1 V
(phase A/B) Type II VOA-VOXA , VOB-VOXB
Offset voltage VOZ-VOXZ -0.05 0 +0.05 V
(phase Z)
Pulse width of TZ 600 - - nSec
phase Z
Length of phase Z LZ 1/4 - - Pitch of A (or B)
Input impedance 100 120 140 Ω
Input frequency - - 200 kHz

* The detection precision depends on the precision of signals from

the encoder.

- 146 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

7.3.6 Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector

When a separate absolute position detector that requires battery
backup is connected to an additional unit, a battery case for the
separate absolute pulse coder must be connected to JA4A of the
analog input separate detector interface unit.
Analog input separate detector Battery case for the separate
interface unit absolute pulse coder
JA4A
(PCR-EV20MDT)
01 11
02 12 (M3 terminal)
03 0V 13
+ -
04 14
+6V 0V
05 15
06 16
07 +6V 17
08 18
09 19
10 20

Cable connection
JA4A Battery case

7 +
+6V +6V
3 -
0V 0V

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL:

≥0.2 mm (7/0.18)
2

Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (Molex)

NOTE
If the cable is connected to JA4A when the
separate absolute pulse coder battery case
contains the battery, the battery voltage is applied
to the battery power supply pin (+6 V) for each of
the feedback connectors (JF105 to JF108). In
this case, if the battery line and 0 V are
short-circuited, the battery may heat up or the
protection circuit within the separate detector
interface unit may fail. First, make sure the
battery case contains no battery or the cable is not
connected to JA4A. Then, complete all cabling
work and confirm cables are correctly connected.
Finally, place the battery or connect the cable to
JA4A.
- 147 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.3.7 Connection Between the Analog Input Separate Detector

Interface Unit and Additional Unit
A flat cable is used to connect the analog input separate detector
interface unit and additional unit as shown below.
The flat cable is 100 mm long.

Units viewed from top

Analog input separate Additional unit

detector interface unit
Mounting
surface

CNF1 CNF2

Marking

mark
mark

Place an order on a flat cable together with separate detector interface

units.

- 148 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

7.3.8 Connector Locations

Connector locations on the analog input separate detector interface
unit

GND

For the outside dimensions, see Appendix A.

- 149 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.3.9 Installation
1) Notes on installation
(1) Use an interface unit in a completely enclosed cabinet.
(2) Install an interface unit on a vertical surface, and provide a
space of 100 mm above and below the unit. Below an
interface unit, do not place equipment that generates a large
amount of heat.
(3) When using an analog input separate detector interface unit
and addition unit, place the units as shown below so that the
flat cable connecting the units does not block the vent holes.
A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be used.

Vent holes Flat cable

Analog input separate Separate detector interface unit

detector interface unit (additional unit)

- 150 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

2) Installation using screws

Analog input separate
detector interface unit
Additional unit

When using both an analog input separate detector interface unit and
additional unit, install the units as shown above, with the mounting
holes horizontally separated by 70 to 80 mm.

- 151 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE B-63943EN/02

7.3.10 Notes on Installing an Analog Input Separate Detector

Interface Unit

CAUTION
To install/remove the unit, a screwdriver must be
inserted obliquely. So, sufficient access
clearances are required on both sides of the unit.
As a guideline, if the front of an adjacent unit
appears flush with the unit or slightly set back,
allow a clearance of about 20 mm between the unit
and the adjacent unit. If the front of an adjacent
unit protrudes beyond the front of the unit, allow a
clearance of about 70 mm between the unit and
the adjacent unit. Also, when installing the unit
near a side of the cabinet, allow a clearance of
about 70 mm between the unit and the side of the
cabinet.

Access clearance near an analog input separate detector interface unit

- 152 -
B-63943EN/02 7.SERVO INTERFACE

Installing the unit on the DIN rail

Installing the unit on

the DIN rail

DIN rail

Removing the unit

from the DIN rail

DIN rail

Installing the unit:

1. Hook the unit on the top of the DIN rail.
2. Push the unit in until it clicks.
Removing the unit:
1. Push down the lock by using a screwdriver.
2. Remove the unit by pulling the lower end of the unit towards
you.

CAUTION
When removing the unit, be careful not to damage
the lock by applying excessive force. When
installing and removing the unit, hold the upper and
lower ends of the unit so that stress is not applied
to the side (that surface with the slits) of the unit.

- 153 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

- 154 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.1 OVERVIEW

The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface which connects the CNC,
cell controller, I/O Unit-A, or Power Mate and transfers I/O signals
(bit data) at high speeds between each device. The FANUC I/O Link
regards one device as the master and other devices as slaves when
more than one device is connected. Input signals from the slaves are
sent to the master at specified intervals. Output signals from the
master are also sent to the slaves at specified intervals.

- 155 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.2 CONNECTION

With 30i series, the I/O Link interface connector JD51A (for three
channels) is provided on the main board. Also, the JD1A connector
(for the fourth channel) is provided on the additional axis board.
In the I/O there are the master station and its slave stations. The
master is the control unit of the CNC, and the slave is the I/O unit-A.
The slaves are divided into groups, and up to 16 groups can be
connected to one I/O Link. A maximum of two base I/O units can be
connected as a group.
The I/O Link is connected in different ways depending on the types of
units actually used and the I/O points. To connect the I/O Link, the
assignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been made
programmable with the PMC program. The maximum number of
I/O points is 1024.
For slave units, JD1A and JD1B are provided. All units with I/O
Link functions have these connectors. A cable must always be
connected from JD1A of a unit to JD1B of the next unit. Although
JD1A of the last unit is not used and left open, it need not be
connected with a terminator.
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all
units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on Subsec. 8.2.1. Use the
figures when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.
Control unit I/O256/256 or less per group
JD51A
(JD1A) FANUC I/O Link I/O1024/1024 or less in total I/O Link

FANUC I/O Unit-A × 2max

Control unit Base unit 1 Base unit 2

JD1B
JD1A
circuit
Magnetic

Max.
16 group JD1B
JD1A

JD1B
JD1A

Fig. 8.2 I/O Link connection diagram

- 156 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Control unit

Rear of the unit

JD51A
I/O Link

I/O UNIT-A

JD1B

I/O UNIT-A

This figure is an example of connecting

the I/O Link to a LCD-mounted type
30i series.

24VDC

- 157 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.2.1 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable

+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O Link adapter. They are not
necessary when connecting with a metal cable.
A line for the +5V terminal is not required when the Optical I/O Link
Adapter is not used.
No connections must be made to the pins with brackets ([ ]) because
they are used in JD51A when the second and third channels are
connected in the FANUC I/O Link.
Do not make a connection to a pin for which no signal is assigned.

Recommended cable connectors

PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.)
52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)

- 158 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Optical Fiber Cable

The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200
m with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O Link adapter. The
length of the electrical cable connected to the optical conversion
adapter must not exceed 2 m.
In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.
• When the cable is more than 10 meters long. When the cable is
more than 15 meters long if it is laid within the same cabinet.
• When the cable is run between different cabinets, and the
cabinets cannot be connected with each other via a ground wire
of 5.5 mm2 or more.
If the power magnetics cabinet includes an I/O Link slave unit,
and cables are connected through a duct to the operator's panel
(as shown below), the control section I/O Link slave unit can be
assumed to be incorporated in the same cabinet.

• When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong

noise; for example :When there is a strong electromagnetic noise
source beside the cable such as a welding machine.
When a noise generating cable such as a power cable runs for a
long distance in parallel with the cable.

External dimension of optical link adapter

- 159 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

Weight of optical link adapter

Main body: Approx. 100 g.

• Connection

• Connection diagram

1 Recommended cable connectors

PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.)
52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
2 Recommended cable (wire material) : A66L-0001-0284#10P
3 Cable length : Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)

• Optical cable
1 Specification:
A66L-6001-0009# L5R003 ........ 5 m long
A66L-6001-0009# L10R03 ........ 10 m long
A66L-6001-0009# L15R03 ........ 15 m long

2 Cable length
Maximum length: 200 m (standard type)
Maximum length: 100 m (high-speed type)

- 160 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
Be careful not bend optical cables to a radius of 25
mm or less. Be extremely careful not to twist
them.

• Maximum number of connectable stages

Up to 16 high-speed type I/O link adapter stages can be
connected in one I/O link, while only up to five conventional I/O
link adapters (standard type) can be connected.
1) Standard type (A13B-0154-B001)
... up to 5 adapter stages can be connected in series
2) Standard type (A13B-0154-B002)
... up to 16 adapter stages can be connected in series

NOTE
It is impossible to use both high-speed and
standard type adapters on the same line.

• Power supply
The same power supply type can be used for both the standard
type (A13B-0154-B001) and high-speed type
(A13B-0154-B002).
(a) Power supply voltage: 4.75 to 5.25 V (at receiving end)
(b) Required current: 200 mA
• Installation conditions
(a) The optical link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install
it with the CNC control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
(b) Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical
link adapter.
(c) The optical link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary
to mount it with screws. However, keep it from coming in
contact with other circuits to prevent possible short-circuits.
When mounting the optical link adapter in a cabinet, attach
it with an L-type fitting using the case fixing screws (M3)
of the optical link adapter.

- 161 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

• Required parts
(a) For making up an I/O Link using the optical link adapter,
the following parts are necessary:
<1> Optical I/O Link adapter ................... 2
<2> Interunit connecting cable ................. 2
<3> Optical cable...................................... 1
• Relay with an optical fiber connection adapter
For the outline drawing of the optical fiber connection adapter,
see Appendix D.

NOTE
Optical fiber cables can be relayed only at are
location.
When a high-speed optical link adapter is used, no
optical fiber connection adapter can be used.

• Maximum transmission distance with an optical fiber cable(s)

The table below shows the maximum transmission distance with
an optical fiber cable(s), which varies depending on whether a
connection adapter is used for a relay.

Number of relay Maximum transmission

distance
Standard type 0 200m
1 100m (total)
High-speed type 0 100m
1 N/A

8.2.3 Connection when Multiple Channels of FANUC I/O Links are

Used
With 30i series, up to four channels can be used for the FANUC I/O
Link interface. This feature allows the number of I/O points to be
increased to 4096 (4096 input points and 4096 output points).
Series 30i-MODEL A PMC Programming Manual is available
separately to let you know how to use this feature, PMCs that can take
advantage of this feature, and the series and version of their
management software as well as the series and version of the CNC
management software.
Signals for three channels are assigned to the FANUC I/O Link
connector (JD51A) on the main board. When using only one channel,
see Subsection 8.2.1.
When using the second and third channels, use the I/O Link branching
adapter for two channels or the I/O Link branching adapter for three
channels to branch the FANUC I/O Link.

NOTE
A maximum of eight groups can be connected to
the FANUC I/O Unit-Model B with four channels.

- 162 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Using the second channel

To use the second channel, use the I/O Link branching adapter to set a
branch in the FANUC I/O Link.

Connection

CNC I/O Link branching adapter

JD51A JD44B
FANUC I/O Link channel 1
JD1A-1

FANUC I/O Link channel 2

JD1A-2

Connection after the I/O Link branching adapter

is the same as that for the FANUC I/O Link.

Part number of the I/O Link branching adapter:

A20B-1007-0680 (60 g)

Connection between the CNC and I/O Link branching adapter

The +5V pin is provided to use the optical I/O Link adapter for optical
fiber transmission. When not using the optical I/O Link adapter,
leave the +5V pin unconnected.
The signals with brackets ([ ]) are used when three channels are
connected in the FANUC I/O Link.

- 163 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

Cabling

Recommended cable connectors:

PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)

Recommended cable: A66L-0001-0284#10P

Connection between the I/O Link branching adapter and FANUC I/O Link I/O
units
The I/O Link branching adapter can be connected to I/O units in the
same way as for the conventional FANUC I/O Link. See 8.2.1.

Cable length

CNC I/O Link branching adapter I/O unit

lA
JD44A JD44B
lB
JD1A-1 JD1B

JD1A-2

- 164 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

The total of lA and lB must not exceed 10 m; where lA is the length of

the cable between connector JD44A on the CNC and connector
JD44B on the I/O Link branching adapter, and lB is the length of the
cable between connector JD1A-1 or JD1A-2 on the I/O Link
branching adapter and connector JD1B on the I/O unit. When all
cables are accommodated in the same cabinet, however, a total cable
length of up to 15 m is allowed.

Installation of the I/O Link branching adapter

Install the I/O Link branching adapter in a hermetically sealed cabinet
like the CNC.

External dimensions of the I/O Link branching adapter

60

JD44B JD1A-1 JD1A-2

34
23
45

85

Unit : mm

Allow a clearance of about 10 cm above the adapter for connection

and routing of cables.

Installation of the I/O Link branching adapter

1) Installation on the DIN rail

35

25

Unit: mm

Recommended DIN rail

- 165 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

2) Screwing

11.6

2-M4
70
Unit: mm

Drilling on the plate

Using the third channel

When using channel 3, use the I/O Link branching adapter for three
channels to branch the FANUC I/O Link.

CNC I/O Link branching

adapter for three channels
I/O Link channel 1 and
JD51A JD44A-1
JD51B channel 2
I/O Link channel 2 and
JD44A-2
channel 3

JD1A I/O Link channel 3

The connection after the I/O Link branching adapter for three
channels is the same as that for the conventional FANUC I/O Link.

I/O Link branching adapter for three channels: A20B-1008-0360

- 166 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Connection between the CNC and I/O Link branching adapter for three
channels

The +5V pin is provided to use the optical I/O Link adapter for optical
fiber transmission. When not using the optical I/O Link adapter, leave
the +5V pin unconnected.

Cable connection

Recommended cable connectors:

PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)

- 167 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)

FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
Connector FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) cannot be used as
connector JD51A for the stand-alone type 30i series main CPU board.

Recommended cable: A66L-0001-0284#10P

Signal configuration of the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels

Connection between the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels and
each channel
The connection between the I/O Link branching adapter for three
channels and each channel is the same as that for the conventional
FANUC I/O Link. However, keep the following in mind.
Connector JD44A-1 outputs I/O Link channel 1 and channel 2 signals
and connector JD44A-2 outputs I/O Link channel 2 and channel 3
signals.
Connector JD1A is dedicated to I/O Link channel 3.
1) When the FANUC I/O Link is branched to three channels,
normal I/O cables are used for JD44A-1, JD44A-2, and JD1A.
Channel 1 corresponds to JD44A-1, channel 2 corresponds to
JD44A-2, and channel 3 corresponds to JD1A.
2) When channels 1 and 2 are extended together, the I/O Link
branching adapter (A20B-1007-0680) must be connected to
JD44A-1 to branch channel 1 and channel 2 at the end of the
adapter.
JD1A is used as channel 3.
JD44A-2 is not used.
3) When channels 2 and 3 are extended together, the I/O Link
branching adapter (A20B-1007-0680) must be connected to
JD44A-2 to branch to channel 2 and channel 3 at the end of the
adapter.
JD44A-1 is used as channel 1.
JD1A is not used.

- 168 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

1) When three channels are branched

CNC I/O Link branching adapter for

three channels

JD51A JD51B JD44A-1 Channel 1

JD44A-2 Channel 2

JD1A Channel 3

2) When channels 1 and 2 are extended together

CNC I/O Link branching

adapter for three I/O Link branching
channels adapter
(A20B-1007-0680)
JD51A JD51B JD44A-1 JD44B JD1A-1 Channel 1

JD1A-2 Channel 2

JD44A-2

JD1A Channel 3

3) When channels 2 and 3 are extended together

CNC I/O Link branching

adapter for three
channels

JD51B JD44A-1 Channel 1

JD51A
I/O Link branching
adapter
(A20B-1007-0680)
JD44A-2 JD44B JD1A-1 Channel 2

JD1A-2 Channel 3
JD1A

- 169 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

Connection between the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels and
I/O Link branching adapter for two channels

The +5V pin is provided to use the optical I/O Link adapter for optical
fiber transmission. When not using the optical I/O Link adapter, leave
the +5V pin unconnected.

Cable connection

Recommended cable connectors:

PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
- 170 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu)
52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)

Connector FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) cannot be used as

connector JD51A for the stand-alone type 30i series main CPU board.

Recommended cable: A66L-0001-0284#10P

Cable length

CNC I/O Link branching adapter I/O Unit

LA LB
JD51A JD51B JD44A-1 JD1B

JD44A-2

JD1A

The total of LA and LB must not exceed 10 m; where LA is the length

of the cable between connector JD51A on the CNC and connector
JD51B on the I/O Link branching adapter, and LB is the length of the
cable between connector JD44A-1, JD44A-2, or JD1A on the I/O Link
branching adapter and connector JD1B on the I/O unit. When all
cables are accommodated in the same cabinet, however, a total cable
length of up to 15 m is allowed.

Installation of the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels

Install the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels in a
hermetically sealed cabinet like the CNC.

External dimensions of the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels
80

JD51B JD44A-1 JD44A-2 JD1A

45
34
23

105

Unit : mm

Allow a clearance of about 10 cm above the adapter for connection

and routing of cables.

- 171 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

Installation of the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels

1) Installation on the DIN rail
35

25

Unit: mm

Recommended DIN rail

2) Screwing

11.6

2-M4 90
Unit: mm

Drilling on the plate

Using the fourth channel

To use the fourth channel in the FANUC I/O Link, an additional axis
board is required. Use the JD1A connector. See Subsection 8.2.1.

- 172 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.3 UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED USING FANUC I/O

Link

Basically, the 30i series can be connected to any unit that has a
FANUC I/O Link slave interface. The following table lists general
units that can be connected to the Series 30i. Detailed descriptions of
each unit are given later in this section. For details of other units,
refer to the documentation provided with the unit.

General units that can be connected to the 30i series

Unit Description Reference
FANUC I/O Unit- Modular I/O unit that supports a combination Connection
MODEL A of the input/output signals required by a power and
magnetics circuit. maintenance
manual
B-61813E
FANUC I/O Unit- Distribution type I/O unit that supports a Connection
MODEL B combination of input/output signals required and
by a power magnetics circuit. maintenance
manual
B-62163E
Handy Machine operator's Compact handy operation panel, used for Connection
panel operation on the machine side, that consists of Manual
the manual pulse generator, emergency stop B-63753EN
switch, enable switch, display unit, and input
key.
Connector panel I/O module Distribution type I/O unit that handles the Sec. 8.4
input/output signals required by
the power magnetics circuit; it has an interface
with a manual pulse generator.
Operator's panel I/O module Unit having an interface with a machine Sec. 8.5
(for matrix input) operator's panel; it has an interface
with a manual pulse generator.
Operator's panel I/O module Unit having an interface with a machine Sec. 8.6
operator's panel that handles the input/output
signals required by the power magnetics
circuit; it has an interface with a manual pulse
generator.
Power magnetics panel I/O Unit having an interface with a power Sec. 8.6
module magnetics panel that handles the input/output
signals required by the power magnetics
circuit.
FANUC I/O Link connection Unit connecting FANUC I/O Link masters to Sec.8.7
unit enable the transfer of DI/DO signals
FANUC servo unit β series Unit connected with the CNC via the FANUC Sec.8.8
(with I/O Link) I/O Link to control a servo motor
Standard machine The appearance of this machine operator's Sec.8.9
operator's panel panel is consistent with that of the 30i series.
The panel can easily be customized.

- 173 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4 CONNECTION OF CONNECTOR PANEL I/O MODULE

8.4.1 Configuration

Flat cable for module connection

Direction to be
used when the
Direction to be used modules are
when the modules mounted using
are connected DIN rails or
directly to the screws
connection
printed circuit board

Extension module 3
JD1A
JD1B Extension module 2

Extension module 1 (with manual pulse generator)

Basic module
I/O Link cable

Manual pulse generator cable

NOTE
For direction connection to the connection printed
circuit board, expansion modules are installed to
the right of the basic module on the installation
plane. For installation using DIN rails or screws,
expansion modules are installed to the left of the
basic module on the installation plane.

- 174 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.4.2 Connection Diagram

NOTE
1 Ensure that the extension module with the MPG interface is located nearest to the
basic module, as shown in the figure. When the connector panel I/O module is
used together with a unit (such as an operator's panel I/O module) connected to the
I/O Link supporting another MPG interface, only the MPG interface of the unit
(module) closest to the CNC connected to the I/O Link is effective.
2 The connection diagram above shows an example of using a DI/DO module, 2A
output module, and analog input module as expansion modules. These expansion
modules can be used in any combination.

- 175 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4.3 Module Specifications

Types of modules
Reference
Name Drawing No. Specifications
item
I/O module for
connection A03B-0815-C001 DI/DO : 24/16
(basic module)
I/O module for
connection DI/DO : 24/16
A03B-0815-C002
(expansion With MPG interface
module A)
I/O module for
connection DI/DO : 24/16
A03B-0815-C003
(expansion Without MPG interface
module B)
I/O module for
connection DO : 16
A03B-0815-C004
(expansion 2A output module
module C)
I/O module for
connection
A03B-0815-C005 Analog input module
(expansion
module D)
1A
Fuse (accessory) A03B-0815-K002
(For basic module)
20 mm long
Inter-module flat
A03B-0815-K100 Suitable for a module
cable
interval of 32 mm

Module specifications (common items)

Item Specifications Remarks
Expandable up to 16 units
FANUC I/O Link
Interface with CNC or 1024/1024 points as
connection
CNC slaves
Interface between basic Up to three expansion
Bus connection
module and expansion modules connectable per
using a flat cable
modules basic module

For the specifications (such as signal input requirements) specific to

each module, see the relevant pages of each item.

- 176 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Installation conditions
Ambient Operation: 0°C to 55°C
temperature for the Storage and transportation:-20°C to 60°C
unit
Temperature 1.1°C/minute maximum
change
Humidity Normal condition:75% (relative humidity)
Short term (within one month):95% (relative humidity)
Vibration Operation: 0.5 G or less
Atmosphere Normal machining factory environment (For use in an
environment with relatively high levels of dust, coolant,
organic solutions, and so forth, additional measures are
required.)
Other conditions (1) Use each I/O module in a completely sealed
cabinet.
(2) For ventilation within each I/O module, each
module must be installed in the orientation shown
below. Moreover, for ventilation and wiring, allow
a clearance of 100 mm or more above and below
each module. Never place a device that
generates a large amount of heat below an I/O
module.
(3) While referring to Section 8.4.17, ensure that the
vent hole of the basic module is not obstructed by
the flat cable.
Upper side

Expansion module 2

Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Basic module

I/O Link
ti Lower side
MPG connection

Power supply rating

Module Power supply Power supply Remarks
voltage rating
Basic module 24 VDC ±10% 0.2A+7.3mA×DI Number of DI
is fed through points with
the I/O DI=ON
Expansion modules A connector 0.1A+7.3mA×DI Number of DI
and B (CB150) of the points with
basic module; DI=ON
Expansion module C ±10% includes 0.1A
(2A module) momentary
Expansion module D variations and 0.1A
(analog input module) ripples.

As a guideline for the heat dissipation, assume [power supply capacity

× 24 (W)].

- 177 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4.4 DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment

This section describes the DI/DO connector pin allocation of the basic
module and expansion modules A and B.

NOTE
1 The DI and DO addresses for the basic and
extension modules run contiguously. These basic
and extension module DI and DO addresses are
allocated to the I/O Link as a group. For example,
when the DI and DO top addresses are X0004 and
Y0000 (m = 4 and n = 0), respectively, then the
addresses are allocated as shown in the following
table.
2 Pins 18 and 50 (+24V) of connector CB150 are
used to apply 24 V externally to a module. Be
sure to connect these pins because the +24 V
applied to the module is used internally.

DI DO
Basic module X4 to X6 Y0 to Y1
Extension module 1 X7 to X9 Y2 to Y3
Extension module 2 X10 to X12 Y4 to Y5
Extension module 3 X13 to X15 Y6 to Y7

- 178 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.4.5 DI (Input Signal) Connection

This section describes the DI (input signal) connections of the basic
module and expansion modules A and B.

• A maximum of 96 points are provided (24 points per module; 1

basic module + 3 extension modules).

- 179 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

NOTE
Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected.
That is, by connecting the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI
signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is
connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal. To
prevent such accidents, the connection of the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin to the 0 V
power supply is recommended whereever possible.
For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to be allocated to an
appropriate bit of the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed, ranging
from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 or from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7. See 8.4.19 for information
about how to allocate the emergency stop signal.
For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which the common voltage is
fixed (from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7), the logic is fixed to
"0". For unused pins allocated to Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 for which the common
voltage can be selected, the logic is fixed to "0" when the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin
is connected to the 0 V power supply. When the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is
connected to the +24 V power supply, the logic is fixed to "1". The logic of the
unused pins allocated to Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 is variable when the contact of the
DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is open.

- 180 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.4.6 DO (Output Signal) Connection

This section describes the DO (output signal) connections of the basic
module and expansion modules A and B.

• A maximum of 64 points are provided (16 points per module; 1

basic module + 3 extension modules).

- 181 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4.7 DI/DO Signal Specifications

This section describes the specifications of the DI/DO signals used
with the basic module and expansion modules A and B.

DI (input signal specifications)

Number of points 24 points (per module)
Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Leakage current 1 mA or less (26.4 V)
between contacts
when opened
Voltage decrease 2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)
between contacts
when closed
Delay time The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum). In
addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and
I/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period
(depending on CNC)] must be considered.

DO (output signal specifications)

Number of points 16 points (per module)
Maximum load 200 mA or less including momentary variations
current when ON
Saturation voltage 1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
when ON
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
Leakage current 20 µA or less
when OFF
Delay time The driver delay time is 50 µs (maximum). In
addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and
I/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period
(depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.

ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output

signals)
By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO
signals (output signals), all the DO signals of each module can be
turned off at the same time. At this time, the DO state is as shown
below.

ON
DOCOM
OFF
DO state when DO is ON
on in the sequence OFF

DO state when DO is ON
off in the sequence OFF

- 182 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
When DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state
of DOCOM is directly reflected in the DO state as
indicated above by the dashed box. The +24 V
signal to be supplied to the I/O module must not be
turned off during operation. Otherwise, a CNC
communication alarm is issued. Ensure that +24
V is supplied either when or before the power to
the CNC is turned on, and that +24 V is removed
either when or after the power to the CNC is turned
off.

Parallel DO (output signal) connection

A DO load current of twice the level can be obtained by connecting
DO points in parallel and exercising ON/OFF control at the same time
in the sequence. Namely, the maximum load current per DO point is
200 mA. By connecting two DO points in parallel and turning on the
two DO points at the same time, 400 mA can be obtained. In this
case, however, the leakage current is doubled up to 40 mA when the
DO points are turned off.

DOCOM
CB150(01),(33)

+24V 0V
+24 V regulated
power supply

Relay
DV

DV

- 183 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4.8 2A Output Connector Pin Allocation

This section describes the 2A output connector pin allocation of
expansion module C.

NOTE
1 The DI/DO addresses of an expansion module and
the DI/DO addresses of the basic module are
contiguous. Addresses allocated to I/O Link are
handled as a group covering the basic and
expansion modules. That is, when the first
addresses allocated are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4,
n = 0), the DI/DO addresses are as listed below.
2 When the 2A output module is used, the DI
addresses of the module cannot be used. (When
the 2A output module is used as expansion module
3, X13 through X15 cannot be used.)

DI DO
Basic module X4 to X6 Y0 to Y1
Expansion module 1 X7 to X9 Y2 to Y3
Expansion module 2 X10 to X12 Y4 to Y5
Expansion module 3 X13 to X15 Y6 to Y7

- 184 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.4.9 2A DO (Output Signal) Connection

This section describes the 2A output connector connections of
expansion module C.

- 185 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4.10 2A Output DO Signal Specifications

This section describes the specifications of the 2A output DO signals
used with expansion module C.

DO (output signal specifications)

Number of points 32 points (per module)
2 A or less per point.
Maximum load current
12 A maximum for the entire module
when ON
(DO: 16 points) (including momentary variations).
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less (including momentary variations)
Leakage current when
100 µA or less
OFF
[I/O Link transfer time (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder
Delay time scan period (depending on CNC)] must be
considered.

ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output

signals) By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for
the DO signals (output signals), all the DO signals of each module can
be turned off at one time. At this time, the DO state is as shown
below.

ON
DOCOM
OFF
DO state when DO is ON
on in the sequence OFF

DO state when DO is ON
off in the sequence OFF

NOTE
When DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state
of DOCOM is directly reflected in the DO state as
indicated above by the dashed box. The +24 V
signal to be supplied to the I/O module must not be
turned off during operation. Otherwise, a CNC
communication alarm is issued. Ensure that +24
V is supplied either when or before the power to
the CNC is turned on, and that +24 V is removed
either when or after the power to the CNC is turned
off.

Parallel DO (output signal) connection

The 2A output module does not allow parallel DO connections
including parallel connections with the DO signals of other modules.

- 186 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.4.11 Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation

This section describes the analog input connector pin allocation of
expansion module D.

NOTE
When DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state
of DOCOM is directly reflected in the DO state as
indicated above by the dashed box. The +24 V
signal to be supplied to the I/O module must not be
turned off during operation. Otherwise, a CNC
communication alarm is issued. Ensure that +24
V is supplied either when or before the power to
the CNC is turned on, and that +24 V is removed
either when or after the power to the CNC is turned
off.

DI DO
Basic module X4 to X6 Y0 to Y1
Expansion module 1 X7 to X9 Y2 to Y3
Expansion module 2 X10 to X12 Y4 to Y5
Expansion module 3 X13 to X15 Y6 to Y7

- 187 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4.12 Analog Input Signal Connections

This section provides a diagram of the analog input connector
connections of expansion module D.

NOTE
1 In the diagram above, n represents each channel (n = 1,
2, 3, 4).
2 Current input or voltage input can be selected on a
channel-by-channel basis. For current input, connect
JMPn to INPn.
3 For the connection, use a shielded twisted pair.
4 In the diagram above, the shield of each channel is
connected to FGNDn, and FGND is used for shield
processing of all channels. However, the shield of a
channel may be directly connected to frame ground with
a cable clamp, instead of using FGNDn.
5 If the voltage (current) source has a GND pin, as shown
in the figure above, connect COMn to this pin.
Otherwise, connect INMn and COMn together in the
analog input module.

- 188 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.4.13 Analog Input Signal Specifications

This section describes the specifications of the analog input signals
used with expansion module D.

Item Specifications Remarks

Number of input Four channels
channels (Note)
Analog input DC -10 to +10 V Voltage input or
(Input resistance: 4.7 MΩ) current input can be
DC -20 to +20 mA selected on
(Input resistance: 250 Ω) channel-by-channel
basis.
Digital output 12 bits (binary) Represented as
(Note) two's complement
Input/output
Analog input Digital output
correspondence
+10V +2000
+5V or +20mA +1000
0V or 0mA 0
-5V or -20mA -1000
-10V -2000

Resolution 5 mV or 20 µA
Overall precision Voltage input: ±0.5% With respect to full
Current input: ±1% scale
Maximum input ±15V/±30mA
voltage/current
Minimum Ladder scan period of CNC
conversion time connected
(Note)
Number of DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes
occupied
input/output points
(Note)

NOTE
This analog input module has four input channels.
The digital output section consists of a group of 12
bits within the three-byte occupied input points.
This means that the channel to be used can be
dynamically selected by the ladder. The channel
switching DO point for channel selection is included
in the two-byte occupied output points.

- 189 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4.14 Analog Input Specifications

(Digital output)
This digital input module has four input channels. The digital output
section consists of a group of 12 bits within the three-byte occupied
input points. The output format is indicated below.
Address in the module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm (even-numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm+1 (odd-numbered address) 0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08

D00 to D11 represent 12-bit digital output data. D00 and D11
correspond to weightings of 20 and 211, respectively.
D11 is a sign bit expressed as a two's complement. CHA and CHB
represent analog input channels. This means that when the two bytes
above are read with a PMC program, the A-D converted data of the
CHA and CHB input channels can be read from D11 to D00. For
CHA and CHB, see the description of channel selection, below.
Section 6.3 provides notes on reading data with a PMC program.

(Channel selection)
With this analog input module, which of the four channels is to be
output to the digital output section must be determined with a PMC
program. The DO points used for this selection are CHA and CHB
(two-byte occupied output points). These are mapped as indicated
below.
Address in the module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Yn X X X X X X X X
Yn+1 X X X X X X CHB CHA

By writing the values indicated below to CHA and CHB, the

corresponding channel is selected, and the A-D converted data of the
channel and the data of the selected channel can be read as DI data.
The character X indicated above represents an unused bit, so that
either 1 or 0 may be written in place of X.
CHB CHA Channel selected
0 0 Channel 1
0 1 Channel 2
1 0 Channel 3
1 1 Channel 4

- 190 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

(Address)
The start address of X (DI) of the basic modules including the analog
input module must always be allocated at an even-numbered address.
With this allocation, the digital output addresses of the analog input
module are as described below, depending on where the analog input
module is allocated

• When the analog input module is allocated in the space for

expansion module 1 (m represents the allocation start address.)
Address in the module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm+3 (odd-numbered address) Undefined
Xm+4 (even-numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm+5 (odd-numbered address) 0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08

• When the analog input module is allocated in the space for

expansion module 2 (m represents the allocation start address.)
Address in the module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm+6 (even-numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm+7 (odd-numbered address) 0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08
Xm+8 (even-numbered address) Undefined

• When the analog input module is allocated in the space for

expansion module 3 (m represents the allocation start address.)
Address in the module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm+9 (odd-numbered address) Undefined
Xm+10 (even-numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm+11 (odd-numbered address) 0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08

NOTE
When two-byte digital output addresses are to be
referenced with a PMC program, a read must
always be performed word-by-word (16 bits).

- 191 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4.15 Manual Pulse Generator Connection

An example in which three manual pulse generators are connected to
extension module A is shown below.

Recommended wire material:

A66L-0001-0286 (#20 AWG × 6 + #24 AWG × 3 pairs)
Recommended connector:
A02B-0120-K303 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: FI40-2015S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
(Case: FI40-20-CV5 (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
Recommended cables:
A02B-0120-K841 (7 m)
(for connecting three manual pulse generators)
A02B-0120-K848 (7 m)
(for connecting two manual pulse generators)
A02B-0120-K847 (7 m)
(for connecting one manual pulse generator)
(These cables do not include the wire shown in the above figure.)
- 192 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
The number of connectable manual pulse
generators depends on the type and option
configuration.

8.4.16 Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator

Like a pulse coder, the manual pulse generator operates on 5 VDC.
The supply voltage drop due to the cable resistance must be held
below 0.2 V (when those of the 0-volt and 5-volt wires are combined),
as expressed in the following expression:
where
0.2≥ 0.1×R×2L 0.1 = manual pulse generator supply current (0.1 A)
m R = resistance per unit cable length (Ω/m)
m = number of 0-volt and 5-volt wires
L = cable length (m).

Therefore, the cable length can be determined using the following

expression.
m
L≤
R

In the case of the A66L-0001-0286 cable, for example, when three

pairs of signal
wires and six power supply wires (20/0.18, 0.0394 Ω/m) are used
(three power supply wires connected to 5 V and the other three to 0 V),
the cable length is:
3
L≤ =76.75[m]
0.0394

However, the maximum pulse transmission distance for the manual

pulse generator
is 50 m. Taking this into consideration, the cable length may be
extended to:
38.37 m (when two generators are used), or
25.58 m (when three generators are used).

- 193 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4.17 Connection of Basic and Extension Modules

Modules can be connected in the same way, regardless of whether you
are connecting the basic module to an extension module or connecting
two extension modules. Connect the modules by using 34-pin flat
cable connectors as shown in the figure below. Ensure that all 34
pins at one end of the cable are connected to the corresponding pins at
the other end; e.g., connect the A1 pin to the pin having the same
designation (A1) at the other end.

NOTE
Modules need to be spaced at least 32 mm apart, in which case a flat cable of
about 20 mm in length is required. To install modules further away from each
other, the cable length will be 20 mm plus the extra distance. Note that the
maximum length of a flat cable is 300 mm. To ensure adequate ventilation, install
the modules in such a way that the flat cables lie on top of them. The basic
module has a vent at the top (as indicated by the dotted lines in the above figure).
When connecting modules, install extension modules so that the flat cables do not
cover the vent, as shown in the above figure.
Therefore, for direct connection to the connection printed circuit board, expansion
modules are installed to the right of the basic module on the installation plane. For
installation using DIN rails or screws, expansion modules are installed to the left of
the basic module on the installation plane.

- 194 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.4.18 Module Installation

When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly
(external module view and mounting diagram)

Dimensions of connector panel

printed circuit board ±0.2
Board thickness 1.6mm
Square hole

No. 1 pin
Note）

Square hole

I/O Link
interface
I/O interface

MPG interface
(for extension module)
JD1A JD1B

Connector panel printed circuit board connector specification: HONDA MRH-50FD (50-pin female straight connector without fitting)

NOTE
1 A connector with a fitting (HONDA MRH-50RMA) is used for the module-side I/O
interface. Always use a connector having no fitting for the connector panel printed
circuit board.
2 Area where pattern printing is prohibited
: Prohibited area on soldered side
: Prohibited area on component side

- 195 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly

(mounting and dismounting a module)

Hook

Stopper
connector panel
printed circuit board

Mounting the module

1. Insert the hook of the module into the square hole located at the upper part of the connector panel printed circuit board.
2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, push the module in the direction of B , and attach the module's connector to the connector on
the printed circuit board.
3. Push the stopper into the lower hole of the printed circuit board until it clicks into place.
Dismounting the module
1. Press the stopper C upward.
2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, pull the lower part of the module in the direction of A .

NOTE
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold
the module by its top and bottom surfaces. Avoid
applying force to the sides where there are slits.

- 196 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

When mounting a DIN rail (external module view and mounting

diagram)

Mount the DIN rail here.

JD1B
Note

JD1A

I/O interface

I/O Link interface

MPG interface
(for extension module)

NOTE
Recommended connector: A02B-0098-K891
(including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR-50FH solder type)
(Case: HONDA MR-50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material:
A66L-0001-0042 (7/0.18, 50 pins)

- 197 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

When mounting a DIN rail (mounting and dismounting a module)

NOTE
When dismounting the module, take care not to
damage the stopper by applying excessive force
with the screwdriver.
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold
the module by its top and bottom surfaces. Avoid
applying force to the sides where there are slits.

- 198 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

When mounting a module using screws (external module view and

mounting diagram)

Screw
holes

I/O interface

I/O Link interface

MPG interface
(for extension module)

JD1A JD1B

NOTE
Recommended connector: A02B-0098-K891
(including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR-50FH solder type)
(Case: HONDA MR-50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material:
A66L-0001-0042 (7/0.18, 50 pins)

- 199 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4.19 Other Notes

DO signal reaction to a system alarm

If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using the connector panel I/O
module, or if I/O Link communication between the CNC and
connector panel I/O module fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module
are turned off. Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the
machine sequence. Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power
to the CNC or the I/O module is turned off.

Address allocation
For the connector panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as
follows.
DI space map DO space map

Xm Yn
Basic module Basic module
Xm+1 Yn+1
Xm+2 Yn+2
Extension module 1
Xm+3 Yn+3
Extension module 1
Xm+4 Yn+4
Extension module 2
Xm+5 Yn+5
Xm+6 Yn+6
Extension module 2 Extension module 3
Xm+7 Yn+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Extension module 3
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Extension module 1
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG)
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15(DO alarm Basic module
detection)

The basic connector panel I/O module is allocated a group of DI

addresses (16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (8 bytes). Up to
three hardware extension modules can be added or removed as
required. The reason for this address allocation is explained below.
The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies a DI space from Xm+12
through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed regardless of whether
extension module 2 or 3 is used, and Xm+12 through Xm+14 must be
allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG. Therefore,
when using an MPG for the i series CNC, allocate DI addresses in
units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through
Xm+14 for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG counter value
directly.
DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheating
alarms that occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see
the section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.]
This address is fixed regardless of whether extension module 2 or 3 is
used, and it must be allocated as a work area before it can be used.
When using this area, therefore, allocate DI addresses in units of 16
bytes.

- 200 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the connector panel I/O

modules freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider
also the addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep
the following in mind.

Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for Series 30i)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X0004 SKIP ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

SKIP ESKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 ZAE YAE XAE

SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP
X0009 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
The upper row indicates those signals used for the T series. Those in
the lower row are for the M series.

When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0004

X0004 SKIPn and other fixed signals

Basic module
X0005
X0006
X0007
Extension module 1
X0008 *ESP fixed signal
X0009 *DECn fixed signal
X0010
Extension module 2
X0011
X0012
X0013 The minimum configuration consists of the basic module and extension
Extension module 3 module 1. Extension modules 2 and 3 may be added as required.
X0014 This allows fixed signals, such as SKIPn and *DECn, to always be used
X0015 and the *ESP fixed signal to be allocated to an address for which the
X0016 (for 1st MPG) common voltage is fixed to 24 V. Also, with the Series 30i, the MPG
Extension module 1
X0017 (for 2nd MPG) interface provided by extension module 1 can always be used.
X0018 (for 3rd MPG)
X0019 (DO alarm Basic module
detection)

- 201 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0007

X0007
Basic module
X0008 *ESP fixed signal
X0009 *DECn fixed signal
X0010
Extension module 1
X0011
X0011
X0013
Extension module 2
X0012
X0015
X0016 The minimum configuration consists of the basic module only.
Extension module 3 Extension modules 1, 2, and 3 may be added as required. In the
X0017 minimum configuration, SKIP and other fixed signals and the MGP
X0018 interface of extension module 1 cannot be used. In this case, however,
X0019 (for 1st MPG) the *DECn fixed signal can always be used and the *ESP fixed signal
Extension module 1 can be allocated to an address for which the common voltage is
X0020 (for 2nd MPG)
X0021 (for 3rd MPG) fixed to 24 V in the minimum configuration.
X0022 (DO alarm Basic module
detection)

DO (output signal) alarm detection

The DO driver of the Basic and Extension module A/B is capable of
detecting an overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. If an
accident, such as the connecting of the cable to ground, causes an
abnormal increase in the load current or in the driver temperature, a
protection circuit, which is provided for each DO driver (1 byte), is
activated and keeps the DO signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF
state until the cause of the problem is eliminated. Even if this occurs,
the CNC and I/O module continue operating. The DI address
(Xm+15) identifies the DO driver which has detected the alarm. The
following table shows the correspondence between the DI address
(Xm+15) bits and the DO addresses. Bit value "1" indicates that the
corresponding DO driver has detected an alarm. The contents of the
Xm+15 area can be checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or
by performing alarm processing for the area in advance by using
Ladder. This helps alarm detection and recovery.
Alarm detection DO address Location
address and bit
Xm+15.0 Yn+0 Basic module
Xm+15.1 Yn+1 Basic module
Xm+15.2 Yn+2 Extension module 1
Xm+15.3 Yn+3 Extension module 1
Xm+15.4 Yn+4 Extension module 2
Xm+15.5 Yn+5 Extension module 2
Xm+15.6 Yn+6 Extension module 3
Xm+15.7 Yn+7 Extension module 3

NOTE
This function is not supported by the 2A output
module or analog input module.

- 202 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Allocation of the 2A output module and analog input module

The 2A output module and analog input module can be allocated to
any of the spaces for expansion modules 1, 2, and 3. In addition, up
to three 2A output modules or analog input modules can be allocated
to all the spaces for expansion modules 1, 2, and 3. When an MPG
interface is required, the module occupies the space for expansion
module 1; no 2A output module or analog input module can be
allocated in the space for expansion module 1.
The 2A output module does not involve DI points, so that the DI area
of the space in which a 2A output module is allocated is unusable.
When a 2A output module is allocated to the space for expansion
module 2, for example, the areas from Xm+6 to Xm+8 cannot be used.
(The spaces for the other modules are not shifted. In this case, the DI
space of expansion module 3 remains at Xm+9 through Xm+11.)

- 203 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.4.20 Distribution I/O Setting

By changing the setting (rotary switch) for the expansion modules,
connections can be made by omitting some expansion modules as
shown below.

Method of setting (control and method of setting the control)

As shown below, the control (rotary switch) is located on an
expansion module. To change the setting, turn the switch with a
flat-bladed screwdriver with a tip width of about 2.5 mm.

The function of the rotary switch is as follows:

Setting Actual Meaning of setting
position indication
0 0 This is the standard setting. The rotary switch is
factory-set to this position. This setting is used
when no expansion module is omitted.
1 - Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to
this position when the preceding expansion module
is omitted.
2 2 Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to
this position when the preceding two expansion
modules are omitted.
3 - This setting is prohibited.

- 204 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Setting Actual Meaning of setting

position indication
4 to F 4, -, 6, -, 4, 8, or C has the same effect as 0.
8, -, A, -, 5, 9, or D has the same effect as 1.
C, -, E, -, 6, A, or E has the same effect as 2.
7, B, or F has the same effect as 3. (This setting,
however, is prohibited.)

NOTE
1 Expansion module A (DI/DO = 24/16, with manual
pulse interface) (A03B-0815-C002) is fitted with an
additional rotary switch as other types of modules
are modified. However, expansion module A is
always mounted at the location of expansion
module 1, so that its factory setting need not be
changed.
2 This feature was added in the middle. The
expansion modules shipped before August 1998
are not provided with this feature.

- 205 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.5 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O MODULE

(FOR MATRIX INPUT)

8.5.1 Overall Connection Diagram

NOTE
When the operator's panel I/O module is used together with a unit (connector panel
I/O module) connected to the I/O Link supporting another MPG interface, only the
MPG interface of the unit (module) closest to the CNC connected to the I/O Link is
enabled. The following screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the 30i
series main board, cannot be used to connect the I/O Link or MPG.

Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side

Specification Manufacturer
Connector case FI-20-CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Connector case and connector FI30-20S-CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.

- 206 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.2 Power Connection

Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the power
necessary for printed circuit board operation and that for DI operation.
To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT)
exactly as it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division is
required, use CPD1 (OUT).
Up to 1.0 A can be supplied by branching.

CPD1(IN)

01 +24V
24 V power 02 0V
03

CPD1(OUT)

01 +24V
24 V power 02 0V
03

Recommended cable-side connector:

A02B-0120-K324 (including the following connector housing and case)
(Housing: Japan AMP 1-178288-3)
(Contacts: Japan AMP 1-175218-5)

NOTE
The specification of the power supply connector
CPD1 (IN) is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT).
There are no indications on the printed circuit
board to distinguish between the IN and OUT
connectors. Do not turn off the +24 V supply to
the connector during operation. Turning off the
+24 V supply will cause a CNC communication
alarm. When turning on the power, the +24 V
supply to the I/O module must be turned on before
or at the same time as the power supply to the
CNC. When turning off the power, the +24 V
supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or
at the same time as the power supply to the CNC.

- 207 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.5.3 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement

NOTE
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CD53 (B02) and
CE54 (B02) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24
VDC to these pins from the outside.

- 208 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.4 DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection

- 209 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

NOTE
1 Xm+1.0 through Xm+1.7 are DI pins for which a
common voltage can be selected. That is, by
connecting the COM1 CE54(A02) pin to the +24 V
power supply, a DI signal can be input with its
logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is
connected to ground, it has the same effect as
inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent this
from occurring, the connection of the COM1
CE54(A02) pin to the 0 V power supply is
recommended whereever possible.
For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal
needs to be allocated to an appropriate bit of the
addresses for which the common voltage is fixed,
ranging from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7. See "Address
allocation" in Section 8.5.10 for details of how to
allocate the emergency stop signal.
For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for
which the common voltage is fixed (from Xm+1.0 to
Xm+1.7), the logic is fixed to "0". For unused pins
allocated to Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 for which the
common voltage can be selected, the logic is fixed
to "0" when the COM1 CE54(A02) pin is connected
to the 0 V power supply. When the COM1
CE54(A02) pin is connected to the +24 V power
supply, the logic is fixed to "1". The logic of the
unused pins allocated to Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 is
variable when the contact of the COM1 CE54(A02)
pin is open.
2 An output DC voltage of +24 V at CD53 (B02) and
CE54 (B02) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24
VDC to these pins from the outside.

- 210 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.5 DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection

• A maximum of 56 points are provided.

NOTE
Detour prevention diodes must be incorporated for
matrix signal input, as shown in the following figure.
Otherwise, only two signals can be input at the
same time. Inputting three or more signals
simultaneously without using detour prevention
diodes may result in data input errors.

*KCMn

*KYDn

- 211 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.5.6 DO (Output Signal) Connection

• A maximum of 56 points are provided.

- 212 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

- 213 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

- 214 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.7 Manual Pulse Generator Connection

For details of the connection of the manual pulse generator, see
Section 8.4.15.

- 215 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.5.8 External View

5-φ3.2

65

95 95

24 V power supply connection

Manual pulse generator connection

I/O Link signal connection
Operator's panel DI/DO interface

Note) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear face of the printed
circuit board. Ensure that printed circuit boards are spaced 5 mm or more
from one another to prevent interference.

: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark

Rear mounting area (Perspective drawing viewed

from the front)

- 216 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.9 Specifications
Installation specifications
Ambient
During operation 0°C to 58°C
temperature
During storage and transportation -20°C to 60°C
for the unit
Temperature
Max. 1.1°C/min.
change
Relative Normal : 75% or less
humidity Short term (1 month or less) : 95% or less
Vibration During operation : 0.5 G or less
Ordinary machining factory environment (Special
consideration is required when installing the module in a
Environment
dusty location or where highly concentrated cutting
lubricant or organic solvent is used.)
Other
(1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
requirements

Ordering specifications
Item Specification Remarks
General-purpose DI: 16 points
Operator's panel I/O Matrix DI: 56 points
A20B-2002-0470
module DO: 56 points
MPG interface is supported.
Fuse (replacement part) A03B-0815-K001 1A

Module specifications
Item Specification Remarks
General-purpose DI 16 points 24-V input
Matrix DI 56 points (8 × 7) 5-V input
DO points 56 points 24 V source type output
CUp to 16 modules can be
connected as CNC slaves.
FANUC I/O Link Or, a maximum of
CNC interface
connection 10241/024 points can be
supported on both the input
and output sides.
MPG interface can be used
MPG interface Max. 3 units
only for the Series 30i.

Power supply rating

Module Supply voltage Current Remarks
rating
The total power
24 VDC ±10% supplied consumption of DI
from the power supply points is included.
Operator's connector CPD1. The (This is true when all
panel I/O allowance of ±10% 0.35A general-purpose DI
module should include points are turned on.)
instantaneous voltage The power consumption
and ripple voltage. of DO points is not
included.

- 217 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

DI (input signal) specifications

(General-purpose input signal)
Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Open circuit intercontact
1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)
leakage current
Closed circuit
2 V or less (including cable voltage drop)
intercontact voltage drop
Receiver delay: Max. 2 ms
The time required for I/O Link transmission
Delay between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms
+ CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken
into account.

(Matrix input signal)

Contact rating 6 VDC, 2 mA or more
Open circuit intercontact
0.2 mA or less (at 26 V)
leakage current
Closed circuit
0.9 V or less (with a current of 1 mA)
intercontact voltage drop
The maximum matrix period of 16 ms, the
maximum time of I/O Link transfer between
Delay CNC and I/O module of 2 ms, and the ladder
scanning period (by CNC) must be
considered.

NOTE
When detour prevention diodes are used, the
voltage drop across closed contacts indicated
above must be maintained, including the diode
voltage drop.

DO (output signal) specifications

Maximum load current in
200 mA or less (including momentary current)
ON state
Saturation voltage in ON
Max. 1 V (when load current is 200 mA)
state
24 V +20% or less (including momentary
Withstand voltage
values)
Leakage current in OFF
20 µA or less
state
Driver delay: Max. 50 µs
The time required for I/O Link transmission
Delay between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms
+ CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken
into account.

NOTE
Ensure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin
(DO power supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.

- 218 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.5.10 Other Notes

DO signal reaction to a system alarm

If a system alarm occurs in the CNC using the operator's panel I/O
module, or if I/O Link communication between the CNC and
operator's panel I/O module fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module
are turned off. Therefore, sufficient care is necessary when setting
up the machine sequence. Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the
power to the CNC or the I/O module is turned off.

Address allocation
For the operator's panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as
follows.
DI space map DO space map

Xm General-purpose Yn
Xm+1 input signal Yn+1
Xm+2 Yn+2
Reserved
Xm+3 Yn+3 Output
Xm+4 Yn+4 signal
Xm+5 Yn+5
Xm+6 Matrix input signal Yn+6
Xm+7 Yn+7 Reserved
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11 Reserved
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
MPG
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG)
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 (DO alarm (DO alarm
detection) detection)

The operator's panel I/O module is allocated a group of DI addresses

(16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (8 bytes). This address
allocation is explained below.
The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies DI space from Xm+12
through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed, and Xm+12 through
Xm+14 must be allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the
MPG. Therefore, when using an MPG for the I series CNC, allocate
DI addresses in units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from
Xm+12 through Xm+14 for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG
counter value directly.
DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheating
alarms that may occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details,
see the section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.]
This address is fixed, and must be allocated as a work area before it
can be used. Therefore, when using this area, allocate DI addresses
in units of 16 bytes.
Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the operator's panel I/O
module freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider
also the fixed addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and
keep the following in mind.

- 219 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for Series 30i)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SKIP ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
X0004
SKIP ESKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP
X0009 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
The upper row indicates those signals used for the T series. Those in
the lower row are for the M series.

When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0008

X0008 General-purpose *ESP fixed signal
X0009 input signal *DECn fixed signal
X0010
X0011 Reserved
X0012
X0013
X0014
X0015 Matrix input signal
X0016
X0017
Although fixed signals such as SKIP cannot be used, allocating DI
X0018
addresses starting from X0008 allows the *DECn signal to be used and
X0019 Reserved
the *ESP fixed signal to be allocated to an address for which the common
X0020 (for 1st MPG) voltage is fixed to 24 V.
X0021 (for 2nd MPG) MPG (Fixed signals cannot be allocated to the for the matrix input signals.)
X0022 (for 3rd MPG)
X0023 (DO alarm DO alarm detection
detection)

Turning the DO (output signal) power on and off (DOCOM)

All the DO signals can be turned off simultaneously by turning off
(opening) the DO (output signal) power supply pin "DOCOM".
Doing so causes the DO signal status to change as shown below.

ON
DOCOM
OFF
When DO is ON in ON
the sequence OFF

When DO is OFF in ON
the sequence OFF

- 220 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
When the DO signal is in the ON state in the
sequence, the ON or OFF state of the DOCOM pin
determines the state of the signal, as indicated by
the dotted lines in the above figure. Do not turn
off the +24 V supply, provided by the CPD1 to the
I/O module, during the operation. Turning off the
+24 V supply would cause a CNC communication
alarm. When turning on the power, the +24 V
supply to the I/O module must be turned on before
or at the same time as the power supply to the
CNC. When turning off the power, the +24 V
supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or
at the same time as the power supply to the CNC.

Parallel DO (output signal) connection

The DO load current can be doubled by connecting two DO points in
parallel and turning them on and off simultaneously in sequence, as
shown in the figure below. The maximum load current per DI point
is 200 mA. Connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them
on at the same time produces a current of 400 mA. Note that,
however, when two DO points are connected in parallel, the leakage
current also doubles while they are off (max. 40 µA).

CE53(A25), (B25)
DOCOM CE54(B24), (A25), (B25)

+24V 0V
+24 stabilized
power supply

Relay
DV

DV

DO (output signal) alarm detection

The DO driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an
overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such
as connecting the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the
load current or in the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is
provided for each DO driver (1 byte), is activated which keeps the DO
signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF state until the cause of the
problem is eliminated. Even if this occurs, the CNC and the I/O

- 221 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

module continue operating. The DI address (Xm+15) identifies

which DO driver has detected an alarm. The following table shows
the correspondence between the DI address (Xm+15) bits and the DO
addresses. Bit value "1" indicates that the corresponding DO driver
has detected an alarm. The contents of the Xm+15 area can be
checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or by performing the
alarm processing for the area in advance by using Ladder. This helps
alarm detection and recovery.
Alarm detection
DO address Remarks
address and bit
Xm+15.0 Yn+0
Xm+15.1 Yn+1
Xm+15.2 Yn+2
Xm+15.3 Yn+3
Xm+15.4 Yn+4
Xm+15.5 Yn+5
Xm+15.6 Yn+6
Xm+15.7 Yn+7 Reserved

- 222 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.6 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O MODULE

AND POWER MAGNETICS CABINET I/O MODULE

The difference between the operator's panel I/O module and the power
magnetics cabinet I/O module lies in whether an interface to a manual
pulse generator is provided. The power magnetics cabinet does not
provide an interface to a manual pulse generator.

8.6.1 Overall Connection Diagram

NOTE
When the operator's panel I/O module is used together with a unit
(connector panel I/O module) connected to the I/O Link supporting
another MPG interface, only the MPG interface of the unit (module)
closest to the CNC connected to the I/O Link is enabled. The
following screw type connectors cannot be used to connect the I/O
Link or MPG.

Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side

Specification Manufacturer
Connector case FI-20-CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Connector case and connector FI30-20S-CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.

- 223 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.6.2 Power Connection

Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the power
necessary for the printed circuit board operation and that for DI
operation. To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1
(OUT) exactly as it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division
is required, use CPD1 (OUT).
Up to 1.0 A can be supplied by branching.

CPD1(IN)
DOCOM
01 +24V
24 V power 02 0V
supply
03

CPD1(OUT)

01 +24V
24 V power 02 0V
supply
03

Recommended cable-side connector:

A02B-0120-K324 (including the following connector housing and case)
(Housing: Japan AMP 1-178288-3)
(Contacts: Japan AMP 1-175218-5)

NOTE
The specification of the power supply connector
CPD1 (IN) is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT).
There are no indications on the printed circuit
board to distinguish between the IN and OUT
connectors. Do not turn off the +24 V supply to
the connector during operation. Turning off the
+24 V supply will cause a CNC communication
alarm. When turning on the power, the +24 V
supply to the I/O module must be turned on before
or at the same time as the power supply to the
CNC. When turning off the power, the +24 V
supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or
at the same time as the power supply to the CNC.

- 224 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.6.3 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement

NOTE
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CE56 (B01) and
CE57 (B01) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24
VDC to these pins from the outside.

- 225 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.6.4 DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection

- 226 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

- 227 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

- 228 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
1 Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 and Xm+5.0 through
Xm+5.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage
can be selected. That is, by connecting the
DICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin to
the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input
with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable
is connected to ground, it has the same effect as
inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent this
from occurring, the connection of the DICOM0
CE56(A14) and DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins to the 0
V power supply is recommended whereever
possible.
For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal
needs to be allocated to an appropriate bit of the
addresses for which the common voltage is fixed.
See "Address allocation" in Section 8.6.9 for details
of how to allocate the emergency stop signal.
For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for
which the common voltage is fixed, the logic is
fixed to "0". For unused pins allocated to the
addresses for which the common voltage can be
selected, the logic is fixed to "0" when the DICOM0
CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply. When the
DICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin is
connected to the +24 V power supply, the logic is
fixed to "1". The logic of the unused pins is
variable when the contacts of the DICOM0
CE56(A14) and DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins are
open.
2 An output DC voltage of +24 V at CE56 (B01) and
CE57 (B01) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24
VDC to these pins from the outside.

- 229 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.6.5 DO (Output Signal) Connection

- 230 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

- 231 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.6.6 Manual Pulse Generator Connection

For details of the connection of the manual pulse generator, see
Section 8.4.15.

8.6.7 External View

5-φ3.2

65

95
95

24 V power supply connection

Manual pulse generator connection
I/O Link signal connection
Operator's panel DI/DO interface

24-V power supply

Note) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear face of the printed circuit board.
Ensure that the printed circuit boards are spaced 5 mm or more from one another to prevent
interference.

: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark

Rear mounting area (Perspective drawing

viewed from the front)

- 232 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.6.8 Specifications
Installation specifications
Ambient
During operation 0°C to 58°C
temperature
During storage and transportation -20°C to 60°C
for the unit
Temperature
Max. 1.1°C/min.
change
Relative Normal: 75% or less
humidity Short term (1 month or less): 95% or less
Vibration During operation: 0.5 G or less
Ordinary machining factory environment (Special
consideration is required when installing the module in a
Environment
dusty place or where highly concentrated cutting lubricant
or organic solvent is used.)
Other
(1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
requirements

Ordering specifications
Item Specification Remarks
Operator's panel I/O A20B-2002-0520 DI: 48 points
module DO: 32 points
(with MPG interface) MPG interface is
supported.
Power magnetics panel A20B-2002-0521 DI: 48 points
I/O module DO: 32 points
(without MPG interface) MPG interface is not
supported.
Fuse (replacement part) A03B-0815-K001 1A

Module specifications
Item Specification Remarks
DI points 48 points 24 V input
DO points 32 points 24 V source type output
CNC interface FANUC I/O Link Up to 16 modules can be connected
connection as CNC slaves.
Or, a maximum of 1024 points can be
supported on both the input and
output sides.
MPG interface Max. 3 units MPG interface can be used only for
the Series 30i.

Power supply rating

Module Supply voltage Power supply Remarks
rating
Operator's 24 VDC ±10% is 0.3 A+7.3 mA×DI DI = number of DI
panel I/O supplied from points in the ON
module and power supply state
power connector CPD1.
magnetics The tolerance of
panel I/O ±10% includes
module momentary and
ripple currents.

- 233 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

DI (input signal) specifications

(general-purpose input signal)
Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Open circuit
intercontact leakage 1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)
current
Closed circuit
intercontact voltage 2 V or less (including cable voltage drop)
drop
Receiver delay: Max. 2 ms
The time required for I/O Link transmission
Delay between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms +
CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken into
account.

DO (output signal) specifications

Maximum load current
200 mA or less (including momentary current)
in ON state
Saturation voltage in ON
Max. 1 V (when load current is 200 mA)
state
24 V +20% or less (including momentary
Withstand voltage
values)
Leakage current in OFF
20 µA or less
state
Driver delay: Max. 50 µs
The time for I/O Link transmission between the
Delay
CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms + CNC ladder
scan cycle) must also be taken into account.

NOTE
Ensure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin
(DO power supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.

- 234 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.6.9 Other Notes

DO signal reaction to a system alarm

If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using this 48/32-point I/O module,
or if I/O Link communication between the CNC and operator's panel
I/O module fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module are turned off.
Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the machine
sequence. Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power of the
CNC or the I/O module is turned off.

Address allocation
For the operator's panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as
follows.

DI space map DO space map

Xm Yn
Input signal
Xm+1 Yn+1 Output
Xm+2 Yn+2 signal
Xm+3 Yn+3
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6 Not used
Xm+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
MPG
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG)
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 (DO alarm
DO alarm detection
detection)

Basically, this 48/32-point I/O module is allocated a group of DI

addresses (16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (4 bytes). This
address allocation is explained below.
The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies DI space from Xm+12
through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed, and Xm+12 through
Xm+14 must be allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the
MPG. Therefore, when using an MPG for the i series CNC, allocate
DI addresses in units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from
Xm+12 through Xm+14 for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG
counter value directly.
DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheating
alarms that occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see
the section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.]
This address is fixed, and must be allocated as a work area before it
can be used. When using this area, therefore, allocate DI addresses
in units of 16 bytes.

Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the 48/32-point I/O

module freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider
- 235 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

also the fixed addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and
keep the following in mind.

Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for Series 30i)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SKIP ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
X0004
SKIP ESKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP
X0009 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
The upper row indicates those signals used for the T series. Those in
the lower row are for the M series.

When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0004

X0004
Input signal
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP fixed signal
X0009 *DECn fixed signal
X0010
Not used
X0011
X0012
X0013
X0014
X0015
X0016 (for 1st MPG) Allocating DI addresses from X0004 allows the fixed signals, such as
MPG SKIP and *DECn, to be used and the *ESP fixed signal to be allocated to
X0017 (for 2nd MPG)
an address for which the common voltage in fixed to 24 V.
X0018 (for 3rd MPG)
X0019 (DO alarm DO alarm detection
detection)

Turning the DO (output signal) power on and off (DOCOM)

All the DO signals can be turned off simultaneously by turning off
(opening) the DO (output signal) power supply pin "DOCOM".
Doing so causes the DO signal status to change as shown below.

ON
DOCOM
OFF
When DO is ON in ON
the sequence OFF

When DO is OFF in ON
the sequence OFF

- 236 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
When the DO signal is in the ON state in the
sequence, the ON or OFF state of the DOCOM pin
determines the state of the signal, as shown within
dotted lines in the above figure. Do not turn off
the +24 V supply provided by the CPD1 to the I/O
module during the operation. Turning off the +24
V supply causes a CNC communication alarm.
When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to
the I/O module must be turned on before or at the
same time as the power supply to the CNC.
When turning off the power, the +24 V supply to
the I/O module must be turned off after or at the
same time as the power supply to the CNC.

Parallel DO (output signal) connection

The DO load current can be doubled by connecting two DO points in
parallel and turning them on and off simultaneously in sequence, as
shown in the figure below. The maximum load current per DI point
is 200 mA. Connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them
on at the same time produces a current of 400 mA. Note that,
however, when two DO points are connected in parallel, the leakage
current also doubles when they are off (max. 40 µA).

CE56(A24, B24, A25, B25)

DOCOM
CE57(A24, B24, A25, B25)

+24V 0V
+24 stabilized
power supply

Relay
DV

DV

DO (output signal) alarm detection

The DO driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an
overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such
as the connecting of the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase
in the load current or in the driver temperature, a protection circuit,
which is provided for each DO driver (1 byte), is activated and keeps
the DO signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF state until the cause
of the problem is eliminated. Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O

- 237 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

module continue operating. The DI address (Xm+15) identifies the

DO driver which has detected the alarm. The following table shows
the correspondence between the DI address (Xm+15) bits and the DO
addresses. Bit value "1" indicates that the corresponding DO driver
has detected an alarm. The contents of the Xm+15 area can be
checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or by performing alarm
processing for the area in advance by using Ladder. This helps alarm
detection and recovery.

Alarm detection
DO address Remarks
address and bit
Xm+15.0 Yn+0
Xm+15.1 Yn+1
Xm+15.2 Yn+2
Xm+15.3 Yn+3
Xm+15.4 Yn+4 Reserved
Xm+15.5 Yn+5 Reserved
Xm+15.6 Yn+6 Reserved
Xm+15.7 Yn+7 Reserved

- 238 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.7 FANUC I/O LINK CONNECTION UNIT

8.7.1 Overview
This unit connects FANUC I/O Link master devices' such as the CNC,
via an I/O Link to enable the transfer of DI/DO signals.

System A System B

CNC +24 V power +24 V power CNC

supply supply

I/O Link I/O Link

SLAVE SLAVE

FANUC I/O
FANUC I/OLink
Link
connection unit
Œ‹‡ƒ†ƒjƒbƒg
DI DO

DO DI

I/O Link MASTER : Series 30i, etc.

I/O Link SLAVE : I/O Unit, Power Mate, Series 0-C, etc.
: FANUC I/O Link

Fig. 8.7.1 System which uses FANUC I/O Link connection units

NOTE
This system enables I/O data transfer between two
independent FANUC I/O Link master devices.
When the system is adjusted and maintained, the
FANUC I/O Link can be operated with the system
power for one of the FANUC I/O Link lines switched
off, that is, the link operation is stopped. In this
case, DI data sent from a system at rest consists
entirely of zeros. If one of the links is stopped,
either abnormally or normally, it takes up to several
hundred milliseconds for this function to take effect.
During this period, that data which exists
immediately before the link stops is sent out. Take
this into account when designing your system.

8.7.2 Specification

- 239 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

Item Specification
I/O Link function Provided with two slave mode I/O Link interface channels, between which DI/DO data can be
transferred.

[Interface types]
Electrical - optical
Electrical - electrical One of the following combinations is selected:
Optical - optical
Number of DI/DO data DI: Up to 256, DO: Up to 256
items (The number of data items actually used varies depending on the amount of data assigned
in the host.)
Power supply Each I/O Link interface must be independently supplied with +24 VDC.
Voltage: +24 VDC +10%, -15%
Current: 0.2 A (excluding surge)
If a master unit does not have sufficient capacity to supply power to each unit (0.2 A per
slot), use an external power supply unit. The power supply must be switched on, either
simultaneously with or before, the I/O Link master.
The two systems can be switched on and off independently of each other. Data from a
system to which no power is supplied appears as zeros when viewed from the other
system. The data becomes 0 within 200 ms of the power being switched off.
External dimensions 180 mm (width) × 150 mm (height) × about 50 mm (depth)
W H D
Fig. 8.7.2 (b) is an outline drawing of the unit.
Installation The unit, which is a stand-alone type, is installed in the power magnetics cabinet. Fig.
8.7.2 (c) shows how to mount the unit.
Operating environment Temperature : 0 to 60°C
Humidity : 5 to 75% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration : 0.5 G or less

Ordering information
Interface type Specification
Electrical-optical interface A20B-2000－0410
Electrical-electrical interface A20B-2000-0411
Optical-optical interface A20B-2000－0412

- 240 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

LED indications
LED5 LED3 LED4 LED2
(GREEN) (RED) (GREEN) (RED)

DC-DC
CONVERTER

CP2 CP1

+5V

LED1 (RED)

0V : Check pin

Fig. 8.7.2 (a) LED locations

LED status Description

1 LED1 Normal
LED1 A RAM parity error occurred because of a
hardware failure.
2 LED4 LED2 CP1 is supplied with the specified voltage.
(Pilot lamp)
LED4 LED2 CP1 is supplied with a voltage that is lower
than specified or zero.
LED4 LED2 A communication error occurred in a
channel of CP1.
3 LED5 LED3 CP2 is supplied with the specified voltage.
(Pilot lamp)
LED5 LED3 CP2 is supplied with a voltage that is lower
than specified or zero.
LED5 LED3 A communication error occurred in a
channel of CP2.
: On : Off

- 241 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

180 Unit: mm

10 160 10
30

Printed-circuit board
90

150
30

Cable Cable
Mounted components

50 or less

Fig. 8.7.2 (b) Outline drawing

160 4-M4 Unit: mm

90

Fig. 8.7.2 (c) Mounting location

- 242 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.7.3 Connection

8.7.3.1 I/O Link interface

(1) Connection diagram (example)

AC power input AC power input

External power External power

I/O Link master (+24 V) (+24 V) I/O Link master
③ ③
① ①
JD1A JD1A
(JD44A) (JD44A)

Optical I/O
Link adapter

CP* CP*
②
Electrical Optical
interface interface
JD1B* COPB*

JD1A* COPA*
① ②
FANUC I/O Link connection unit (for
electrical-optical interface)
(*) 1 or 2 (channel No.)

<1> : Signal cable (electrical)

<2> : Signal cable (optical) Additionally, the FANUC I/O Link connection unit frame must be grounded.
<3> : Power supply cable

[Name of I/O Link connection unit connectors]

Electrical-optical Electrical-electrical Optical-optical

Connector name Connector name Connector name
I/O Link interface I/O Link interface I/O Link interface
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2
JD1A1 COPA2 JD1A1 JD1A2 COPA1 COPA2
JD1B1 COPB2 JD1B1 JD1B2 COPB COPB2
CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2

- 243 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

(2) Signal cable (electrical)

This unit (JD1A1/JD1A2) ⇔ Another device (JD1B)

or
Another device (JD1A) ⇔ This unit (JD1B1/JD1B2)

- 244 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

(3) Signal cable (optical)

• Optical cable specification :
A66L-6001-0026#XXXX
(where XXXX is a cable length specification)
Cable specification examples
10m - L10R03
100ｍ - L100R3
• Cable length : 200 m (maximum)
(4) Power supply cable

1 2 3
Y +24V 0V (Input)
X +24V 0V (Output)
• 24 VDC is supplied via a Y-connector. Provided the
power supply has sufficient capacity, power can be supplied
to another device with the X-side as output.
• Power must be supplied to both CP1 and CP2.
• Cable-side connector specification
Y-connector : A63L-0001-0460#3LKY
(AMP Japan, 2-178288-3)
X-connector : A63L-0001-0460#3LKX
(AMP Japan, 1-178288-3)
Contact: A63L-0001-0456#BS
(AMP Japan, 175218-5)
Ordering information:
Y + 3 contacts : A02B-0120-K323
X + 3 contacts : A02B-0120-K324
Cable material :
Vinyl-insulated electrical wire AWG20-16
Cable length :
Determine the length of the cable such that the
supplied voltage at the receiving end satisfies the
requirements, because the voltage may fluctuate and
drop as a result of the resistance of the cable
conductor.
(5) Frame grounding
Ground the frame of the unit using a wire having a cross section
of at least 5.5 m2 (class 3 or higher). An M4 frame ground
terminal is provided.

- 245 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.8 CONNECTING THE FANUC SERVO UNIT β SERIES WITH

I/O LINK

8.8.1 Overview

The FANUC servo unit β series with I/O Link (called the β amplifier
with I/O Link) is a power mate CNC control servo unit that can be
easily connected to a CNC control unit via the FANUC I/O Link.
The β amplifier with I/O Link can be connected to the 30i series using
the FANUC I/O Link.

NOTE
Using the β amplifier requires that the power mate
CNC manager software function be installed. This
function is included as one of the 30i series option
functions.

8.8.2 Connection

The β amplifier with I/O Link is connected to the Series 30i using the
usual FANUC I/O Link connection.

- 246 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.8.3 Maximum Number of Units that can be Connected

The maximum number of β amplifiers with I/O Link that can be

connected to a control unit depends on the maximum number of
FANUC I/O Link points provided by that control unit, as well as their
assignments. For the Series 30i, the maximum number of FANUC
I/O Link DI and DO points are 1024 and 1024, respectively. One β
amplifier with I/O Link occupies 128 DI/DO points in the FANUC I/O
Link. If no units other than the β amplifiers with I/O Link are
connected to the control unit, up to eight β amplifiers can be
connected.

8.8.4 Address Assignment by Ladder

If the β amplifier with I/O Link is used as an I/O Link slave, I/O
addresses are assigned in the PMC in the CNC. Because data output
from the slave is made in 16-byte units, the number of input/output
points must be set to 128.
The module names are OC02I (input) and OC02O (output).
The BASE is always 0, and the SLOT is 1.

- 247 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.9 CONNECTION TO ATANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR'S

PANEL

8.9.1 Overview
Standard machine operator's panel is connected with 30i series by I/O
Link, which is composed by some following operator's panels.
Main panel
All key tops are detachable. MTB can customize keys and make
his original key layout easily.
Sub panel A, D
This operator's panel has power ON/OFF, emergency stop,
program protect, and two rotary switches.

- 248 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

- 249 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.9.2 Total Connection Diagram

CNC

Standard MDI Unit

CNK2

CNK1

MDI(CA55) Main panel

Machine operator's
section CM68
I/O Link(JD1A)
General-purpose DI/DO
(JD44A) JD1B
(JD51A) CM69

JD1A
MPG
JA3

Next I/O unit MPG

MPG

Pendant
+24V Power CyA6yy4(IN) JA58 type MPG

+24V Power CA64(OUT) Sub panel A or D

CM65 (SA1)

CM66 (SA2)

Power magnetics cabinet CA65 CM67 (SA3,SB1 to 3)

NOTE
1 This CNC is only possible to use the MPG interface
on this operator's panel. If 30i series uses some
I/O unit having MPG interface (ex. Dispersion type
I/O module for panel) and this operator's panel, the
MPG interface nearest the CNC is only available
on the I/O Link connection.
2 MPG cannot be connected with either of JA3 and
JA58.

- 250 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.9.3 Each Connections

8.9.3.1 Pin assignment

NOTE
Input/output Pins shaded by are in pairs. Only one in each pair is usable.
Pins shaded by are those for forwarding signals. Pins with the same name are
connected directly to one another.

- 251 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

Recommended connector for cable of JA3 and JA58

When the depth of the operator's panel is 60mm min.
Hirose electric :FI30-20S (Connector), FI-20-CV7 (Case)
When the depth of the operator's panel is 80mm min.
Recommended connector for cable of JA3:
Hirose electric : FI40B-2015S (Connector), FI-20-CV (Case)
Recommended connector for cable of JA58:
Honda : PCR-E20FA (Connector), PCR-V20LA (Case)
Hirose electric : FI30-20S (Connector), FI-20-CV2 (Case)
Fujitsu : FCN-247J020-G/E (Connector), FCN-240C020-Y/S (Case)
Molex : 52622-2011 (Connector), 52624-2015 (Case)

8.9.3.2 Power supply connection

The power required for the operation of this operator's panel and for a
general DI must be supplied to connector CA64 (IN) in the following
figure. Since the power input from CA64 (IN) is output to CA64
(OUT) for easy branching, use the power from CA64 (OUT) when the
power must be branched.

CA64(IN)
01 +24V
24VDC power 02 0V
03

CA64(OUT)
01 +24V
24VDC power¹ 02 0V
03

- 252 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
1 Both connectors CA64(IN) and CA64(OUT) are
same specification. And there is not indication of
(IN) and (OUT) on the PCB.
2 Power supply for the operator's panel must not turn
off at operation. If +24V is turned off at operation,
CNC happen to get system alarm(Communication
alarm between CNC and operator's panel). +24V
for operator's panel must be supplied before or
same time CNC power on.

8.9.3.3 I/O link connection

Control unit preceding slave unit

Main panel

Next slave unit

Recommended connector for cable of JD1A and JD1B on Main panel

When the depth of the operator's panel is 60mm min.
Hirose electric : FI30-20S (Connector), FI-20-CV7 (Case)
When the depth of the operator's panel is 80mm min.
Honda : PCR-E20FA (Connector), PCR-V20LA (Case)
Hirose electric : FI30-20S (Connector), FI-20-CV2 (Case)
Fujitsu : FCN-247J020-G/E (Connector), FCN-240C020-Y/S (Case)
Molex : 52622-2011 (Connector), 52624-2015 (Case)

+5V terminals are for an optical I/O Link adapter. They are not necessary when connecting with a metal cable.
A line for the +5V terminal is not required when the Optical I/O Link Adapter is not used.

Shield
Ground
plate
Recommended wire material:
A66L-0001-0284#10P (#AWG28 × 10 pairs)

- 253 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.9.3.4 Emergency stop signal connection

A signal generated by the emergency stop switch on the standard
machine operator's panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet.
(This signal cannot be sent to the FANUC I/O Link.)
When MTB uses the Sub panel A/D, wiring to the emergency stop
switch is contained in the Sub panel A/D.

Machine operator's panel

Sub panel A/D

Main panel Power
Emergency stop switch magnetics
(SB1) P.C.B. cabinet
CM67 CA65

*ESP *ESP
A04 A03 *ESP

(2a2b)
ESPCM1 ESPCM1
B04 B03 +24V

8.9.3.5 Power ON/OFF control signal connection

Signal generated by the power ON/OFF control switches on the
standard machine operator's panel can be sent to the power magnetics
cabinet. (This signal cannot be sent to the FANUC I/O Link.)
When MTB uses the Sub panel A/D, wiring to the ON/OFF control
switches are contained in the Sub panel A/D.

Machine operator's panel

Sub panel A/D Main panel Power magnetics

cabinet
P.C.B.
ON switch (SB2)
CM67 CA65

EON
A01 A01 EON

COM1
A02 A02 COM
OFF switch (SB3)
EOFF
B01 B01 EOFF

COM2
B02 B02

- 254 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.9.3.6 General-purpose DI signal connection

NOTE
Connection of Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7, Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.4 shows when the Sub panel
A/D is used.

- 255 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

NOTE
1 Xm+3.0 to 3.7 have a common line that is possible to select the source/sink type. If
DICOM (CM69-B06pin) is connected to +24V, the DI signal logic is negative. But in
this connection, if the DI signal wires happen to drop the ground level, the status of
the DI signal is same as the DI signal is "ON". From the safety viewpoint, DICOM
should be connected 0V.
2 From the safety viewpoint, Emergency Stop signal must be assigned on the
address Xm+0.0 to 0.7 or Xm+1.0 to 1.7 or Xm+2.0 to 2.7. As refer to the 5. DI/DO
mapping, assign the Emergency stop DI.
3 Xm+0.0 to 0.7, Xm+1.0 to 1.7 and Xm+2.0 to 0.7 common lines are fixed. So, if
these DI pins in this address open, the status of these one stay "0". And in case of
Xm+3.0 to 3.7 which have a selectable common line, if the DICOM (CM69-B06pin)
is connected to 0V and these DI pins open, the status of these one stay "0". And if
the DICOM are connected to +24V and these DI pins open, the status of these one
stay "1". And if the DICOM is not connected to 0V or +24V and these DI pins open,
the status of these one don't care.

- 256 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.9.3.7 General-purpose DO signal connection

- 257 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.9.3.8 Manual pulse generator connection

When only the manual pulse generator.

Example of the 3 manual pulse generator connection is as follows. If
this CNC uses some I/O unit having MPG interface (ex. Dispersion
type I/O module for panel) and this operator's panel, the MPG
interface nearest the CNC is only available on the I/O Link
connection.

When the depth of the operator's panel is 80mm min.

Recommended wire material : A66L-0001-0286(#20AWG × 6+#24AWG × 3 pairs)
Recommended connector : A02B-0120-K303 (Including below connector and case)
(Connector : HIROSE FI40B-2015S Soldering type)
(Case : HIROSE FI-20-CV)
Recommended cable : A02B-0120-K841(7m) (MPG 3 units)
A02B-0120-K848(7m) (MPG 2 units)
A02B-0120-K847(7m) (MPG 1 unit)
(These cables don't include the wiring part in the figure.)
When the depth of the operator's panel is 60mm min.
Recommended wire material : A66L-0001-0284#10P(#28AWG × 10pairs)
Recommended connector : A02B-0236-K302 (Including below connector and case)
(Connector : HIROSE FI30-20S Stand wire press-mount type)
(Case : HIROSE FI-20-CV7)

- 258 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

NOTE
Calculate the MPG cable max. Length as refer to the
following calculation.

MPG needs a 5VDC power supply and the voltage must be less than
0.2V dropping. (the 0.2V dropping includes the resistance in the
cable.)
0.1×R×2L
0.2≥
m
0.1 : MPG power supply current 0.1A
R : Resistance per wire length (Ω/m)
m : Wire Number (Both 0V and 5V)
L : Cable length (m)
Because
M
L≤
R
Example: In case of cable A66L-0001-0286
It has 3 pairs signal wires and 6 power line wires (20/0.18, 0.0394
Ω/m).
If the cable is used and each 3 wires are used for 0V and 5V power
line, then max. cable length is as follows.
3
L≤ =76.75(m)
0.0394
The answer is 76.75m, if MPG unit is 1.
(But FANUC decide any cable must be less than 50m.)
The answer is 38.37m, if MPG units are 2.
The answer is 25.58m, if MPG units are 3.
And In case of cable A66L-0001-0284#10P
The answer is 12.88m, if MPG units are 1.
The answer is 6.44m, if MPG units are 2.
The answer is 4.29m, if MPG units are 3.
If the customer will use a some other vender's MPG ,not FANUC's
MPG, the electrical condition must be as follows.
HAn, HBn signals form MPG and CNC internal pulse are as follows.
A cycle of the HA/HB pulse T1 must be more than 200 µsec and 4/T1
must be more than 50 µsec.

T1

HAn T1
4 T1

HBn
T1 T1
4 4
in the direction of +
in the direction of -
Normal wheel Reverse wheel

Reverse wheel
Click point

- 259 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

The following shows a diagram of the circuit for receiving signals

from the manual pulse generator:

Manual pulse generator

+5V Filter

10KΩ
R
Connector
-

+
Internal C
receiver
0V circuit
0V

Point of change in the signal input to the receiver (threshold)

When the input signal state changes from the low level to high level,
the signal level must rise to 3.7 V or higher.
When the input signal state changes from the high level to low level,
the signal level must fall to 1.5 V or lower.

When a pendant-type manual pulse generator

NOTE
1 When Xm+1.5 to Xm+2.5 of connector JA58 are
allocated as the Dis used for the axis selection and
multiplier setting, Xm+1.5 to Xm+2.5 of connector
CM68 cannot be used.
2 One DO is available for the manual pulse generator
side at the user's direction. When this is used,
Yn+5.3 of CM68 cannot be used, as in the case for
DIs above.

- 260 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.9.3.9 Connector (on the cable side) specifications

Connector Manufacture specification Order

specification
JD1A, JD1B, JA3, JA58 Stand wire Hirose A02B-0236-K302
(Operators panel press-mount FI30-20S (Connector)
depth=60mm min.) type FI-20-CV7 (Case)
JD1A, JD1B, JA58 Soldering Honda A02B-0120-K301
(Operators panel type PCR-E20FS (Connector)
depth=80mm min.) PCR-V20LA (Case)
Hirose
FI40B-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV2 (Case)
Stand wire Honda A02B-0120-K302
press-mount PCR-E20FA (Connector)
type PCR-V20LA (Case)
Hirose
FI30-20S (Connector)
FI-20-CV2 (Case)
JA3 (Operators panel Soldering Hirose A02B-0120-K303
depth=80mm min.) type FI40B-2015S
(Connector)
FI-20-CV (Case)
CA64 (IN), AMP A02B-0120-K324
CA64 (OUT) 1-178288-3 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)
CM67 AMP A02B-0236-K312
178289-5 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)
CM68, AMP A02B-0236-K313
CM69 178289-8 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact)
CM65, Hirose A02B-0236-K314
CM66 HIF3BA-10D-2.54R
CA65 Hirose A02B-0120-K343
HIF3BA-20D-2.54R
CA55 JAV A02B-0236-K303
LY10-DC10 (Housing)
LY10-C2-3 (Contact)

- 261 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.9.4 I/O Address

8.9.4.1 Keyboard of main panel

I/O address of Keyswitches and LED on the keyboard of Main panel
are as follows.

BIT
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Key/LED
Xm+4/Yn+0 B4 B3 B2 B1 A4 A3 A2 A1
Xm+5/Yn+1 D4 D3 D2 D1 D4 C3 C2 C1
Xm+6/Yn+2 A8 A7 A6 A5 E4 E3 E2 E1
Xm+7/Yn+3 C8 C7 C6 C5 B8 B7 B6 B5
Xm+8/Yn+4 E8 E7 E6 E5 D8 D7 D6 D5
Xm+9/Yn+5 B11 B10 B9 A11 A10 A9
Xm+10/Yn+6 D11 D10 D9 C11 C10 C9
Xm+11/Yn+7 E11 E10 E9

Keyswitches / LED position

Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

- 262 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.9.4.2 Override signals

Table of gray code output is as follows when the Sub panel A/D is
used.

Rotary switch (SA1)

% 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 95 100 105 110 120
Xm+0.0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
Xm+0.1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
Xm+0.2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Xm+0.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Xm+0.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
Xm+0.5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

NOTE
Xm+0.5 is a parity bit.

Rotary switch (SA2)

% 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Xm+0.6 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Xm+0.7 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
Xm+1.0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Xm+1.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Xm+1.2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Xm+1.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

NOTE
Xm+1.2 is a parity bit.

- 263 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.9.5 I/O Mapping

I/O address map is as follows.

DI mapping should be assigned 1 group = 16 byte mapping and DO

mapping should be assigned 1 group = 8 byte mapping. The reason is
as follows.
MPG interface(the counter for MPG) uses Xm+12 to Xm+14 area and
it is fixed. And if MPG interface will be used, Xm+12 to Xm+14 area
must be assigned. therefore, in case of 30i series and using MPG
interface, DI mapping must be assigned 16 byte mapping. MPG
counter area are directly processed by CNC software. So you must not
use this area by customer ladder.
When the MPG interface is not used, its DI area may be assigned to
another I/O group. I/O mapping of the standard machine operator's
panel can basically be assigned to any area of addresses. As for DI
mapping, however, there are fixed signals directly monitored by the
CNC. The fixed signals cannot be assigned to the keyswitch-input
area. To use the fixed signals, therefore, assign them to an area other
than the keyswitch-input area.

- 264 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.9.6 Outline

8.9.6.1 Outline of main panel

Packing attachment area

- 265 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.9.6.2 Outline of sub panel A

- 266 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.9.6.3 Outline of sub panel D

- 267 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.9.6.4 Connector locations of main panel

- 268 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.9.7 Specifications

8.9.7.1 Environmental requirement

Temperature Around a At operation 0°C to 55°C

unit Storing or transporting -20°C to 60°C
Temperature variance Max. 1.1°C/min
Normally 75% or less (Relative humidity)
Humidity
Short time(Within one month) 95% or less (Relative humidity)
Vibration Operating 0.5G or less
Normal FA atmosphere (Consult us when using the system under environments with higher
Atmosphere
degree of dust, coolant, or organic solution.)

8.9.7.2 Order specification

Name Specification Remark

Standard machine operators panel Main panel A02B-0303-C231 Symbol key
Standard machine operators panel Sub panel A A02B-0236-C232
Standard machine operators panel Sub panel D A02B-0236-C244
Set of transparent key tops A02B-0236-K170 55 key tops
Set of blank key tops A02B-0236-K171 55 key tops
Set of symbol English key tops A02B-0236-K174 34 labeled key tops + 21 blank key tops
Fuse(Spare part) A02B-0815-K001 1A

8.9.7.3 Main panel specification

Item Specification Remark

General-purpose DI points 32 points 24VDC type input
General-purpose DO points 8 points 24VDC type output
Keyswitches of MDI 65 keys Full alphabet key (Main panel A/A1)
Keyswitches of Machine operators panel 55 keys Matrix DI
LED Color : Green Attached to all keyswitches, Matrix DO
MPG interface Max. 3 units Only available for Series 30i.
Interface to CNC FANUC I/O Link Max. 16 modules or total points max. 1024/1024 will be
connection available.

8.9.7.4 Sub panel A/D specification

Specification of Sub panel

Item Remark
A Ｄ
Override rotary switch 2 2 5 bit Gray code output (with a parity bit)
Number of Contact : 4 (contact a × 2, contact b × 2)
Emergency stop switch 1 1
M3.5 Screw
Program protect key 1 1
ON/OFF switch ON/OFF ON/OFF
MPG - -

- 269 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.9.7.5 Power supply specification

Voltage Capacity Remark

24VDC±10% (from Power connector CA64, 0.4A Including all DI consumption
including momentary values)

8.9.7.6 General-purpose DI signal definition

Capacity 30VDC, 16mA or more

Interconnect leakage
1mA or less(at 26.4V)
current in closed circuit
Interconnect voltage
2V or less(including the voltage drop in the cables)
drop in closed circuit
Receiver delay : Max. 2ms
Delay time Need to consider about the serial communication (I/O Link) delay between CNC and
operators panel 2ms(MAX)+Scan cycle of ladder (Scan cycle is different each CNCs).

8.9.7.7 General-purpose DO signal definition

Maximum load current in

200mA or less (including momentary values)
ON state
Saturation voltage in ON
Max. 1V (When load current is 200mA)
state
Withstand voltage 24V±20% or less (including momentary values)
Leakage current in OFF
20µA or less
state
Driver delay : Max. 50µs
Delay time Need to consider about the serial communication (I/O Link) delay between CNC and
operator's panel 2ms (MAX)+Scan cycle of ladder (Scan cycle is different each CNCs).

- 270 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.9.8 Key Symbol Indication on Machine Operators Panel

8.9.8.1 Meaning of key symbols

Symbol English Meaning of key

AUTO AUTO mode selection signal; Sets automatic operation mode.

EDIT EDIT mode selection signal; Sets program edit operation mode.

MDI MDI mode selection; Sets MDI mode.

REMOTE DNC operation mode; Sets DNC operation mode.

REF
Reference position return mode selection; Sets reference position return mode.
RETURN

JOG JOG feed mode selection; Sets jog feed mode.

INC
Step feed mode selection; Sets step feed mode.
JOG

HANDLE Manual handle feed mode selection; Sets manual handle feed mode.

Teach-in jog (reach-in handle) mode selection signal; Sets teach-in jog (teach-in
TEACH
handle) mode.
SINGLE Single block signal; Executes program one by one. This key is used to check
BLOCK a program.
BLOCK Block delete; Skips the execution of the blocks d ending with the end of block (;)
DELETE when this button is pressed during automatic operation.
PRG Program stop(output only); Turns on the LED on the button when automatic
STOP operation is stopped by M00 specified in the program.
OPT Optional stop; Stops automatic operation after execution of the block of a
STOP program where M01 is specified in the program.
Program restart; A program may be restart at a block by specifying the sequence
RESTART number of the block, after automatic operation is stopped because of a broken
tool or for holidays.
Dryrun; Sets the axis feedrate to the jog feedrate instead of a programmed
DRY feedrate when automatic operation is performed by setting this button to on. This
RUN function is used to check only the movement of the tool when no workpiece is
mounted.
Machine lock; Updates only position display on the screen without making any
MC
axis movement, when automatic operation is performed by setting this button to
LOCK
on. This function is used to check a program.
CYCLE
Cycle start; Start automatic operation.
START
CYCLE
Cycle stop; Stops automatic operation.
STOP

Manual handle feed magnification:

Magnification for manual handle feed.
Magnified by 1, 10, 100, 1000.

Manual feed axis selection; Axes are selected, when these buttons are set to on in
the jog feed mode or step feed mode.

- 271 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

Symbol English Meaning of key

Manual feed operation; Performs movement along selected axes when these
buttons are set on in the jog feed mode or step feed mode.
TRVRS Traverse; Performs jog feed at rapid traverse rate when this button is set to on.
SPDL Positive spindle rotation direction; Rotates the spindle motor in the positive
CW direction.
SPDL Negative spindle rotation direction; Rotates the spindle motor in the negative
CCW direction.
SPDL
Spindle stop; Stops the spindle motor rotation.
STOP

- 272 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.9.8.2 Detachable key top

Keyboard of machine operator's panel has 55 keys. All key tops are
detachable. MTB can customize keys and make his original key layout
easily. And using transparent key top (optional), a film sheet with
marking is inserted into the key.

Symbolic key top or

Blank key top

Transparent key top

Film sheet (*)

(12.5mm×12.5mm, t=0.1mm Max.)

NOTE
(*) Use the oil-proof sheet in the environment which oil
is used for.

- 273 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

8.9.9 Others
The keyboard of this operator's panel is a matrix composition. When
three or more keys are pushed, the bypass current cause unrelated key
to be available. This malfunction can be prevented with ladder
program. One example is shown as follows.

(Elimination rule of malfunction)

When three keyinputs or more is input, all the keyinput since the third
is made invalid. However, when the number of all keyinput becomes
two or less because keyinput was lost, all keyinputs are made
effective.

(Ladder operation)
The following is an example ladder operation for the matrix DI
consisting of 8 (bits) × 8 (common) shown on the previous page.
[1] The number of datalines where the keyinput exists is examined.
Logical add R1 of the data of all addresses is calculated. The
number of bits which are "1" in the 8bits data of R1 corresponds
to the number of datalines where the keyinput exists.
(1) When the data of R1 is corresponding to 00h, there is no bit
which is "1" in the data of R1.
- 274 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

Ex. State (a) : R1=(00000000) → There is no dataline

where input exists.
(2) When the data of R1 is corresponding to the data in
undermentioned datatable1., the number of bits which are
"1" in the data of R1 is one. Similarly, when the data of R1
is corresponding to the data in datatable2., the number of
bits which are "1" in the data of R1 is two.
Ex. State (b) or (c) : R1 = (00000100) → There is one
dataline where input exists.
Ex. State (d) or (e) : R1 = (00010100) → There are two
datalines where input exists.
(3) If the data of R1 is not corresponding to 00h and the both
datatables, the number of bits which are "1" in the data of
R1 is three or more.
Ex. State (f) : R1 = (00110100) → There are three
datalines where input exists.

[2] Judgment 1
(1) If there is no dataline where the keyinput exists.
→ Any key switch is not pushed. : Ex. State (a)
(2) When the keyinput exists in two datalines or less.
→ To [3]
(3) When the keyinput exists in three data lines or more.
→ There are three keyinputs or more. It is invalid
keyinput. : Ex. State (f)
[3] When the keyinput exists in two datalines or less, it is examined
whether two or more keyinput exists on the same dataline. The
data of all addresses is subtracted from logical add R1 and
subtraction result R2 is obtained. There are no two or more
keyinput on the same dataline if it is R2=00h.
Ex. When there is one dataline where input exists.
State (b) : R2 = FCh
State (c) : R2 = F8h
When there are two datalines where input exists.
State (d) : R2 = 00h
State (e) : R2 = FCh
[4] Judgment 2
(1) In case of R2 = 00h → There are two or less datalines
where input exists, and there are no two or more keyinputs
on the same dataline. In this case, the numbers of all
keyinputs are one or two. It is effective keyinput.

- 275 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B-63943EN/02

(2) In case of R2 ≠ 00h → There are two or less datalines where

input exists, and two or more keyinputs exists on the same
dataline. To [5]. : Ex. State (d)
[5] Judgment 3
When there is one dataline where input exists → To [6].
When there are two datalines where input exists →
There are three keyinputs or more. It is invalid keyinput. :
Ex. State (e)
[6] Subtraction result R2 is added to logical add R1. If this addition
result is 00h, the number of all keyinputs is two.
Ex. State (b) : R1 + R2 = 04h + FCh = 00h
State (c) : R1 + R2 = 04h + F8h = FCh
[7] Judgment 4
In case of R1 + R2 = 00h →
There is one dataline where input exists, and there are two
keyinputs on this dataline.That is, because the numbers of all
input are two keys, it is effective input. : Ex. State (b)
In case of R1+R2 ≠ 00h →
There are three keyinputs or more on the same dataline. It is
invalid key input. : Ex. State (c)
[8] Only when the keyinput becomes effective because of judgment
1-4, all DI data (Xm+4-Xm+11) is used by the ladder program.

- 276 -
B-63943EN/02 8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

8.9.10 Maintenance Parts

Exhaustion parts
Name Ordering code Remark
Fuse For Main panel A60L-0001-0290#LM10 Rated at 1A

Repair parts
Name Ordering code Remark
I/O board For Main panel A20B-8002-0260
Main panel A02B-0303-C231
Sub panel A A02B-0236-C232
Sub panel D A02B-0236-C244

- 277 -
9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP B-63943EN/02

9 STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

- 278 -
B-63943EN/02 9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

9.1 STOP MODES

If the CNC enters the alarm state, the servo and spindle motors
stop(*).

NOTE
A stop of the spindle motor depends on a Ladder
program.

There are the following stop modes:

1. Stop by shutting off the motor power
2. Controlled stop without shutting off the motor power
3. Stop by shutting off the motor power after a controlled stop

A controlled stop is the quickest. However, a stop may be made by

immediately shutting off the motor power for safety reasons.

WARNING
Pressing the RESET key stops the running
program. As a result, the servo axis stops and
the spindle axis remains rotating without changing
the speed. The RESET key may not function due
to an MDI failure or the like, so, for safety, use the
emergency stop button instead of the RESET key
to stop the motor safely. When a failure of the
CNC, machine contact, or connection is also
assumed, further safety actions must be taken.

- 279 -
9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP B-63943EN/02

9.2 SHUTTING OFF THE MOTOR POWER

The motor power may be shut off through an IGBT (transistor) or an

electromechanical scheme that controls mechanical contacts. When
an α or αi series amplifier is used, the motor power is shut off by an
IGBT (transistor) based on the CNC alarm state (or Ladder program).
To shut off the motor power through an electromechanical scheme, a
line contactor must be installed on the power input line in the power
supply module, thereby providing a direct contactor shut-off route.
(See Fig. 9.5 in Section 9.5, "EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL.")
The power supply module provides MCC control signals (MCCOFF3
and MCCOFF4) for controlling the contactor. However, these
signals are enabled only when the motor power to all servo and
spindle amplifiers connected to the power supply module is shut off
through the IGBT.
Example 1)
When the *ESP signal is input to the power supply module
The motor power to both servo and spindle amplifiers is shut off
by the IGBT, after which MCC control signals are output.
Example 2)
When a servo alarm occurs
The motor power to the servo amplifier is shut off by the IGBT.
When the spindle works without any trouble, however, the
spindle can be controlled independently and the motor power to
the spindle amplifier is not shut off by the IGBT. In this case,
MCC control signals are not output. When a spindle emergency
stop signal is input using the Ladder program, the spindle motor
is decelerated to a stop. Then, the motor power is shut off
through the IGBT, MCC control signals are output, and the
motor power is shut off electromechanically.
A failure in the amplifier may disable MCC control signals. To
ensure motor power shut-off, therefore, a circuit must be designed in a
redundancy configuration having a route that is independent of the
shut-off function of the amplifier.

- 280 -
B-63943EN/02 9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

9.3 STOPPING THE SPINDLE MOTOR

While the spindle motor is running, shutting off the motor power
allows the spindle motor to coast at a speed maintained before shut-off
and eventually stop (after a while). However, there may be cases
where the spindle motor should be stopped as soon as possible for
safety reasons. In such cases, a stop of the spindle motor depends on
a Ladder program prepared by the machine tool builder. If the CNC
detects an abnormal condition, it outputs an alarm to the PMC. The
Ladder program should specify processing to be performed when an
alarm is output: allowing the spindle to continue running,
decelerating the spindle to a stop, or causing the spindle to coast, for
example.
To decelerate the spindle to a stop, a spindle emergency stop signal
(such as *ESPA (G71.1) or *ESPB (G75.1)) can be input in the PMC.
Inputting this signal cause the spindle to be decelerated to a stop. (A
Ladder program must be created so that this signal is input if an alarm
occurs.) The same effect can be achieved by using the PSM
emergency stop input (connector CX4). When an emergency stop
signal is connected to the *EMGPSM emergency stop input
(connector CX4), therefore, the spindle is decelerated to a stop if the
CNC enters the emergency stop state.

CAUTION
1 If the CNC enters the system alarm state, the
Ladder program does not run. In this case, the
spindle amplifier can be decelerated to a stop.
Make proper parameter settings because such a
stop depends on the settings.
2 If the spindle motor cannot be controlled due to an
alarm in the spindle amplifier itself or for some
other reason, the motor power is shut off by the
IGBT immediately. After the servo motor has
stopped, an MCC control signal is output.

- 281 -
9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP B-63943EN/02

9.4 STOPPING THE SERVO MOTOR

Shutting off the motor power brings the servo motor to a dynamic
brake stop. A dynamic brake stop is braking performed by
separating the synchronous rotator from the driving power, and
consuming generated electric energies with the coil as well as the
built-in resistor of the servo amplifier. With this function, shutting
off the motor power does not allow the servo motor to coast like the
spindle motor.
Servo motor stop mode depends on the type of a CNC alarm.
Example)
1. PS alarm caused by an NC program error or the like
The motor power is not shut off.
2. CNC fan stop
A single-block stop is made. The motor power is not shut off.
3. Emergency stop state
A dynamic stop is made as a rule. By setting relevant
parameters, however, it is also possible to decelerate the servo
motor to a stop, and then to shut off the servo motor power.
4. System alarm
A dynamic brake stop is made.
If the servo motor cannot be controlled, a dynamic brake stop is
unconditionally made.

- 282 -
B-63943EN/02 9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

9.5 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL

CAUTION
Using the emergency stop signal effectively enables the design of safe machine
tools. See "Cautions for configuring an emergency stop circuit in compliance with
safety standards."
The emergency stop signal is provided to bring a machine tool to an emergency
stop. It is input to the CNC controller and αi (α) series power supply module.
The power supply module outputs a motor power MCC control signal, which can be
used to switch the power applied to the power supply module on and off. An
emergency stop signal is usually generated by closing the B contact of a
pushbutton switch.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC controller
enters the emergency stop released state, such that the servo and spindle motors
can be controlled and operated.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, the CNC controller is reset
and enters the emergency stop state, and the servo and spindle motors stop.
Inputting an emergency stop signal causes the servo motor power to be shut off
through the IGBT, bringing the servo motor to a dynamic brake stop. Even in this
case, however, a servo motor attached to a vertical axis can move under the force
of gravity. To overcome this problem, use a servo motor with a brake. By using
relevant parameters, it is also possible to decelerate the servo motor to a stop, and
then to shut off the servo motor power.
While the spindle motor is running, shutting off the motor power to the spindle
amplifier allows the spindle motor to continue running under its own inertia, which
may be quite dangerous. With an αi (α) series amplifier, when the emergency
stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, it is possible to confirm that the spindle motor is
decelerated to a stop, and then to shut off the spindle motor power through the
IGBT.
When the motor power to both servo and spindle amplifiers is shut off through the
IGBT, the power supply module outputs a motor power MCC control signal, which
can be used to directly shut off the power with an external line contactor.
The CNC controller is designed to detect overtravel by using a software limit
function. Normally, no hardware limit switch is required to detect overtravel. If
the machine goes beyond a software limit because of a servo feedback failure,
however, it is necessary to provide a stroke end limit switch, which should be
connected so that the emergency stop signal can be used to stop the machine.
Fig. 9.5 shows an example showing how to make connections for the emergency
stop signal with this CNC controller and αi (α) series servo amplifier.

- 283 -
9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP B-63943EN/02

Stroke end limit switch Emergency

stop button
+‚w -w +x -x +y -y +4 -4
Relay
power
Release switch

Spark killer
SK

EMG
Relay
I/O unit (module) connected to
emg1 the CNC
+24
*ESP

αi (α) series servo amplifier SVM

(PSM) SPM
emg2
+24
*ESP

MCCOFF3
MCCOFF4
External
power L1 L2 L3
source

Spark killer

SK

3φ
ｺｲﾙ
200VAC
L1

L2

L3

Circuit MCC AC reactor

breaker 1

Fig. 9.5

WARNING
To use a spindle motor and amplifier produced by
a manufacturer other than FANUC, refer to the
corresponding documentation as well as this
manual. Design the emergency stop sequence
such that, if the emergency stop signal contact
opens while the spindle motor is rotating, the
spindle motor is decelerated until it stops.

- 284 -
B-63943EN/02 9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

Cautions for configuring an emergency stop circuit in compliance with safety standards

To configure an emergency stop circuit in compliance with JIS safety

standards(*), observe the following cautions. Compliance with these
JIS safety standards is a prerequisite for complying with the EC
Machine Instructions.
The method for shutting off the motor power section in the amplifier
is based on an IGBT (transistor) rather than an electromechanical
scheme.
When configuring an emergency stop circuit, therefore, install a line
contactor on the power input line for motor power in the power supply
module in order to ensure electromechanical shut-off, and apply
voltage to the control coil of the contactor via the contactor control
output of the power supply module.
A failure in the amplifier may disable the output relay of the power
supply module from going off, thus preventing the line contactor from
shutting off the power, even when the emergency stop command input
(*ESP) of the amplifier becomes low.
To secure motor power shut-off, design the emergency stop circuit in
a redundancy configuration. To be specific, the emergency stop circuit
must have a direct line contactor shut-off route based on an emergency
stop switch that is independent of the shut-off function of the
amplifier.
If a spindle amplifier module is used, shutting off the motor power
line during spindle rotation disables the spindle from stopping quickly
because the power regenerative function does not work, allowing the
spindle to coast. So, provide the redundancy circuit mentioned above
with a delay function based on an off-delay timer that allows a usual
stop time.
Refer to the following material for detailed descriptions about cautions
related to safety circuits.
A-71429-S13J:
About Requirements for Safety Circuits and Configuration
Samples
To get a copy of this material, contact your FANUC sales
representative.

- 285 -
9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP B-63943EN/02

9.6 CAUTIONS ABOUT MULTIPATH CONTROL

For multipath control, multiple paths (up to 10 paths) belong to a

machine group, and multiple machine groups (up to three groups)
constitute a system.

Example) Multipath control configuration

CNC

Machine group 1 Machine group 2

Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4

Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis Axis

Fig. 9.6 (a)

To prevent an emergency stop in one machine group from affecting

another within a multipath control system, a separate emergency stop
circuit (see Fig. 9.6 (b)) must be provided for each machine group.

Fig. 9.6 (b)

- 286 -
B-63943EN/02 10.CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS

10 CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS

The 30i series can be connected to the following networks. For an
explanation of how to make the connection, refer to the manuals listed
below:

Manual title Manual

code
FANUC DATA SERVER OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-62694EN
FANUC Ethernet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN
FANUC PROFIBUS-DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63994EN
FANUC DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64044EN
FANUC FL-net Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64164EN

- 287 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

11 CONNECTION FOR Series

300is/310is/320is

- 288 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

11.1 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

11.1.1 LCD-Mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is Control Unit

300is/310is/320is
control unit

24V-IN(CPD16A)
SPDL (JA41)
I/O LINK(JD51A) The functions and connection methods of these connectors are
HDI(JA40) the same as those in the Series 30i. See Chapters 1 to 12 for
MDI(CA55) explanations about the connection
th d
FSSB(COP10A-1)
FSSB(COP10A-2)

R232-1/S.SPDL(JD56A)
{ RS-232-C I/O device

Serial spindle

{
RS-232-C I/O device
PC
R232-2/USB(JD54)
USB printer
USB keyboard

Ethernet(CD38S) HUB Ethernet backbone

bl

BACKUP POWER-IN Backup unit

(CA75)

BUZZER for T.P. Buzzer

(CA76)

- 289 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

11.1.2 Display Unit for is Series CNC (Stand-Alone Type)

CNC control unit

Main board
HSSB(COP21A)

MDI unit

(CK27)

Display unit for is series CNC

+24VDC power supply

MDI(CA55)

HSSB(COP21M)

24V-IN(CDP18)

{
RS-232-C I/O device
PC
R232-2/USB(JD54) USB keyboard
USB printer

R232-1(JD36) RS-232-C I/O device

Ethernet backbone cable

Ethernet(CD38S) HUB

BACKUP POWER-IN Backup unit

(CA75)

BUZZER for T.P. Buzzer

(CA76)

The connections method other than those explained above are the
same as those in the Series 30i/31i/32i. See Chapters 1 to 10 for
explanations about the connection

- 290 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

11.2 INSTALLATION

11.2.1 Connector Names and Connector Layout

11.2.1.1 LCD-mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is

Battery Fan unit

Rear view

CA76

JD56A JA40 JA41 Fuse

Soft key
CA55
Power supply
module

Inverter connector JD54 JD51A CA75 CP16A CD38S

for 12.1"/15" LCD

COP10A-1 COP10A-2

Connector No. Function Reference item

CPD16A Connector for power supply 11.3.1
JA41 Connector for serial spindle 6.1
JD51A Connector for I/O Link 8.2
JA40 Connector for analog spindle or high-speed skip 5.4
JD56A Connector for I/O device interface or serial spindle 11.3.4.1，6.1
CA55 Connector for MDI 5.1
COP10A-1/2 Connector for servo unit (1 : left side, 2 : right side)
CA75 Connector for backup unit 11.3.2
JD54 Connector for I/O device interface or USB device connection 11.3.4.2 , 11.3.4.3
CD38S Connector for Ethernet 11.3.3
CA76 Connector for buzzer 11.3.6

- 291 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

11.2.1.2 Display Unit for is Series

Fan unit
CA76

Rear view

CD38S COP21M CA75

Power supply
module

CA55
JD54 JD36 CPD18

Connector No. Function Reference item

CPD18 Connector for power supply 11.3.1
COP21M Connector for HSSB 11.3.5
CA55 Connector for MDI 5.1.3
CA75 Connector for backup unit 11.3.2
JD54 Connector for I/O device interface or USB device connection 11.3.4.2 , 11.3.4.3
CD38S Connector for Ethernet 11.3.3
JD36 Connector for I/O device interface 11.3.4.1
CA76 Connector for buzzer 11.3.6

- 292 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

11.2.2 Environmental Conditions for Control Units

The control units and peripheral units offered by FANUC are designed
on the assumption that they will be enclosed in a tightly closed cabinet.
The cabinet can be:
• One that is created by the machine tool builder to house a control
unit or peripheral unit,
• Operator's pendant box created by the machine tool builder to
house a control unit or operator's panel, or
• The like
The following table lists the environmental conditions for control
units housed in a cabinet listed above.

Condition Series 300is/310is/320is-MODEL A

Operating 0°C to 58°C
Ambient
Storage, Transport -20°C to 60°C
temperature
Temperature
for display unit 0.3°C/minute or less
change
Normal 10% to 75%RH, no condensation
Humidity Short period (less
10% to 90%RH, no condensation
than 1 month)
0.5G or less
The evaluation test is performed
under the following conditions.
Operating
Vibration 10 to 58Hz
58 to 500Hz
The test conforms to IEC68-2-6.
Non-operating 1.0G or less
Meters above Operating Up to 1000m
sea level Non-operating Up to 12000m
Normal machine shop environment
(The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in
Environment
a location where the density of dust, coolant, organic
solvent, and/or corrosive gas is relatively high.)

- 293 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

11.2.3 Power Supply Capacity

Using the 300is/310is/320is requires a 24 VDC ±10% power input

that satisfies the requirements listed below. The tolerance ±10%
includes instantaneous changes and ripples.

Power
Heat
supply
output (W)
capacity (A)
10.4”LCD 3.3 44
LCD-mounted type 12.1”LCD 3.5 48
15”LCD 4.0 60
10.4”LCD 2.7 29
Display unit for is series 12.1”LCD 2.8 32
15”LCD 3.3 44

*1: When the power is turned on, 1.5 A is consumed for one minute
or so to charge the backup unit. The power requirements listed
above include this current.
*2: The current used in the LCD and MDI unit is included. No
current for each option board is included. See Section 3.2,
"Power Supply Capacity," for information about the power
requirements of option boards.
*3: If power is supplied to a FANUC device, such as Handy File,
from the RS-232-C port, 1 A is needed additionally.

- 294 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

11.3 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

11.3.1 Main Power Input

LCD-mounted type and

Display unit for is series

CPD16A (LCD-mounted type)

CPD18 (Display unit for is
series)
+24VDC input

1 +24V

2 0V AMP
3 Housing Contact
LCD-mounted type 1-178288-3 1-175218-5
Display unit for is series 2-178288-3 1-175218-5
CNC

Separate housings are used for the LCD-mounted Type and the display
unit for the is series CNC.

i) Cable connection

CP1
1
+24V +24V
2
0V 0V

NOTE
1 Keep the power supply cable away from other
cables connected to the LCD-mounted type or
display unit for is series CNC.
2 Turn on/off the power to the display unit for is
series CNC within ±100 ms after the power to the
stand-alone type control unit is turned on/off.

WARNING
It is impossible to turn on and off the power to the
display unit for is series CNC and the power to the
CNC control unit separately.

- 295 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

11.3.2 Backup Unit

After the power to the CNC is turned off, the backup unit enables
power to be supplied to the internal circuits of the CNC for a certain
period of time to execute a power turn-off sequence (for allowing
important data to be automatically saved from main memory to a
compact flash card). Unless there is a backup unit, no power turn-off
sequence will be executed.

- 296 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

(i) Cable connection

- 297 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

(ii) External dimensions of Backup unit

NOTE
The above shows an outline drawing of the
separate type backup unit (A02B-0303-C161).
For an outline drawing when the backup unit is
mounted on the MDI unit, see Appendix A.

- 298 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

(iii) Mounting backup unit

Install the backup unit on the rear of the MDI unit or in the
pendant box where the CNC main unit is housed.
Because the backup unit contains parts with limited service life,
it should be installed in a place where parts can be replaced
easily during maintenance work.

Example of mounting the backup unit on the rear of the MDI unit

Connector (CA75)

CO
Note2

Clamp

Connector

Backup unit

NOTE
1 The connector of the backup unit cable is of an
easy lock type. Clamp the cable near the
connector so that the connector will not be pulled
with the weight of the cable.
2 Connect the shielding terminal of the backup unit to
a grounded cabinet or the grounding stud on the
LCD-mounted type or the display unit for the is
series CNC mounted on a grounded cabinet.

- 299 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

11.3.3 Ethernet Interface (10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX)

NOTE
Before attaching or removing cables, power off the
CNC main unit, and confirm that the power is off.
Ask the respective manufacturers for explanations
about how to build a network and about conditions
for using units (such as a media converter, hub,
transceiver, and cable) other than the CNC unit.
When installing network cables, exercise sufficient
caution so that the network will not be affected by
any noise source. Electrically separate the
network wiring sufficiently from noise sources like
motors and their power lines. Also, ground each
unit as required. If the grounding impedance is
high, it may cause trouble in communication.
Once the equipment is installed, conduct
communication tests to verify normal operation
before starting actual use of the equipment.
FANUC is not liable to any damage related to
trouble arising from any unit other than the CNC
unit.

(1) Connection to the Ethernet Interface

The 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX interfaces are available. A
hub (line concentrator) is used to connect the CNC unit to a
system. A typical connection example is shown below.

LCD-mounted type unit

or display unit for is Twisted-pair cable
series CNC

Max. 100m

HUB
(line concentrator)

Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a

network are not dust-proof. Using them in an atmosphere with
dust or oil mist may lead to a communication error or failure.
They should be enclosed in a dust-proof cabinet.

- 300 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

(2) Leading in Ethernet cables

An Ethernet cable should be fixed with a clamp or the like so that
pulling it will not cause tension to be applied to the connector
(RJ-45) at the end of the cable. The clamp not only fixes the
cable but also grounds the shield of the cable.

LCD-mounted type or display

unit for is series CNC

Ethernet cable

Clamp

Ground plate

(3) Pin arrangement of the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector

(CD38S)

CD38S
Pin No. Signal name Description
1 TX+ Transmit +
2 TX- Transmit -
3 RX+ Receive +
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 RX- Receive -
7 Not used
8 Not used

- 301 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

(4) Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable

(a) Cable connection
The connectors of a cable for connecting between the
10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX interface (CD38S) and the hub
have the pin arrangement shown below.

NOTE
The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the
FANUC- recommended cable for movable
sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable
longer than necessary.

- 302 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

(b) Cable Wires

Many cables without a shield (UTP cables) are
commercially available as twisted pair cables conforming to
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX. To improve noise immunity
in factory automation environments, however, be sure to use
twisted pair cables (STP cables) with a common shield in
category 5.

Recommended cables (for fixed parts)

Manufacturer Specification Remark
Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. DTS5087C-4P Twisted wires
Nissei Electric Co., Ltd. F-4PFWMF Single-wire cable

NOTE
These recommended cables for fixed parts must
not be used for movable sections. Be sure to use
the following recommended cables for movable
sections.

Recommended cable (for movable sections)

Manufacturer Specification Remark
Oki Electric Cable AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) Dedicated to FANUC
products

Cable specification (FANUC original product, with no connector)

Drawing number: A66L-0001-0453
Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.

Specification
• Electrical characteristic:
Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3
and 5
The length of the cable to the hub must be kept
within 50 m because of its attenuation
performance.
• Structure : Common-shield braided cable with drain wire
The conductors of the cable are AWG26
annealed-copper strand wire, with a sheath 0.8
mm thick and an outer diameter of 6.7±0.3 mm
• Fire resistance : UL1581 VW-1
• Oil resistance : As per FANUC's internal standard (Equivalent
to conventional oil-resistant electrical cable)
• Flex resistance : Million or more bending cycles with a bending
radius of 50 mm (U-shaped bend test)
• UL style No. : AWM20276 (80°C/30V/VW-1)

NOTE
Use the TM21CP-88P(03) connector made by
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. to this cable.

About cable assemblies

- 303 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. can offer a cable assembly that uses
the TM21CP-88P(03) connector made by Hirose Electric Co.,
Ltd. To get this cable assembly, negotiate directly with the
manufacturer on its specifications (cable length, shipping test,
package, etc.).

(c) Connector specification

An 8-pin modular connector called the RJ-45 is used with a
twisted-pair cable for Ethernet interfaces. Use the
connector listed below or equivalent.
Specification Manufacturer Remark
Connector used with cable AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) TM21CP-88P(03) Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. (*)

NOTE
About TM21CP-88P(03)
Connector (manufacturer's standard product)
Drawing number: A63L-0001-0823#P
Manufacturer: Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Manufacturer's model number: TM21CP-88P(03)
Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5
Ask Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. for explanations about
how to attach the connector to a cable.
(Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. offers the
TM21CP-88P(03) Wiring Procedure
Specification (Engineering Specification No.
ATAD-E2367) to explain the related technical
information.)

(5) Anti-Noise Measure

(i) Separating signal lines
Ethernet cable wires belong to group C. See descriptions
elsewhere for explanations about how to separate them from
wires in group A or B.
(ii) Cable Clamp and Shield Processing
If a cable connected to the CNC requires shielding, clamp
the cable as shown below. The clamp both supports and
shields the cable. Use this clamp to ensure stable
operation of the system.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push
and clamp by the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part.
The ground plate must be made by the machine tool builder,
and set as follows :

- 304 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

Cable
Ground plate
Cable clamp

Shield

Cable shield

NOTE
Select a cable with a proper length.
If the cable is too long, the noise immunity may be
reduced or noise may be caused on other cables.
In addition, when the excess length is coiled, the
inductance is increased and a high voltage is
induced during turning on or off of signals. This
may cause malfunction due to a failure or noise.

Prepare ground plate like the following figure.

Mount screw hole

Ground terminal
(grounded)

Hole for securing metal fitting clamp

For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which

surface is plated with nickel.

8mm Ground plate

12mm

20mm

- 305 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.

Max. 55mm

28mm

6mm

17mm

Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp

A02B-0083-K301 (20 pieces)

(iii) Network Installation

Even when the machine satisfies its grounding requirements,
noise from the machine may get on communication lines
depending on the way the machine is installed and its
environment, resulting in a communication error.
Separating and isolating the Ethernet backbone cable and
PC from the machine can prevent noise from getting on the
communication lines.
An example of connection is shown below.

[Large-scale network]

PC

(Note1)
Power supply for the HUB
HUB
PC and backbone cable side

Electrical separation by connection STP cable STP cable

with 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Machine system
Machine Machine Machine

(Note1) (Note1) (Note1)

- 306 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

[Small-scale network]

PC

Power supply for the HUB

HUB
(Note1)

PC and backbone cable side

Electrical separation by connection

with 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX STP cable

Machine system side

Machine

(Note1)

NOTE
1 Ground the PC and backbone cable separately from
the machine system.
If this is impossible because there is only one
grounding point, use separate grounding wires for
the PC/backbone cable and the machine system up
to the grounding point.
The grounding resistance must not be higher than
100 Ω (class 3 grounding).
The grounding wire must not be thinner than the AC
power line conductor, and its cross-sectional area
must not smaller than 5.5 mm2.
2 In some cases, the aforementioned
isolation/separation method based on 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cannot assure normal communication
because of influence by noise. In such worst
environments, use optical fiber media to completely
isolate the machine from the PC.

- 307 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

11.3.4 Serial Port and USB Port

A connector (JD54) of the LCD-mounted type and the display unit for
is series CNCs functions as a serial port and USB port.
A connector (JD56A) of the LCD-mounted type functions as a serial
port and is used for serial spindles.
A connector (JD36) of the display unit for is series CNCs functions as
a serial port.

11.3.4.1 Serial port 1

LCD-mounted type (JD56A) or Relay connector (example 1) Relay connector (example 2)
display unit for is series CNC (JD36) D-SUB 25 D-SUB 9
1 FG 1 CD
14 6 DR
PCR-E20MD 2 SD 2 RD
15 7 RS
RD SD 3 RD 3 SD
1 11 16 8 CS
0V 0V 4 RS 4 ER
2 12 17 9 RI
DR ER 5 CS 5 SG
3 13 18
0V 0V 6 DR
4 14 19
7 SG
5 CS 15 RS Shield 20 ER
0V 0V 8 CD
6 16 21
CD 9
7 17 (*) 22 RI
0V 10
8 18 (+5V)(*) 23
11
9 (*) 19 +24V 24
12
10 +24V 20 (+5V)(*) 25 +24V
13

NOTE
1 The +24V signal is used as the power supply to
FANUC's RS-232C device.
2 Pins with no signal name must be left open.
3 The +5V pins with pin Nos. 18 and 20 must be left
open.
4 The (*) marked pins of JD56A are used for serial
spindles.

- 308 -
 B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

(i) Connection example (Example 1: Conversion to D-SUB 25-pin

connector)
Relay connector
JD56A,JD36 D-SUB 25 (example 1)
Recommended wire specification:

SD 11 02 SD A66L-0001-0284#10P
0V 12 (#28AWG × 10-pair)
RD 01 03 RD
0V 02
Recommended connector for cable and housing (JD56A or JD36 side) :
RS 15 04 RS
Connector Housing Manufacture
0V 16
PCR-E20FA PCR-V20LA Honda Tsushin Kogyo
CS 05 05 CS
FI30-20S FI-20-CV2 Hirose Electric
0V 06 FI-20-CV7
DR 03 06 DR FCN-247J020-G/E FCN-240C020-Y/S Fujitsu
0V 04 52622-2011 52624-2015 Molex Japan
ER 13 20 ER
0V 14 Recommended cable specification (name: Punch panel)
CD 07 08 CD
For JD36, JD56A, JD54
0V 08
22 RI Narrow type

+24V 10 07 SG A02B-0236-C191 (1m)

+24V 19 25 +24V
A02B-0236-C192 (2m)
01 FG
Shield A02B-0236-C193 (5m)
Ground plate GND
(ii) Connection example (Example 2: Conversion to D-SUB 9-pin
connector)
Relay connector
JD56A, JD36 D-SUB 9 (example 2)

SD 11 3 SD

0V 12
RD 01 2 RD

0V 02
RS 15 7 RS

0V 16
CS 05 8 CS

0V 06
DR 03 6 DR

0V 04
ER 13 4 ER

0V 14
CD 07 1 CD

0V 08
9 RI

+24V 10 5 SG
Shield
+24V 19
Ground plate

- 309 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

(iii) Connection example (Example 3: Connection with a PC for

remote debugging)
Relay connector
D-SUB 9 (example 3)
JD56A,JD36

SD 11 3 SD
0V 12
RD 01 2 RD
0V 02
RS 15 7 RS
0V 16
CS 05 8 CS
0V 06
DR 03 6 DR
0V 04
ER 13 4 ER
0V 14
CD 07 1 CD
9 RI
+24V 10 Shield 5 SG
+24V 19 Ground plate

NOTE
For connection with a PC, create a cable according
to the connector pin arrangement on the PC side.

- 310 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

11.3.4.2 Serial port 2

LCD-mounted type or Relay connector (example 1) Relay connector (example 2)
display unit for is series CNC D-SUB 25 D-SUB 9
1 FG 1 CD
JD54 14 6 DR
PCR-E20MD 2 SD 2 RD
15 7 RS
RD SD 3 RD 3 SD
1 11 16 8 CS
0V 0V 4 RS 4 ER
2 12 17 9 RI
DR ER 5 CS 5 SG
3 13 18
0V 0V 6 DR
4 14 19
7 SG
5 CS 15 RS Shield 20 ER
8 CD
6 Reserve 16 Reserve 21
CD 9
7 17 Reserve 22 RI
10
8 Reserve 18 Reserve 23
11
9 Reserve 19 +24V 24
12
10 +24V 20 Reserve 25 +24V
13

NOTE
1 The +24V signal is used as the power supply to
FANUC's RS-232C device.
2 This connector is used also as a USB port. The
Reserve pins must be left open.

(i) Connection example (Example 1: Conversion to D-SUB 25-pin

connector)
Recommended wire specification:
Relay connector
A66L-0001-0284#10P
JD54 D-SUB 25 (Example 1)
(#28AWG × 10 pairs)
Recommended connector and housing (JD54 side):
SD 11 02 SD Connector Housing Manufacturer
0V 12
PCR-E20FA PCR-V20LA Honda
Tsushin
RD 01 03 RD
Kogyo
0V 02 FI30-20S FI-20-CV2 Hirose
RS 15 04 RS FI-20-CV7 Electric
FCN-247J020-G/E FCN-240C020-Y/S Fujitsu
CS 05 05 CS
52622-2011 52624-2015 Molex Japan
DR 03 06 DR
04 Recommended cable specification (name: Punch panel)
0V For JD36A, JD56A, JD54
ER 13 20 ER
Narrow type
0V 14 A02B-0236-C191 (1m)
CD 07 08 CD A02B-0236-C192 (2m)
22 RI A02B-0236-C193 (5m)

+24V 10 07 SG

+24V 19 25 +24V
01 FG
Shield
Ground GND
plate

- 311 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

(ii) Connection example (Example 2: Conversion to D-SUB 9-pin

connector)
Relay connector
D-SUB 9 (Example 2)
JD54

SD 11 3 SD
0V 12
RD 01 2 RD
0V 02
RS 15 7 RS
CS 05 8 CS
DR 03 6 DR
0V 04
ER 13 4 ER
0V 14
CD 07 1 CD
9 RI
+24V 10 5 SG
+24V 19
Shield
Ground plate
(iii) Connection example (Example 3: Connection to a PC for
remote debugging)
Relay connector
D-SUB 9 (Example 3)
JD54

SD 11 3 SD
0V 12
RD 01 2 RD
0V 02
RS 15 7 RS
CS 05 8 CS
DR 03 6 DR
0V 04
ER 13 4 ER
0V 14
CD 07 1 CD
9 RI
+24V 10 5 SG
+24V 19
Shield
Ground plate

NOTE
When connecting this connector to a PC, check the connector pin layout on the PC
side, then create a cable accordingly.

- 312 -
 B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

11.3.4.3 USB port (rear side)

This port is used to connect a USB keyboard or USB printer.
LCD-mounted type or display unit for is Relay connector
series CNC USB
JD54 1 5V
PCR-E20MD 2 D-
1 Reserve 11 Reserve 3 D+
2 Reserve 12 4 0V
USB_0V
3 Reserve 13 Reserve
4 Reserve 14 Reserve
5 Reserve 15 Reserve
6 USB_+ 16 Reserve
7 Reserve 17 Reserve
8 USB_- 18 Reserve
9 Reserve 19 Reserve
10 Reserve 20 USB_5V

NOTE
This connector is used also as a serial port. The
Reserve pins must be left open.

(i) Connection example (conversion to a USB connector (type A,

receptacle])

Recommended cable specification:

Use a USB complient cable.
JD54 USB connector Recommended connector and housing (JD54 side):
Connector Housing Manufacturer
06 03 D+ PCR-E20FA PCR-V20LA Honda
USB_+
08 02 D- Tsushin
USB_- Kogyo
12 04 0V
USB_0V FI30-20S FI-20-CV2 Hirose
20 01 5V FI-20-CV7 Electric
USB_5V FCN-247J020-G/E FCN-240C020-Y/S Fujitsu
Shield
52622-2011 52624-2015 Molex Japan

NOTE
1 Commercially available USB devices are prone to compatibility problems with USB
hosts to some degree. It is not guaranteed that every commercially available USB
device can operate properly with USB hosts. Machine tool builders are requested
to check the operability of the USB devices they select. Keep in mind that
commercially available USB devices are generally neither dust-proof nor
moisture-resistant.
2 Generally, USB devices can be connected with the power kept on (hot plugging).
With this connector (JD54), however, hot plugging cannot be performed. By using
a USB connector (type A, receptacle) as a relay connector, hot plugging becomes
possible in the outer range from the USB relay connector.
3 The maximum USB power supply (USB_5V) current on the front and rear sides is
500 mA in total.

- 313 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

11.3.4.4 USB port (front side)

This port is used to connect a USB keyboard or USB printer.

USB port (front view)

NOTE
1 Commercially available USB devices are prone to
compatibility problems with USB hosts to some
degree. It is not guaranteed that every
commercially available USB device can operate
properly with USB hosts. Machine tool builders
are requested to check the operability of the USB
devices they select. Keep in mind that
commercially available USB devices are generally
neither dust-proof nor moisture-resistant.
2 The USB port on the front side allows a device to
be connected to the port with the power kept on
(hot plugging).
3 The maximum USB power supply (USB_5V)
current on the front and rear sides is 500 mA in
total.

- 314 -
B-63943EN/02 11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

11.3.5 High-speed Serial Bus (HSSB) [For Stand-alone Type]

Main board of stand-alone type CNC Display unit for is series CNC

Optical fiber cable

COP21A COP21M

1) Recommended cable (optical fiber cable)

A66L-6001-0026#L1R003 : Cable length=1m
A66L-6001-0026#L3R003 : Cable length=3m
A66L-6001-0026#L5R003 : Cable length=5m
A66L-6001-0026#L7R003 : Cable length=7m
A66L-6001-0026#L10R03 : Cable length=10m
A66L-6001-0026#L15R03 : Cable length=15m
A66L-6001-0026#L20R03 : Cable length=20m
A66L-6001-0026#L30R03 : Cable length=30m
A66L-6001-0026#L50R03 : Cable length=50m
A66L-6001-0026#L100R3 : Cable length=100m
2) Recommended cables (low-loss optical fiber cables specially
designed as relay cables)
A66L-6001-0029#L1R003 : Cable length=1m
A66L-6001-0029#L3R003 : Cable length=3m
A66L-6001-0029#L5R003 : Cable length=5m
A66L-6001-0029#L7R003 : Cable length=7m
A66L-6001-0029#L10R03 : Cable length=10m
A66L-6001-0029#L15R03 : Cable length=15m
A66L-6001-0029#L20R03 : Cable length=20m
A66L-6001-0029#L30R03 : Cable length=30m
A66L-6001-0029#L40R03 : Cable length=40m
A66L-6001-0029#L50R03 : Cable length=50m
3) Low-loss optical relay adapter
A63L-0020-0004
WARNING
Cables and adapters other than the recommended
ones cannot be used.
Optical fiber cables cannot be cut and connected
by the machine tool builder. When relay is
required, be sure to use one of the low-loss optical
fiber cables specially designed as relay cables and
the low-loss optical adapter.
For handling of optical fiber cables, see Appendix
D, "OPTICAL FIBER CABLES".

NOTE
Relay is possible only at one point.

- 315 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is B-63943EN/02

11.3.6 Buzzer Output

The Series 300is/310is/320is has a buzzer output connector (CA76)
for touch panel confirmation so that an externally connected buzzer
can be driven to sound as the touch panel is touched.

- Specifications of a connectable buzzer

Operating voltage Operating current
Specification 5V 20 mA max

- Connector (CA76)
Connector used
Molex Japan 5045-02A
(device side)
Mating connector Molex Japan 5051-02 (housing)
(cable side) Molex Japan 5159PBTL (terminal)

- Buzzer output circuit (equivalent circuit)

+5V

CA76
Resistor
01 + Buzzer
(connected
externally)
02 -

Buzzer ON
signal (internal
CNC signal)

0V

CAUTION
Never short-circuit the connector pins.
Be careful not to apply noise to the connection
cable of the buzzer.

- 316 -
B-63943EN/02 12.HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)

12 HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)

- 317 -
12.HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B-63943EN/02

12.1 OVERVIEW

The high-speed serial bus (HSSB) enables the high-speed transfer of

large amounts of data between a commercially available IBM PC or
compatible personal computer and a CNC, by connecting them via a
high-speed optical fiber.
For an LCD-mounted type CNC, an HSSB interface board is inserted
in the optional slot of the CNC.
For a stand-alone type CNC, the HSSB interface is provided as a
standard feature.
On the personal computer, an appropriate interface board is installed.
You can use the FANUC PANEL i instead of a commercial PC. The
FANUC PANEL i comes standard with the HSSB interface.

12.2 CAUTIONS

The use of the HSSB requires an IBM PC/AT compatible computer or

FANUC intelligent terminal. The machine tool builder or end user is
required to procure and maintain the personal computer.

To enable the use of the HSSB, Windows 2000 and Windows XP

must have been installed on the personal computer.

FANUC owns the copyright for the HSSB device driver.

The software mentioned above and the contents of the related manuals
may not be used or reproduced in part or whole without the prior
written permission of FANUC.

NOTE
1 IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corp. of the
US.
2 Windows 2000 and Windows XP are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corp. of the US.
3 The company and product names mentioned in this
manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of
the respective companies.

- 318 -
B-63943EN/02 12.HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)

12.3 CONNECTION DIAGRAM

HSSB interface board for 30i

Personal computer interface

board (for PCI)
COP21A

Option slot
COP21M

LCD-mounted type 30i/300i (rear)

Personal computer

COP21
(on a main board)

COP21M
Stand-alone type 30i/300i

PANEL i Note: Only an interface board for the PCI bus is provided as the interface board to be installed in the
personal computer.

- 319 -
12.HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B-63943EN/02

12.4 PERSONAL COMPUTER SPECIFICATION

CAUTION
1 The machine tool builder or end user is required to
procure and maintain the personal computer.
2 FANUC is not liable for any problems resulting
from the operation of users' personal computers,
regardless of whether the operations are normal or
abnormal.

(1) The personal computer must have a PCI slot (5 V).

(2) When this board is used, an HSSB driver must be installed in the
personal computer. The HSSB driver supporting the 30i/300i is
stored on the FOCAS2 library disk (ordering information:
A02B-0207-K737).
(3) Please examine the connection test including the communication
between the personal computer and CNC controller sufficiently.
(4) Following shows the required power of the interface board for
PCI type.

Power supply
Drawing No. Specification Remarks
requirements
2ch +5V 1.5A, +12V
A20B-8101-0160 Not newly available
specification 20mA
1ch +5V 1A, +12V
A20B-8101-0161 Not newly available
specification 20mA
2ch
A20B-8101-0162 +5V 1.5A Available
specification
1ch
A20B-8101-0163 +5V 1A Available
specification

12.5 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

(1) HSSB Interface Board For Personal Computer

Ambient Operating 0 to 55°C
temperature Non-operating -20 to 60°C
Humidity Usual 10 to 75% (non-condensing)
Short-term (within one 10 to 95% (non-condensing)
month)

If the environmental requirement of the using personal computer

is different from the above, please keep the environmental
requirement to be satisfied by the both equipments.

(2) HSSB Interface Board For CNC

Please strictly keep environmental requirement about each CNC
controller in which the interface boards are installed.

- 320 -
B-63943EN/02 12.HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)

12.6 PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING PERSONAL COMPUTER

INTERFACE BOARDS

WARNING
Before starting to mount or remove a personal
computer interface board, switch off the personal
computer and its peripheral devices, and
disconnect their power supply cables. Otherwise,
there is a serious danger of electric shock.

(1) Remove the covering plate of extension slot on the personal

computer.
(2) Insert the interface board for the personal computer to the PCI
connector tightly.
(3) Screw the plate of interface board to the computer.
(4) Confirm connection (in only case of HSSB multi-connection)
Confirm following items for installing drivers of HSSB interface
board in case of HSSB multi-connection.
- PCI slot number which HSSB board is mounted (slot
number is marked to PCB normally).
- Correspondence between HSSB channel and CNC
(5) Restore the covering plate.

CAUTION
Do not touch the leads running to the card edge of
the interface board (that match with connectors).

12.7 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

(1) Personal computer interface board

(a) Electrostatic interference
The personal computer interface board is shipped in an
anti-static bag. To store or transport the interface board,
always place it in the anti-static bag. Before removing the
interface board from the anti-static bag, ground your body.
(b) Protection of card edge terminals
When handling the personal computer interface board, do
NOT touch its card edge terminals (the gold-plated contacts
which engage with a mating connector). If you
accidentally touch any card edge terminal, wipe it gently
with clean or ethyl alcohol-dipped tissue paper or absorbent
cotton. Do not use any organic solvent other than ethyl
alcohol.
(2) Optical connector and fiber cable
See Appendix D.

- 321 -
12.HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B-63943EN/02

12.8 RECOMMENDED CABLES

CNC interface card Personal computer interface card

Optical fiber cable

COP21(A) COP21M

Compatible cables (optical fiber cables, for external lines)

A66L-6001-0026#L
See descriptions about standard cable lengths in Appendix D for
explanations about how to specify the length of the underscored
portion and the related cautions.
The maximum cable length is 50 m.

- 322 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

13 PANEL i

- 323 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.1 OVERVIEW

The PANEL i is on an IBM PC compatible panel computer.

Connecting the PANEL i to an i series CNC system via a high-speed
optical fiber (high-speed serial bus) provides the system with personal
computer functions.

13.2 CAUTIONS

• The copyright of WindowsXP, Windows2000 and other

software provided with the PANEL i is owned by Microsoft
Corporation (USA), Intel Inc., Phoenix Technologies Ltd., and
FANUC LTD.
• No part of the software described above, or its manuals, may be
used or reproduced without permission.
• No part of the software described above, or its manuals, may be
sold independently of the PANEL i.
• The software described above, and its manual, must be used
under the conditions described in the attached license agreement.
• The use of the CNC incorporating the PANEL i shall imply that
the user agrees to the conditions of the license agreement
described above.
* WindowsXP and Windows2000 is a registered trademark of
Microsoft corporation, USA
* Company name and product name mentions in this manual are
(registered) trademark of each company.

CAUTION
1 If an operation error or mishap occurs, the data on
the hard disk may be lost, even if all the installation
conditions are satisfied. Therefore, always
maintain a backup copy of the data on the hard
disk in case the stored data is lost or damaged.
Especially, the power-off on accessing the hard
disk must not be done because that possibility is
very high. Please concern for the end-users.
2 Be sure to finish the OS and the applications
through the proper operation of shutdown before
turning the power off.
Without the above-mentioned operation, there is
no assurance of the following action. At worst,
the command of initializing the HDD will not work.

- 324 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

13.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

: Optical link Module & Cable

: AMP(Dynamic)
: AMP(mini-DIN6pins)
CNC control unit
: HONDA TSUSHIN (PCR 20pins)
Master printed circuit board (300i)
or HSSB option board : HIROSE DENKI (Flat Cable34pins)
HSSB(COP21)
: HIROSE DENKI (Flat Cable40pins)
: AMP(EI Series 4pins)
: molex (5046-NA 3pin)
PANEL i
: Ethernet (RJ-45)
HSSB(COP21)
Power supply (+24VDC)
+24V INPUT (CPD14)

HDD FAN (CPE11C) FAN unit

HDD 1 (CA81A) 3.5" HDD unit
HDD PWR 1 (CPD11B)

HDD 2 (CA81B) CD-ROM drive

Touch panel (option)

HDD PWR 2 (CPD11C)

Floppy disk drive
FDD (CD34)
Color LCD panel

FDD POWER (CPD11A)

Ethernet
ETHERNET (CD38U)
I/O device Power
RS232-1 (JD33) (Caution 2) supply
I/O device Power
RS232-2 (JD46) supply
Printer Power
CENTRO (JD9) supply
USB device Power
USB1 (CD41L)
supply
USB device Power
Front USB2 (CD41M)
(Caution 3) USB supply
KEY BOARD (CD32L) Full keyboard
Front key
board
MOUSE (CD32U) Mouse
PCMCIA cardslot

PCI extension slot 1 PCI extension board

PCMCIA (CA78A)
card Peripheral
PCI extension slot 2 PCI extension board device
(CA78B) (Caution 1)

Peripheral MDI (JA61) MDI unit

device USB3(CD46L)
(Caution 1)
USB device Power
supply

CAUTION
1 Some peripheral devices are not suitable for being connected to the PANEL i for
environmental durability reasons, and others are not suitable for use during
machine operation. So, carefully read the operator's manuals of the peripheral
devices to be used.
2 When a touch panel is provided, the first serial port channel cannot be used.
3 The front USB connector and front keyboard are provided only on the PANEL i for
the automobile manufacturer specification.

- 325 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.4 SPECIFICATIONS

13.4.1 Installation Environmental Conditions

When PANEL i is used, the following environmental conditions (as
measured top of the PANEL i inside the cabinet) must be ensured for
the PANEL i unit installation.
Ambient Operating : +5 to +45°C
temperature Non-operating : - 20 to +60°C
Change in
Up to 20 °C/hour
temperature
Standard : 10 to 75% (non-condensing)
Ambient relative
Short-term (within one month) :
humidity
10 to 90% (non-condensing)
Wet-bulb
29℃ maximum
temperature
Operating : Up to 0.5G
Vibration
Non-operating : Up to 1.0G
Environment Installed in a hermetically sealed cabinet
Operating : -60m to 1000m
Altitude
Non-operating : -60m to 12000m

(*1) Ambient temperature during operation :

If the CPU and HDD are at a temperature beyond the permissible
temperature range at power-on, the following indication appears:

When the CPU temperature is abnormal (75°C or higher)

CPU Temperature = 76°C (The actual temperature is
indicated.)
CPU Temperature Exceeds the Upper Limit – FATAL

When the HDD temperature is abnormal (upper limit: 55°C）

Ambient Temperature Exceeds the Upper Limit – FATAL

When the HDD temperature is abnormal (lower limit: 5°C)

Ambient Temperature Exceeds the Lower Limit – HDD
stopped

(*2) Vibration :
The PANEL i unit and built-in hard disk drive may suffer
resonance at certain frequencies. Careful checking is required on
the PANEL i unit has been mounted on a machine. When a PCI
extension board is used, the permissible vibration level may
become stricter than the value indicated above according to the
specifications of the board.

- 326 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

CAUTION
If an operation error or mishap occurs, the data
on the hard disk may be lost, even if all the
installation conditions are satisfied. Therefore,
always maintain a backup copy of the data on
the hard disk in case the stored data is lost or
damaged.
Especially, the power-off on accessing the hard
disk must not be done because that possibility is
very high. Please concern for the end-users.

Some development or maintenance options may not satisfy the

above specifications.

(*3) Measure for Noise :

Please measure for noise sufficiently referring to Subsec 3.5.4.

(*4) Wet-bulb temperature

The wet-bulb temperature condition is a recommended
specification value.

- 327 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.4.2 Power Supply Specification

Input power
(1) Specification
To use the PANEL i, prepare a power supply that satisfies the
requirements listed below:

Input power supply voltage +24VDC±10%

Current capacity 10 A or more

* When a FANUC device such as the Handy File is connected

to the RS-232C port, the required current is one ampere
higher.

(2) Timing
No power on/off sequence between the PANEL i and the CNC to
which the PANEL i is connected is defined.
When the PANEL i is connected to the CNC via HSSB, the
rotary switch on the HSSB interface board in the CNC
determines whether they are started separately or started together.

Supply power
If an input power supply that satisfies the above specifications is
prepared, the PANEL i can supply power to peripheral devices as
listed below.
Check the amount of current drawn by each unit you want to use.

Voltage Equipment Max. Current

Keyboard, Mouse
PCI extension board
Total
+5V IDE/ATAPI device Max. 2000mA
4000mA
USB device Max. 500mA/port
PCMCIA card Max. 500mA
PCI extension board
+3.3V Total 3000mA
PCMCIA card Max. 1000mA
PCI extension board
+12V Total 2500mA
IDE/ATAPI device
-12V PCI extension board Total 150mA

Power Consumption
About 64 W (12.1” type, 15.0” type)
About 58 W (10.4” type)

Above operating includes the following devices.

- Main unit of the personal computer, HDD Unit, FAN for HDD,
Full Keyboard, and Mouse.
Above operating does not include the following devices.
- PCMCIA Card, PCI Extension board, and Devices to connect by
Serial or Parallel Interface, USB device, and expansion
IDE/ATAPI device

- 328 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

* Above power consumption is reference. If peripherals are

connected or PCI extended boards are mounted, the power
consumption will increase. Also, please consider the cabinet
design and the cooling method which is most suitable to the total
power consumption.

13.4.3 Shutdown
Before switching off the PANEL i, terminate all
applications and the OS according to the normal shutdown procedure.
If the PANEL i is switched off while an application or the OS is still
running, the PANEL i may fail to operate normally next time it is
switched on. In the worst case, data on the hard disk drive may be
destroyed.

- 329 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.5 INSTALLATION SPACE

13.5.1 Installation Space of the Basic Unit

The following three spaces are required around the PANEL i.

A: Space for connecting cables.

B: Space required for drawing the cable from the PCI extension
board when it is used
Length X from the lower edge of the board varies depending on
the extension board and cable used.
C: This space is required for smooth air flow.
PANEL i generates heat as much as indicated in Subsection 8.5.2.
The space indicated by C is required for air circulation, and a
mechanism to exhaust generated heat to the outside of the cabinet
is required.

13.5.1.1 Installation space of the 10.4" LCD type basic unit

125

C 40
C

PCI
extension
board

X
70 70
A
A B
B Unit:mm

CAUTION
1 Space for cable connection is required at the
bottom of the unit.
2 When a vertical type MDI or FA full keyboard is
installed just below the above display unit, it may
become impossible to install the HDD unit on the
rear of the display unit. In such a case, install the
HDD unit in a different place.

- 330 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

13.5.1.2 Installation space of the 12.1" LCD type basic unit

125
0

C C

PCI
extension
board

40 40
A
A B
B Unit:mm

CAUTION
Space for cable connection is required at the
bottom of the unit.

- 331 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.5.1.3 Installation space of the 15.0" LCD type basic unit

125

C C

PCI
extension
board

A A
B
Unit:mm

CAUTION
Space for cable connection is required at the
bottom of the unit.

- 332 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

13.5.2 Installation space of the HDD unit

The HDD unit is mounted on the backside of the MDI or the FA
Full-Keyboard.

Reserve space C in the above figure.

And reserve space for connecting cables of HDD signal, HDD power,
FAN power, and MDI/FA full keyboard signal too.
The HDD unit itself also generates heat. Consider heat removal for
both the HDD unit and basic unit.

13.5.2.1 FA full keyboard and an MDI unit other than QWERTY MDI

HDD unit FA full keyboard or MDI

FAN
61

1.1.1.1C

30 20

For the external dimensions of the unit, see Appendix. Unit:mm

- 333 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.5.2.2 When the QWERTY MDI and 10.4" LCD type basic unit are
used

10.4”LCD type
Basic unit 290

C
160

106

130 220
QWERTY MDI

For the external dimensions of the unit, see Appendix. Unit:mm

13.5.2.3 QWERTY MDI used in cases other than combination (2)

290

160
145

60 205
QWERTY MDI

For the external dimensions of the unit, see Appendix. Unit:mm

- 334 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

13.5.3 Ground Terminal Connection of Units

Ground the basic unit, FA full keyboard, and MDI unit to the ground
plate of the cabinet via each protective ground terminal.

Ground cable with a M4 stud

2
thickness of 2 mm or
more

- 335 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.6 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND CONNECTION

13.6.1 Connector Layout Diagram

Show from the back side CA78B

CA78A Power supply

PC board

Master printed circuit board

PCI back panel
PC board

COP21M
CPD14
CPD11A
CPD11B
CD34 CPD11C
CPE11C
CA81A

CA81B CD41L
CD41M
JD33 JD9 CD32L
CD38U JD46 JA61 JA63 CD32U

Master printed circuit board

Connector number Connector name Function Reference item
CA81A, CA81B HDD1, HDD2 Hard disk drive signal (primary, secondly) → 8.6.8
CD34 FDD Floppy disk drive signal → 8.6.9
CD38U ETHERNET Ethernet → 8.6.11
JD33 232-1 Serial port 1 → 8.6.3
JD46 232-2 Serial port 2 → 8.6.4
JD9 CENTRO Parallel port → 8.6.5
JA61 MDI MDI → 8.6.13
JA63 CRT Video port → 8.6.12
CD32L KEY BOARD Keyboard → 8.6.7
CD32U MOUSE Mouse → 8.6.7
CD41L, CD41M USB1, USB2 USB port (channel 1, channel 2) → 8.6.10

PCI back panel printed circuit board

Connector number Connector name Function Reference item
COP21M HSSB High-speed serial bus (HSSB) → 8.6.6
CA78A, CA78B PCI SLOT1, PCI SLOT12 PCI extension slot → 8.7

Power supply printed circuit board

Connector number Connector name Function Reference item
CPD14 +24V INPUT Main power supply input → 8.6.2
CPD11A FDD PWR Power output for floppy disk drive → 8.6.9

- 336 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

Connector number Connector name Function Reference item

CPD11B HDD PWR 1 Power output for hard disk drive 1 → 8.6.8
CPD11C HDD PWR 2 Power output for hard disk drive 2 → 8.6.8
CPE11C HDD FAN Fan for hard disk → 8.6.8

13.6.2 Main Power Supply Input

PANEL i

CPD14

A1 +24V B1 +24V
A2 0V B2 0V
A3 B3

Tyco Electronics AMP

2-178127-6 (case)
1-175218-5 (contact, not assembled)
or 1-175196-5 (contact, assembled)

Cable connection
A1
+24V ● +24V
A2
0V ● 0V

B1
+24V
B2
0V

Recommended cable conductor

Use a cable thicker than AWG#16.

NOTE
This power supply cable should be routed away
from the signal lines of the PANEL i.

- 337 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.6.3 Serial Port 1

PANEL i (Example) Host computer
JD33
(DBM-25)
(PCR-EV20MDT)

1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
2 0V 12 0V 2 SD
3 DR 13 ER 3 RD
4 0V 14 0V 4 RS
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS
6 (Reserve) 16 (Reserve) 6 DR
7 CD 17 (Reserve) 7 SG
8 (Reserve) 18 (Reserve) 8 CD
9 RI 19 (+24V) 9
10 (+24V) 20 (Reserve) 10
( ) : Used for a FANUC I/O unit
11
12
13
* Leave the pins marked (Reserve) open.

NOTE
1 The interface on the host computer side shown
above is only an example. Design an interface
cable according to the specification of the host
computer with which it is used.
2 The +24 V lines in the interface on the PANEL i
interface connection unit side shown above can be
used only for FANUC I/O units (such as the
FANUC cassette and FANUC Handy File). Do not
use these lines for any other purpose. Also, do
not connect more than one of these units to one
CNC control unit. Otherwise, the +24 V power
supply capacity may be exceeded.

(1) Recommended cable conductor

A66L-0001-0284#10P : 10 pairs of 0.08 mm2 wires

(2) Recommended punch panel

A02B-0236-C191(1m), A02B-0236-C192(2m),
A02B-0236-C193(5m)

- 338 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

CAUTION
CNC punch panels (A02B-0120-C191 to
A02B-0120-C193, etc.) other than the panels
indicated above cannot be used with this interface.
Use of such an incorrect punch panel can lead to a
serious problem, e.g., incapability of starting the
system.

(3) Recommended connector for cable and housing (JD33 side)

Connector Housing Manufacture
PCR-E20FA PCR-V20LA/PCS-E20LA Honda Tsushin
Kogyo
FI30-20S FI-20-CV2/FI-20-CV7 Hirose Electric
FCN-247J020-G/E FCN-240C020-Y/S Fujitsu
52622-2011 52624-2015 Molex Japan

- 339 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.6.4 Serial Port 2

PANEL i (Example) Host computer

JD46
(DBM-25)
(PCR-EV20MDT)

1 RD 11 SD 1 CD
6 DR
2 0V 12 USB1_0V 2 RD
7 RS
3 DR 13 ER 3 SD
8 CS
4 0V 14 USB2_0V 4 ER
9 RI
5 CS 15 RS 5 SG
6 USB1+ 16 USB2+
7 CD 17 USB2-
8 USB1- 18 USB2_5V
9 RI 19 (+24V)
10 (+24V) 20 USB1_5V
( ): Used with FANUC I/O device

* Leave the pins marked (Reserve) open.

(Example) Punch panel for USB port

USB port 1
1 USB1_5V 4
2 USB1- 3
2
3 USB1+ 1
4 USB1_0V

USB port 2
1 USB2_5V 4
3
2 USB2- 2
3 USB2+ 1
4 USB2_0V

- 340 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

NOTE
1 The figure shows a sample host computer interface and USB. Design the cable to
suit the interface of the actual device to be connected.
2 The +24V pins of the interface for PANEL i shown above can be used only with the
FANUC I/O device (such as FANUC Handy file, FANUC CASSETTE). Do not use
these pins for other purposes. Also, do not attempt to simultaneously connect two
or more FANUC I/O devices to one PANEL i.
3 Commercial USB devices cannot be guaranteed its proper work with a personal
computer. Careful checking by the customer will be required. And please be
aware that those devices in the market are not almost considered about waterproof
and dustproof.
4 The signals of USB port 1 and 2 in this connector are connected to USB ports 1
and 2 explained in Subsection 13.6.10. When one of the ports is used, the other
port cannot be used.

(1) Recommended cable specifications

For RS-232C signals : A66L-0001-0284#10P (0.08 mm2, 10
pairs)
For USB ports : Use dedicated cables.

(2) Recommended punch panel

For RS-232C signals : A02B-0236-C191(1m),
A02B-0236-C192(2m), A02B-0236-C193(5m)

CAUTION
CNC punch panels (A02B-0120-C191 to
A02B-0120-C193, etc.) other than the panels
indicated above cannot be used with this interface.
Use of such an incorrect punch panel can lead to a
serious problem, e.g., incapability of starting the
system.

Punch panel for RS232-C, USB, parallel port : A08B-0082-C200

Cable for punch panel (A08B-0082-C200) (RS232-C, USB) :
A08B-0082-K810
Cable for punch panel (A08B-0082-C200) (parallel port) :
A08B-0082-K811
Cable for punch panel (A08B-0082-C200) (keyboard, mouse) :
A08B-0082-K812

(3) Recommended connector for cable and housing (JD46 side)

Connector Housing Manufacture
PCR-E20FA PCR-V20LA/PCS-E20LA Honda Tsushin
Kogyo
FI30-20S FI-20-CV2/FI-20-CV7 Hirose Electric
FCN-247J020-G/E FCN-240C020-Y/S Fujitsu
52622-2011 52624-2015 Molex Japan

- 341 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.6.5 Parallel Port

PANEL i (Example) Printer

JD9
(PCR-EV20MDT)

1 STD0 11 *STB 1 *STB 19 0V

2 STD1 12 0V 2 STD0 20 0V
3 STD2 13 *AFD 3 STD1 21 0V
4 STD3 14 0V 4 STD2 22 0V
5 STD4 15 *INIT 5 STD3 23 0V
6 STD5 16 0V 6 STD4 24 0V
7 STD6 17 *SLIN 7 STD5 25 0V
8 STD7 18 *ACK 8 STD6 26 0V
9 PE 19 *ERROR 9 STD7 27 0V
10 SLCT 20 BUSY 10 *ACK 28 0V
11 BUSY 29 0V
12 PE 30 0V
13 SLCT 31 *INIT
14 *AFD 32 *ERROR
15 33 0V
16 0V 34
17 FG 35
18 36 *SLIN

NOTE
1 The interface on the printer side shown above is
only an example. Design an interface cable
according to the specification of the printer with
which it is used.
2 Commercial printers are prone to compatibility
problems with personal computers to some
degree. It is not guaranteed that a personal
computer can operate with every commercial
printer. Machine tool builders are requested to
check the operability of the printers they select.
Keep in mind that general commercial printers are
neither dust-proof nor moisture-resistant.

(1) Recommended cable conductor

A66L-0001-0284#10P : 10 pairs of 0.08 mm2 wires

- 342 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

(2) Recommended connector for cable and housing (JD9 side)

Connector Housing Manufacture
PCR-E20FA PCR-V20LA/PCS-E20LA Honda Tsushin
Kogyo
FI30-20S FI-20-CV2/FI-20-CV7 Hirose Electric
FCN-247J020-G/E FCN-240C020-Y/S Fujitsu
52622-2011 52624-2015 Molex Japan

- 343 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.6.6 High-speed serial Bus (HSSB)

Stand-alone type main board or
HSSB interface board (CNC side) PANEL i

Optical fiber cable

COP21 COP21M

(1) Recommended cables (optical fiber cables)

A66L-6001-0026#L1R003 : Cable length = 1m
A66L-6001-0026#L3R003 : Cable length = 3 m
A66L-6001-0026#L5R003 : Cable length = 5 m
A66L-6001-0026#L7R003 : Cable length = 7 m
A66L-6001-0026#L10R03 : Cable length = 10 m
A66L-6001-0026#L15R03 : Cable length = 15 m
A66L-6001-0026#L20R03 : Cable length = 20 m
A66L-6001-0026#L30R03 : Cable length = 30 m
A66L-6001-0026#L40R03 : Cable length = 40 m
A66L-6001-0026#L50R03 : Cable length = 50 m

When using an optical cable as a relay cable by using a relay

adapter, select a cable and relay adapter as specified below.

CAUTION
1 The optical fiber cables used for the FANUC I/O
Link, FSSB extensions, and serial spindles cannot
be used.
2 Optical fiber cables cannot be cut and connected
by the tool machine builder. Be sure to use the
cable specified above.

(2) Low-loss optical fiber cables specially designed as relay cables

A66L-6001-0029#L1R003 : Cable length = 1m
A66L-6001-0029#L3R003 : Cable length = 3 m
A66L-6001-0029#L5R003 : Cable length = 5 m
A66L-6001-0029#L7R003 : Cable length = 7 m
A66L-6001-0029#L10R03 : Cable length = 10 m
A66L-6001-0029#L15R03 : Cable length = 15 m
A66L-6001-0029#L20R03 : Cable length = 20 m
A66L-6001-0029#L30R03 : Cable length = 30 m

CAUTION
The total cable length must be 35 m maximum.

(3) Low-loss optical relay adapter

A63L-0020-0004

- 344 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

CAUTION
The relay adapter for FANUC I/O Link cannot be
used.

13.6.7 Keyboard and Mouse

PANEL i Full keyboard (commercial model)

CD32L
(mini DIN6)

6 5 KEYCLK

4 +5V 3 0V KB
2 1 KEYDATA
Alternatively, FA full keyboard

Mouse (commercial model)

6 5 MSCLK MS

4 +5V 3 0V
2 1 MSDATA
Mouse (commercial model)

NOTE
1 Commercial full keyboards are prone to
compatibility problems with personal computers to
some degree. It is not guaranteed that a personal
computer can operate with every commercial full
keyboard. Machine tool builders are requested to
check the operability of the full keyboards they
select. Keep in mind that general commercial full
keyboards are neither dust-proof nor
moisture-resistant.
2 With the PANEL i of the automobile manufacturer
specification, CD32L is connected to the front
panel.

- 345 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

(1) Recommended full keyboard

A86L-0001-0210 : 101 type (commercial model) Only for
application development or maintenance
A86L-0001-0211 : 106 type (commercial model) Only for
application development or maintenance
A02B-0236-C131#JC : FA Full Keyboard (Japanese) for 10.4"
LCD type
A02B-0236-C131#EC : FA Full Keyboard (English) for
10.4" LCD type
A02B-0236-C132#JC : FA Full Keyboard (Japanese) for 12.1"
LCD type
A02B-0236-C132#EC : FA Full Keyboard (English) for
12.1" LCD type
A08B-0082-C150#JC : FA Full Keyboard (Japanese) for 15.0"
LCD type
A08B-0082-C150#EC : FA Full Keyboard (English) for
15.0" LCD type

NOTE
For FA full keyboards, also refer to the following
manual.

Document name Specification number

FA FULL-KEYBOARD FOR FANUC NC
A-73159
BOARD -CONNECTION MANUAL

(2) Recommended mouse

A86L-0001-0212 : Standard PS/2 mouse (commercial model) for
development and maintenance use only

- 346 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

13.6.8 Hard Disk Unit

(1) Cable Connection
Connect HDD signal cable to CA81A.
Connect HDD power cable to CPD11B.
Connect FAN cable to CPE11C.
Connect the above cables.
These cables are factory-connected to the hard disk unit.

(2) Cable Length

HDD power cable : 40cm
HDD signal cable : 30cm
HDD FAN cable : 65cm

PANEL i
master printed circuit board

CPE11C

CPD11B
CA81A

HDD signal cable

HDD power cable

HDD FAN cable

HDD unit

Show from behind

CAUTION
1 Connect the HDD signal cable with extra slack.
2 Use a dedicated HDD unit and cables.
HDD units and cables for other devices cannot be
used.

- 347 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.6.9 Floppy Disk Drive

(1) Recommended floppy disk drive
Drive unit (separate type): A08B-0084-K001
Panel-mounted type: A02B-0207-C009
When a conventional FDD unit is used, a setting on the master
printed circuit board must be changed. (Make TM1 open.)
CD34 (FDD) TM1

CA81A (HDD)

CA81B (HDD2)

(2) Recommended cable

A02B-0207-K801 (FDD power and signal lines: 1m)

(3) Cable connection

Connect FDD signal cable to CD34.
Connect FDD power cable to CPD11A.
Connect these cables.

PANEL i
master printed circuit board

TM1

CD34
CPD11A

FDD signal cable

FDD power cable

Show from behind

FDD unit

- 348 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

(4) Operating environment

When using this unit on the machine, observe the following
cautions:
(a) Dust
Because the PANEL i is not covered with panels, except for
the front door section, it must be enclosed in a sealed
cabinet. While the door is open, dust can enter the floppy
disk unit and cabinet via the disk insertion slot. If the
PANEL i is installed in a dusty environment, more floppy
disk failures than normal may occur.
(b) Temperature
+5°C to +45°C (operating)
The operating temperature range for this unit is stricter than
ordinary units because of the restrictions imposed by the
floppy disk. So, pay special attention to the way it is
cooled.
Avoid blowing air directly from a cooling fan, as dust in the
air may stick to the components of the unit.

(5) Handling precautions

Do NOT switch on the power to PANEL i while a floppy disk is
inserted, and especially when the floppy disk is being accessed
(LED is on). Machine tool builders are requested to provide
this information to their end users.

- 349 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.6.10 USB

PANEL i

USB port 1(rear)

CD41L
1 USB1_5V
2 USB1-
3 USB1+ 12 34
4 USB1_0V

USB port 2 (rear. For automobile

manufacturer specification,
CD41M lower right on front side)
1 USB2_5V
2 USB2-
3 USB2+ 12 34

4 USB2_0V

USB port 3 (left on front side)

JD46
1 USB3_5V
2 USB3-
3 USB3+ 12 34

4 USB3_0V

CAUTION
1 Commercially available USB devices are prone to
compatibility problems with personal computers to
some degree. It is not guaranteed that every
commercially available USB device can operate
properly with personal computers. Machine tool
builders are requested to check the operability of
the USB devices they select. Keep in mind that
commercially available USB devices are generally
neither dust-proof nor moisture-resistant.
2 The signals of USB port 1 and 2 are connected to
the connector explained in Subsection 13.6.4.
When one of the ports is used, the other port
cannot be used.

- 350 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

13.6.11 Ethernet

CAUTION
Before attaching or detaching cables, turn off the
power to the PANEL i, and ensure that the power
is off.
When installing a network, be very careful not to
allow the network to be affected by the influence of
other noise sources.
Some devices required for networking are not
dust-proof. When using such a device, be sure to
install it in a dust-proof cabinet.

PANEL i

CD38U
(RJ-45)

1 TX+
2 TX- 1 2 3 4 56 7 8
3 RX+
4
5
6 RX-
7
8

NOTE
1 For connection, be sure to use category 5 twisted
pair cables with a common shield.
2 Commercially available cables are classified into
cables for straight connection and cables for cross
connection. Select an appropriate type according
to the use.
3 The total cable length is 100 m maximum.

- 351 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.6.12 Video Port

PANEL i (Example) Monitor

JA63
(PCR-EV20MDT) (Dsub 15 pins)

1 RED 11 (PU_1) 6 0V
1 RED 11 (SENCE)
2 0V 12 VS 7 0V
2 GREEN 12 (DDA)
3 GREEN 13 0V 8 0V
3 BLUE 13 HS
4 0V 14 0V 9 (+5V)
4 (PU_1) 14 VS
5 BLUE 15 (+5V) 10 0V
5 0V 15 (DCK)
6 0V 16 0V
7 0V 17 (+5V)
8 (DDA) 18 HS
9 0V 19 (SENCE)
10 (DCK) 20 0V

(1) Specification of the recommended cable conductor

A66L-0001-0371: Coaxial 5 conductors (when the signals in
parentheses in the above figure need not be
connected)

(2) Recommended connector for cable and housing (JA63 side)

Connector Housing Manufacture
FI40B-20S FI-20-CV5/6 （Hirose Electric）

(3) Notes
(a) Use of this port does not require any special setting on the
PANEL i.
(b) When an external monitor is connected to this port directly,
the maximum cable length is 2 m if the above recommended
cable is used.
To extend the cable beyond the maximum cable length, use
a commercially available video extender. (Example:
CAT5 KVM Extender manufactured by BLACK BOX)
In this case, the cable between the PANEL i and video
extender should be as short as possible.
(c) The specifications for selecting a video extender are as
follows:
Interface: Analog RGB
Resolution: XGA (1024 × 768 dots)
Vertical refresh rate: 60Hz
(d) When an external monitor is connected, the video quality
varies significantly depending on the performance and
power supply status of the external monitor, cable quality,
noise environment, and so on. Sufficient checking should
be made in the environment in which the monitor is actually
used.

- 352 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

(5) The power to the external monitor and video extender must
be supplied from other than the PANEL i.
(6) The above figure shows a sample interface on the monitor
side. Design the cable according to the interfaces of the
external monitor and video extender actually connected.
(7) The display on the monitor has the same resolution as that
of the display on the LCD. For the 10.4" LCD type, the
resolution is 640 by 480 dots; for the 15.0" LCD type, the
resolution is 1024 by 768 dots.

- 353 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.6.13 MDI

PANEL i MDI

JA61 CK1 or CK27

(PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR-E20MDK-SL-A)

1 *KEY00 11 *KEY01 1 *KEY00 11 *KEY01

2 *KEY02 12 *KEY03 2 *KEY02 12 *KEY03
3 *KEY04 13 *KEY05 3 *KEY04 13 *KEY05
4 *KEY06 14 *KEY07 4 *KEY06 14 *KEY07
5 *COM00 15 *COM01 5 *COM00 15 *COM01
6 *COM02 16 *COM03 6 *COM02 16 *COM03
7 *COM04 17 *COM05 7 *COM04 17 *COM05
8 *COM06 18 *COM07 8 *COM06 18 *COM07
9 *COM08 19 *COM09 9 *COM08 19 *COM09
10 *COM10 20 *COM11 10 *COM10 20 *COM11

(1) Specification of the recommended cable conductor

A66L-0001-0284#10P : 0.08mm2 × 10 pairs

(2) Recommended connector for cable and housing

Connector Housing Manufacture
PCR-E20FA PCR-V20LA/PCS-E20LA Honda Tsushin
Kogyo
FI30-20S FI-20-CV2/FI-20-CV7 Hirose Electric
FCN-247J020-G/E FCN-240C020-Y/S Fujitsu
52622-2011 52624-2015 Molex Japan

(3) Notes
(a) The MDI unit cannot be used for BIOS setup for the
PANEL i. For BIOS setup, a keyboard connected to a
connector (CD32L) or USB connector is required.
(b) Input from the MDI unit is processed by the CNC via HSSB.
Therefore, to apply input from the MDI unit to the PANEL
i:
- HSSB connection to the CNC must be established.
- On the PANEL i, the operating system must have been
loaded, and the MDI driver must have been operating.

- 354 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

13.6.14 PCMCIA Card

Front of PANEL i

Door

PCMCIA
card slot

Back side

PCMCIA card
(Type I, Type II)

NOTE
1 Only Type I or Type II PCMCIA card is usable. The
following card cannot be used.
- Card-bus card
- Dual mode card (Card-bus mode/PCMCIA
mode) with Card-bus mode
- Type III card
2 Care about the direction of the card, and insert
certainly.

CAUTION
If the door is opened, dust or coolant would enter
and might cause any troubles. Please pay
attention.

- 355 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.6.15 PCI Extension Board

(1) Usable PCI extension board
The PANEL i can contain up to two PCI extension boards having
the following dimensions:
Component height on rear side 3 mm max

Component height on front side

13 mm max
Secured by
screw

106.68 mm max

Unit: mm

176.41 mm max

(2) Installing a PCI extension board

<1> Remove fittings 1 and 2.
<2> Insert the PCI extension board all the way through the slot.
<3> Tighten the screw in portion A.
<4> Align fittings 1 and 2 to the PCI extension board, and
secure them with screw B.

Fittings 1 and 2

(B)

PCI extension board

(A)

- 356 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

(3) Conditions for the installation environment of a PCI extension

board
For the conditions for the installation environment of a PCI
extension board, see the specifications of the PCI extension
board. If the specifications of the PCI extension board are
stricter than the conditions described in Subsection 13.4.1,
"Installation Environmental Conditions", the conditions for the
installation environment of the PANEL i are restricted to the
conditions for the PCI extension board accordingly.

NOTE
FANUC cannot take any responsibility for a
guarantee of operation, troubles during use, and
maintenance when PCI extension boards are used.

- 357 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.7 Punch Panel for PANEL i

13.7.1 Overview
The connector interfaces for personal computer functions such as
serial ports and parallel ports the PANEL i has are located on the rear
side of the PANEL i (the rear of the LCD unit). Once the PANEL i
has been installed in the machine, it is not easy to attach and detach
cables. The punch panel option allows the connector interfaces for
the personal computer functions to be used easily.

13.7.2 Specifications

Name Specifications (ordering number)

Independent type punch panel A08B-0082-C200

FA full keyboard with built-in punch
A08B-0082-C151#EC
panel for 15” LCD (English)
FA full keyboard with built-in punch
Punch A08B-0082-C151#JC
panel for 15” LCD (Japanese)
panel for Connection cable (for serial/USB
PANEL i A08B-0082-K810
interface)
Connection cable (for parallel
A08B-0082-K811
interface)
Connection cable (for
A08B-0082-K812
keyboard/mouse interface)

- 358 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

13.7.3 Configuration
The following figure shows the configurations of the independent type
punch panel and the FA full keyboard with a built-in punch panel:

Independent type punch panel

USB × 2 FA full keyboard with built-in punch
Serial port panel for 15" LCD
Parallel port USB × 2
Keyboard/mouse interface Serial port
Parallel port

13.7.4 Operating Environment

Since the connectors on the rear side of the punch panel are not
covered with sheet metal or the like, the punch panel must be installed
in a sealed cabinet. When operating the machine, close the front
door. The other conditions for the operating environment should be
considered to be within the range specified for the PANEL i.

- 359 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.7.5 Connection to the PANEL i

(1) Connector locations
PANEL i side

Viewed from rear

Master printed circuit board

JD46
Serial port 2 / USB CD32L CD32U
Keyboard Mouse

JD9
Punch panel side Parallel port

JD46

CD43B

CD44

(Note)
FA full keyboards with a built-in punch panel
(A08B-0082-C151/EC,/JC) do not have CD44.

- 360 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

(2) Serial port 2 + USB

(a) Connector diagram
PANEL i side Punch panel side

JD46 (PCR-E20MD) Hirose Electric JD46 (PCR-E20LMDGA)

Connector : FI40B-20S
1 RD 11 SD Housing : FI-20CV5 1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 USB1_0V 2 0V 12 USB1_0V
3 DR 13 ER 3 DR 13 ER
4 0V 14 USB2_0V 4 0V 14 USB2_0V
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS 15 RS
6 USB1+ 16 USB2+ 6 USB1+ 16 USB2+
7 CD 17 USB2- 7 CD 17 USB2-
8 USB1- 18 USB2_5V 8 USB1- 18 USB2_5V
9 RI 19 (+24V) 9 RI 19
10 (+24V) 20 USB1_5V 10 20 USB1_5V

(b) Recommended cable

A08B-0082-K810 (cable length : 80cm)
(c) Recommended cable conductor
A66L-0001-0285#25P : AWG28 (25 pairs)

(3) Parallel port

(a) Connector diagram
PANEL i side Punch panel side

JD9 (PCR-E20MD) Japan Aviation Electronics CD43B (Dsub-25pin female)

Industry
1 STD0 11 *STB Connector : DB-25P 1 *STB 14 *AFD
2 STD1 12 0V Housing : DB-C2-J9-S6 2 STD0 15 *ERROR
3 STD2 13 *AFD 3 STD1 16 *INIT
4 STD3 14 0V 4 STD2 17 *SLIN
5 STD4 15 *INIT 5 STD3 18 0V
6 STD5 16 0V 6 STD4 19 0V
7 STD6 17 *SLIN 7 STD5 20 0V
8 STD7 18 *ACK 8 STD6 21 0V
9 PE 19 *ERROR 9 STD7 22 0V
10 SLCT 20 BUSY 10 *ACK 23 0V
11 BUSY 24 0V
Hirose Electric
Connector : FI40B-20S 12 PE 25 0V
Housing : FI-20CV5 13 SLCT

(b) Recommended cable

A08B-0082-K812 (cable length : 80cm)
(c) Recommended cable conductor
A66L-0001-0285#25P : AWG28 (25 pairs)

- 361 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

(4) Keyboard and mouse (for the independent punch panel only)
(a) Connector diagram
PANEL i side

CD32L (mini DIN6pins)

(Keyboard)
Punch panel side
6 5 KBCLK
4 +5V 3 0V
CD44 （LY20_08P）
2 1 KBDATA
A1 MSDATA B1 KBDATA
A2 +5V B2 0V
CD32U (mini DIN6pins) A3 MSCLK B3 KBCLK
(Mouse)
A4 B4
6 5 MSCLK
4 +5V 3 0V
Japan Aviation
2 1 MSDATA Electronics Industry
mini DIN6pins Connector: LY20-8P

(b) Recommended cable

A08B-0082-K812 (cable length : 80cm)
(c) Recommended cable conductor
AWG28 6 conductors

- 362 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

13.7.6 Connection to Peripheral Devices

(1) Connector locations
Independent type punch panel

USB × 2

Serial port 2

Parallel port

Mouse

Keyboard

15" LCD type FA full keyboard with a built-in punch panel

USB × 2

Serial port 2

Parallel port

(2) USB port

CD41 (USB × 2)
1 5
Commercial USB
2 6 1 USB1_5V 5 USB2_5V device
3 7
4 8 2 USB1－ 6 USB2－
3 USB1＋ 7 USB2＋ Commercial USB
USB1 USB2 device
4 USB1_0V 8 USB2_0V

* With the maximum supply current defined by the USB standard,

which is 500 mA, the voltage at the connector port is 4.81 V
minimum. (25℃)

- 363 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

(3) Serial port 2

CD42 (D-sub9pin Male)
6 DR 1 CD
7 RS 2 RD
Host computer, etc.
8 CS 3 SD
9 RI 4 ER
5 SG

(4) Parallel port

CD43A (D-sub25pin Female)
14 *AFD 1 *STROBE
15 *ERROR 2 Data 0
16 *INIT 3 Data 1
17 *SLCT IN 4 Data 2
18 0V 5 Data 3
19 0V 6 Data 4 Commercial parallel port
20 0V 7 Data 5 device such as printer

21 0V 8 Data 6
22 0V 9 Data 7
23 0V 10 *ACK
24 0V 11 BUSY
25 0V 12 PE
13 SLCT

(5) Keyboard and mouse (for the independent type punch panel for
the PANEL i only)
CD32A (mini DIN6pins) Full keyboard
(Keyboard)
6 5 KBCLK
4 +5V 3 0V
2 1 KBDATA

CD32B (mini DIN6pins) Mouse

(Mouse)
6 5 MSCLK
4 +5V 3 0V
2 1 MSDATA

- 364 -
B-63943EN/02 13.PANEL i

Recommended keyboard
A86L-0001-0210 : 101 type (commercial model) Only for
application development
A86L-0001-0211 : 106 type (commercial model) Only for
application development
Recommended mouse
A86L-0001-0212 : Standard PS/2 mouse (commercial model)
for development and maintenance use only

NOTE
Commercially available external peripheral devices
are prone to compatibility problems with personal
computers to some degree. It is not guaranteed
that every commercially available external
peripheral device can operate properly with
personal computers. Machine tool builders are
requested to check the operability of the external
peripheral devices they select. Keep in mind that
commercially available external peripheral devices
are generally neither dust-proof nor
moisture-resistant.

- 365 -
13.PANEL i B-63943EN/02

13.8 KEY CODES OF SOFT KEYS

The key codes generated when the soft keys of the PANEL i are
pressed are listed below.
For the key codes for the other MDI keyboard part, see MDI key
definition files in the MDI\Common folder on the open CNC driver's
disk (A08B-0084-K790).

VF9

VF8

VF7

VF6

LCD screen VF5

VF4

VF3

VF2

VF1

FL F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 FR

Character code Application

Equivalent key on
Key name SHIFT not 150i/160i/
SHIFT pressed PC full keyboard 300i
pressed 180i/210i
FL 8500 8700 F11
F1 3B00 5400 F1
F2 3C00 5500 F2
F3 3D00 5600 F3
F4 3E00 5700 F4
F5 3F00 5800 F5
F6 4000 5900 F6
F7 4100 5A00 F7
F8 4200 5B00 F8
F9 4300 5C00 F9
F10 4400 5D00 F10
FR 8600 8800 F12
VF1 64FE 64FF F13
VF2 65FE 65FF F14
VF3 66FE 66FF F15
VF4 67FE 67FF F16
VF5 68FE 68FF F17
VF6 69FE 69FF F18
VF7 6AFE 6AFF F19
VF8 6BFE 6BFF F20
VF9 6CFE 6CFF F21

- 366 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

A OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Outline drawings for LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/300is/310is/320is
Unit name Specification drawing Fig.
number
A02B-0303-B500,B502
A02B-0306-B500,B502
7.2” STN monochrome LCD A02B-0307-B500,B502 Fig. U1
A02B-0308-B500,B502
A02B-0303-H124
A02B-0303-B500,B502
A02B-0306-B500,B502
8.4” TFT color LCD A02B-0307-B500,B502 Fig. U2
A02B-0308-B500,B502
Series 30i/31i/32i A02B-0303-H123
control unit A02B-0303-B500,B502
A02B-0306-B500,B502
10.4” TFT color LCD A02B-0307-B500,B502 Fig. U3
A02B-0308-B500,B502
A02B-0303-H120,H128
A02B-0303-B500,B502
A02B-0306-B500,B502
15” TFT color LCD A02B-0307-B500,B502 Fig. U4
A02B-0308-B500,B502
A02B-0303-H220,H222
A02B-0303-B600,B602
A02B-0306-B600,B602
10.4” TFT color LCD A02B-0307-B600,B602 Fig. U3
A02B-0308-B600,B602
A02B-0303-H125,H127
A02B-0303-B600,B602
A02B-0306-B600,B602
Series 300is/310is/320is
12.1” TFT color LCD A02B-0307-B600,B602 Fig. U5
control unit
A02B-0308-B600,B602
A02B-0303-H170,H172
A02B-0303-B600,B602
A02B-0306-B600,B602
15” TFT color LCD A02B-0307-B600,B602 Fig. U4
A02B-0308-B600,B602
A02B-0303-H225,H227

- 369 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Outline drawings for

stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i/300i/310i/320i/300is/310is/320is
Specification drawing
Unit name Fig.
number
A02B-0303-B802
A02B-0306-B802
Series 2 slots Fig. U6
A02B-0307-B802
30i/31i/32i/
A02B-0308-B802
300i/310i/320i/
A02B-0303-B804
300is/310is/320is
A02B-0306-B804
control unit 4 slots Fig. U7
A02B-0307-B804
A02B-0308-B804
Series 30i/31i/32i display unit A02B-0303-C071
Fig. U8
10.4" color LCD A02B-0303-C081
Series 30i/31i/32i display unit A02B-0303-C091
Fig. U9
15" color LCD A02B-0303-C092
PANEL i A13B-0196-B502
Fig. U10
10.4" color LCD A13B-0196-B504
PANEL i A13B-0196-B522
Fig. U11
15" color LCD A13B-0196-B524
A13B-0196-B422, B423 Fig. U12
Automobile manufacturer specification PANEL i
B432, B433 Fig. U12-2
Series 300is/310is/320is display unit A13B-0198-B001
Fig. U13
10.4" color LCD A13B-0198-B002
Series 300is/310is/320is display unit A13B-0198-B011
Fig. U14
12.1" color LCD A13B-0198-B012
Series 300is/310is/320is display unit A13B-0198-B021
Fig. U9
15" color LCD A13B-0198-B022

Other outline drawings

Specification drawing
Unit name Fig.
number
Small MDI unit A02B-0303-C120#T
Fig. U15
(ONG, for 7.2”/8.4”) A02B-0303-C120#M
Standard MDI unit A02B-0303-C121#T
Fig. U16
(ONG, for 7.2”/8.4”) A02B-0303-C121#M
Standard MDI unit A02B-0303-C125#T Fig. U17
(ONG, horizontal placement) A02B-0303-C125#M Fig. U17-2
Standard MDI unit A02B-0303-C126#T Fig. U18
(ONG, vertical placement) A02B-0303-C126#M Fig. U18-2
Standard MDI unit Fig. U19
A02B-0303-C128
(QWERTY) Fig. U19-2
Hard disk unit 1 A08B-0084-H100 Fig. U20(a)
Hard disk unit 2 A08B-0084-H130 Fig. U20(b)
Hard disk unit 3 A08B-0084-H131 Fig. U20(c)
Screw cap A20B-0303-K190, K191 Fig. U22
Manual pulse generator A860-0203-T001 Fig. U23
Pendant type manual pulse generator A860-0203-T012 to T015 Fig. U24
A02B-0303-C205
Separate detector interface unit Fig. U25
A02B-0236-C204
Absolute pulse coder battery case for a separate detector A06B-6050-K060 Fig. U26
CNC battery case for external installation A02B-0236-C281 Fig. U27
Punch panel (for LCD-mounted type) A02B-0236-C191, C192, C193 Fig. U28
Punch panel (for stand-alone type) A02B-0120-C191, C192, C193 Fig. U29

- 370 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Specification drawing
Unit name Fig.
number
FA full keyboard (10.4” LCD type) A02B-0236-C131#EC, JC Fig. U30(a)
Panel cut drawing Fig. U30(d)
FA full keyboard (15” LCD type) A08B-0082-C150#EC, JC Fig. U30(b)
Panel cut drawing Fig. U30(d)
FA full keyboard (15” LCD type, with a punch panel) A08B-0082-C151#EC, JC Fig. U30(c)
Independent punch panel A08B-0082-C200 Fig. U31
A86L-0001-0210
Full keyboard Fig. U32
A86L-0001-0211
Mouse A86L-0001-0212 Fig. U33
Floppy disk unit
A02B-0207-C009 Fig. U34
(3.5" FDD, panel mount type)
Floppy disk drive (single unit) A08B-0084-K001 Fig. U35
HSSB interface board on the personal computer side A20B-8101-0160 to 0163 Fig. U36

- 371 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U1 Series 30i/31i/32i control unit - 7.2" STN monochrome LCD

0 slot 2 slots

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

7.2" unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then Weight: 2.2 kg
attach caps. See Fig. U22.) (Unit: mm)

- 372 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U2 Series 30i/31i/32i control unit - 8.4" TFT color LCD

0 slot 2 slots

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

8.4" unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then Weight: 2.3 kg
attach caps. See Fig. U22.) (Unit: mm)

- 373 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U3 Series 30i/31i/32i control unit - 10.4" TFT color LCD

Series 300is/310is/320is control unit - 10.4" TFT color LCD

0 slot 2 slots

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

10.4" unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then Weight: 2.6 kg
attach caps. See Fig. U22.) (Unit: mm)

- 374 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U4 Series 30i/31i/32i control unit - 15" TFT color LCD

Series 300is/310is/320is control unit - 15" TFT color LCD

8-M4 stud 8-M4 stud

0 slot 2 slots

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

15" unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then Weight: 5 kg
secure the unit with nuts from the inside.) (Unit: mm)

- 375 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U5 Series 300is/310is/320is control unit - 12.1" TFT color LCD

6-M4 stud 6-M4 stud

Mounted-type 0 slot Mounted-type 2 slots

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

12.1" unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then
Weight: 3.5 kg
secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)
(Unit: mm)

- 376 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U6 Series 30i/31i/32i/300i/310i/320i/300is/310is/320is control unit - 2 slots

Memory card

Weight: 1.7 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 377 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U7 Series 30i/31i/32i/300i/310i/320i/300is/310is/320is control unit - 4 slots

Memory card

Weight: 2.2 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 378 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U8 Series 30i/31i/32i display unit - 10.4" color LCD

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

10.4" LCD unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then Weight: 2.0 kg
attach caps. See Fig. U22.) (Unit: mm)

- 379 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U9 Series 30i/31i/32i display unit - 15" color LCD

Series 300is/310is/320is display unit - 15" color LCD
8-M4 stud

Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment

15" LCD unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then Weight: 4.6 kg
secure the unit with nuts from the inside.) (Unit: mm)

- 380 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U10 PANEL i - 10.4" color LCD

Top view

Front view

Side view

PCI card cable

connection area

Cable connection area

Frame ground

Drawing of the lower-right corner on the rear

Panel cut drawing

(Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then attach Weight: 3.5 kg
Area for packing attachment (Unit: mm)
a cap to the screw holes.)

- 381 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U11 PANEL i - 15" color LCD

Top view 8-M stud

Side view

Front view
Cable connection area PCI card cable
connection area

Frame
ground

Drawing of the lower-right corner on the rear

Weight: 5.1 kg
Panel cut drawing (Unit: mm)
Area for packing attachment
(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then secure
the unit with nuts from the inside.)

- 382 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U12 Automobile manufacturer specification - PANEL i

Top view
(Without FDD and CD-ROM drive unit)
However, this
dimension is 20 mm for
the screw sections of
the door for the
PCMCIA slot and USB
interface.

Top view
(With FDD and CD-ROM drive unit)

Door mounting
screw

Door mounting
screw

Front view

Weight: 10 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 383 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U12-2 Automobile manufacturer specification - PANEL i

14-M4 stud
Rear view

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

Panel cut drawing

(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet.)

(Unit: mm)

- 384 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U13 Series 300is/310is/320is display unit - 10.4" color LCD

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

10.4" LCD unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then Weight: 2.3 kg
attach caps. See Fig. U22.) (Unit: mm)

- 385 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U14 Series 300is/310is/320is display unit - 12.1" color LCD

6-M4 stud

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

12.1" unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then
secure the unit with nuts from the inside.) Weight: 3.2 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 386 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U15 Small MDI unit (ONG, for 7.2"/8.4")

Dashed line: Area for packing attachment

MDI unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then
attach caps. See Fig. U22.)

Weight: 0.6 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 387 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U16 Standard MDI unit (ONG, for 7.2"/8.4")

Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment

MDI unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet
then attach caps. See Fig. U22.)

Weight: 1.0 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 388 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U17 Standard MDI unit (ONG, horizontal placement)

Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment

MDI unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet
then attach caps. See Fig. U22.)

Weight: 1.0 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 389 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U17-2 Standard MDI unit (ONG, horizontal placement, with backup unit)

Connector

Backup unit Weight: 1.5 kg

(Unit: mm)

- 390 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U18 Standard MDI unit (ONG, vertical placement)

Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment

MDI unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet
then attach caps. See Fig. U22.)

Weight: 1.2 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 391 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U18-2 Standard MDI unit (ONG, vertical placement, with backup unit)

Connector

Backup unit Weight: 1.7 kg

(Unit: mm)

- 392 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U19 Standard MDI unit (QWERTY)

Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment

MDI unit mounting hole machining drawing

(Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet
then attach caps. See Fig. U22.) Weight: 1.0 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 393 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U19-2 Standard MDI unit (QWERTY, with backup unit)

Connector

Backup unit Weight: 1.5 kg

(Unit: mm)

- 394 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U20(a) Hard disk unit 1

Unit: mm
Weight: 1.1 kg

- 395 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U20(b) Hard disk unit 2

Unit: mm
Weight: 1.2 kg

Fig. U20(c) Hard disk unit 3

Unit: mm
Weight: 1.2 kg

- 396 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U22 Screw cap

Screw cap for the Screw cap for the

top-left and top-right and
lower-right corners lower-left corners

For cap type identification, a

projection is provided only on type A.

Pay attention to the cap direction.

- 397 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U23 Manual pulse generator

3-M4
φ72, equally spaced

Weight: 0.2 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 398 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U24 Pendant type manual pulse generator

Weight: 0.4 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 399 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U25 Separate detector interface unit

Weight: 0.4 kg
(Unit: mm)

Weight: 0.2 kg
(Unit: mm)

The connector names indicated in parentheses are

applicable to the extension unit. The connectors
CP11, JA4A, COP10A, and COP10B are not
provided on the extension unit.

- 400 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U26 Absolute pulse coder battery case for a separate detector

4-φ4.3 mounting hole

Minus terminal
with 3-M3
screw holes
Plus terminal with
3-3M screw holes

Countersink for 4-M4 Plus polarity indication

Minus polarity indication

Weight: 0.4 kg (case only)

Mounting hole machining drawing (Unit: mm)

- 401 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U27 CNC battery unit for external installation

Main unit Weight: 0.9 kg (case only)
Lid
(Unit: mm)

Mounting hole machining drawing

Countersink for 4-M4

With a battery cable 14 m long

- 402 -
 Fig. U28
B-63943EN/02

Mounting hole machining drawing

Punch panel (stand-alone type)

- 403 -
APPENDIX

A paint masking zone 8 mm wide is provided on the periphery of the

rear of the plate.
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U29 Punch panel (for LCD-mounted type)

A paint masking zone 8 mm wide is provided on the periphery of the rear

of the plate.

The panel cut dimensions of this punch panel are indicated below.

- 404 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U30(a) FA full keyboard (10.4” LCD type)

Weight: 3.5 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 405 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U30(b) FA full keyboard (15" LCD type)

Blank panel

Connector
panel opening

Weight: 3.9 kg The rear side is not

(Unit: mm) painted in any color.

- 406 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U30(c) FA full keyboard (15” LCD type, with a punch panel)

Top view

Front view
Side view

Weight: 3.2 kg
(Unit: mm)

Panel cut

- 407 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U30(d) Panel cut drawing

- For FA full keyboard of 10.4" LCD type

- For FA full keyboard of 12.1" LCD type

- For FA full keyboard of 15.0" LCD type

Note) For the panel cut data of the basic unit and
floppy disk unit, see the outline drawing of
each unit.

- 408 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U31 Independent punch panel

Top view

Panel cut
Front view Side view

Weight: 0.6 kg
(Unit: mm)

- 409 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U32 Full keyboard

Full keyboard of type 101 (A86L-0001-0210) Weight: 1.4 kg

(Unit: mm)

Weight: 1.4 kg
Full keyboard of type 106 (A86L-0001-0211) (Unit: mm)

Caution) Both of type 101 and type 106 are not of dust-proof type. These types should be used for program
development. Use these types in the ambient temperature range 0°C to 40°C.

- 410 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U33 Mouse

Ball
Cap

Device name attachment position

Weight: 0.2 kg
(Unit: mm)

Caution) This mouse is not of dust-proof type. This mouse should be

used for program development and maintenance only.
Use this mouse in the ambient temperature range 0°C to 40°C.

- 411 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U34 Floppy disk unit (3.5" FDD, panel mount type)

Weight: 0.9 kg
Side view (Unit: mm)
Front view

Panel cut drawing

Mounting direction:
When mounting this floppy disk unit onto the machine, ensure that the floppy disk unit is mounted in
one of the directions shown below.

- 412 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig. U35 Floppy disk drive (single unit)

Weight: 0.4 kg
The tolerance with no indication is (Unit: mm)
±1.0.

- 413 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig. U36 HSSB interface board on the personal computer side

A20B-8101-0160 to A20B-8101-0163
Weight: 0.1 kg
Unit: mm

(For 1ch) (For 2ch)

-0161 -0160
-0163 -0162

- 414 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Connectors
Fig. title Specification No. Fig. No.
PCR connector (soldering type) PCR-E20FS Fig.C1(a)
FI40 connector FI40-2015S Fig.C1(b)
Connector case (HONDA PCR type) PCR-V20LA/PCR-V20LB Fig. C2 (a)
Connector case (HIROSE FI type) FI-20-CV Fig. C2 (b)
Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type) FCN-240C20-Y/S Fig. C2 (c)
Connector case (HIROSE PCR type) FI-20-CV7 Fig. C2 (d)
AMP connector (1) for servo side AMP1-178128-3 Fig. C3 (a)
AMP connector (2) for servo side AMP2-178128-3 Fig. C3 (b)
AMP connector (3) for +24 V power supply AMP1-178288-3 Fig. C3 (c)
AMP connector (4) for +24 V power supply AMP2-178288-3 Fig. C3 (d)
Contact for AMP connector AMP1-175218-2/5 Fig. C3 (e)
AMP1-175196-2/5
HONDA connector (case) Fig. C4 (a)
HONDA connector (angled case) Fig. C4 (b)
HONDA connector (male) Fig. C4 (c)
HONDA connector (female) Fig. C4 (d)
HONDA connector (terminal layout) Fig. C4 (e)
Connector (Burndy Japan)(3 pins/brown) SMS3PN-5 Fig. C5
Connector for HIROSE flat cable HIF3BB-50D-2.54R Fig. C6
HIF3BB-34D-2.54R
Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) LY10-DC20 Fig. C7 (a)
Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) LY10-C2-3 Fig. C7 (b)
Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface Fig. C8 (a)
Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector Fig. C8 (b)
Honda connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board) MRH-50FD Fig. C9
AMP connector (for loader I/O board) AMP178214-1 Fig. C10
Faston terminal A02B-0166-K330 Fig. C11

- 415 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C1(a) PCR connector (soldering type)

- 416 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig.C1(b) FI40 connector

- 417 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C2(a) Connector case (HONDA PCR type)

- 418 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig.C2(b) Connector case (HIROSE FI type)

- 419 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C2(c) Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type)

- 420 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig.C2(d) Connector case (HIROSE PCR type)

- 421 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C3(a) AMP connector (1) for servo side

- 422 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig.C3(b) AMP connector (2) for servo side

- 423 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C3(c) AMP connector (3) for +24 V power supply

- 424 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig.C3(d) AMP connector (4) for +24 V power supply

- 425 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C3(e) Contact for AMP connector

- 426 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig.C4(a) HONDA connector (case)

- 427 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C4(b) HONDA connector (angled case)

- 428 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig.C4(c) HONDA connector (male)

- 429 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C4(d) HONDA connector (female)

- 430 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig.C4(e) HONDA connector (terminal layout)

- 431 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C5 Connector (Burndy Japan)(3 pins/brown)

- 432 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig.C6 Connector for HIROSE flat cable

- 433 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C7(a) Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)

- 434 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig.C7(b) Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)

- 435 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C8(a) Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface

Fig.C8(b) Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector

- 436 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Fig.C9 Honda connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board)

- 437 -
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Fig.C10 AMP connector (for loader I/O board)

Fig.C11 Faston terminal

- 438 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

B 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND

CABLES

- 439 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

B.1 BOARD-MOUNTED CONNECTORS

B.1.1 Vertical-type Connectors

Models: PCR-EV20MDT (Honda Tsushin)
52618-2011 (Molex Japan)

These board-mounted connectors have been specially developed to

achieve the high packing density required for FANUC products. As
explained in the following subsection, Honda PCR series connectors
can be used as cable connectors because the mating mechanism of the
newly developed connectors is compatible with that of the Honda
PCR series connectors. To support this specification extensively,
many connector manufacturers are now developing custom-tailored
cable connectors. (Note that these cables cannot be used with
screw-fixing cable connector housings.)

B.1.2 Straight and Right-angled Connectors (for Spring and

Screw-fixing Connector Housings)
Models: PCR-E20MDK-SL-A (Honda Tsushin) (straight connector)
PCR-E20LMDETZ-SL (Honda Tsushin) (right-angled
connector)

These connectors are used for the main and option boards. As cable
connectors, they are compatible with screw-fixing connector housings
as well as the spring locking connector housings.

- 440 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

B.2 CABLE CONNECTORS

Cable connectors consist of a connector main body and housing. The

models listed below are available. Those connectors not marked
with an asterisk are currently being mass-produced as manufacturer's
standard models. Those marked with an asterisk are produced
according to custom specifications by FANUC.

Fig. B.2 Cable connectors

B.2.1 Strand Wire Press-mount Connector

With this connector, #28AWG wires are press-connected to each pin
at the same time. The cost of producing a cable/connector assembly
with this connector model is much lower than with connectors
designed for crimping or soldering.
Connector model Supplementary description
(manufacturer)
FI-20-CV7 (Hirose) Low connector housing, more compact than conventional models. The housing
can be fastened to a board-mounted connector by means of a screw lock. It
is intended mainly for connecting the board-mounted connectors used on the
main and option boards of the LCD-mounted type (see Section B.1.2). Note that
this connector housing cannot be used for conventional board-mounted
connectors.

- 441 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

B.2.2 Soldering Type Connector

Details of soldering type connectors and their housings are
summarized below.

Table B.2 Details of soldering type connectors and housings

Connector model Supplementary description
(manufacturer)
PCR-E20FS (Honda) Soldering type connector for general signals. This is suitable for producing cable
assemblies in small quantities, as well as on-site.
FI40-20S (Hirose) Equivalent to Honda PCR-E20FS
FI40B-20S (Hirose) Has the same number of pins as the FI40-20S, but features a wider soldering pitch,
(formerly, FI40A-20S) facilitating soldering and enabling the use of thicker wires. Its reinforced pins allow
wires as thick as #17AWG to be soldered to the FI40B-20S (wires no thicker than
#20AWG can be used with the FI40A-20S). Note, however, that a thick wire, such
as #17AWG, should be used with a more robust housing like the FI-20-CV6.
FI40B-2015S (Hirose) Features a wider soldering pitch, attained by using the space provided by thinning
(formerly, FI40-2015S) out some pins. Also features tougher pins, compared with its predecessor, the
FI40-2015S. These pins can be soldered to wires as thick as #17AWG, provided
that the cable diameter does not exceed 8.5 mm.

Housing model (manufacturer) Supplementary description

FI-20-CV5 (Hirose) Should be used with the FI40B-20S. This is a plastic housing designed for use
with a cable that is 9.2 mm in diameter.
FI-20-CV6 (Hirose) Should be used with the FI40B-20S. This housing, however, can be used with a
thicker cable (such as 10.25 mm) than is possible with the FI-20-CV5. Its
components are die cast.

In addition to the combinations shown in Fig. B.2, Hirose

soldering-type connectors can be combined with the housings listed
below. Ensure that the diameter of the cable used with each housing
satisfies the requirements of that housing.
Connector model Housing model (applicable cable diameter)
FI40B-2015S ⇔ FI-20-CV (8.5 mm in diameter) only
(formerly FI40-2015S)

FI40-20S FI-20-CV2 (φ6.2mm)

FI40B-20S ⇔ FI-20-CV5 (φ9.2mm)
(formerly FI40A-20S) FI-20-CV6 (φ10.25mm)
Those listed on the left can be used.

- 442 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

B.3 RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE

HOUSINGS, AND CABLES
Table B.3 Recommended connectors, applicable housings, and cables
Compatible cable
Connector name FANUC-approved FANUC-approved (cable diameter)
referenced in the connector housing FANUC development Remark
Connection Manual (manufacturer) (manufacturer) FANUC specification
number
PCR-E20FA PCR-V20LA (Honda
Plastic housing
(Honda Tsushin) Tsushin)
FI30-20S FI-20-CV2 (Hirose
PCR-E20FA Metal housing
(Hirose Electric) Electric)
Strand wire press-mount
FCN-247J020-G/E FCN-240C020-Y/S
type Plastic housing
(Fujitsu Takamizawa) (Fujitsu Takamizawa)
52622-2011
52624-2015 (Molex) A66L-0001-0284#10P Plastic housing
(Molex)
(6.2 mm in diameter)
PCR-E20FA
FI30-20S FI-20-CV7
Strand wire press-mount Plastic housing
(Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric)
type
PCR-E20FS PCR-V20LA (Honda
Plastic housing
PCR-E20FS (Honda Tsushin) Tsushin)
Soldering type FI40-20S FI-20-CV2 (Hirose
Plastic housing
(Hirose Electric) Electric)
FI40B-2015S FI40B-2015S A66L-0001-0286 (Note)
FI-20-CV (Hirose
(formerly FI40-2015S) (formerly FI40-2015S) A66L-0001-0402 (Note) Plastic housing
Electric)
15-pin soldering type (Hirose Electric) (8.5 mm in diameter)
FI40B-20S A66L-0001-0367
FI-20-CV5 (Hirose
FI40B-20S (formerly FI40A-205) A66L-0001-0368 Plastic housing
Electric)
(formerly FI40A-2015S) (Hirose Electric) (9.2 mm in diameter)
Soldering type FI40B-20S FI-20-CV6 (Hirose A66L-0001-0403 (Note)
Metal housing
(Hirose Electric) Electric) (9.8 mm in diameter)

NOTE
Cable A66L-0001-0286 has been recommended
for use as a pulse coder cable. It can be up to 20
m long. Two cables, A66L-0001-0402 and
A66L-0001-0403, have recently been developed.
A66L-0001-0402 and A66L-0001-0403 can be as
long as 30 m and 50 m, respectively. (See Fig. 2
for detailed specifications.)
Both cables have the same level of oil and bending
resistance (cable, 100 mm in diameter, capable of
withstanding at least 10 million bending cycles) as
conventional cables, and are UL- and
CSA-certified.

- 443 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

B.3.1 Recommended Connectors

Press-mount type connector assembly tools and jigs

Connector model FANUC-approved
Press-mounting
referenced in the connector Wire forming tool Remark
tool
Connection Manual (manufacturer)
PCR-E20FA PCR-E20FA PCS-K2A FHPT-918A Low cost
(Honda Tsushin) JGPS-015-1/1-20 MFC-K1 (Note 1)
JGPS-014 PCS-K1
FHAT-918A
FI30-20S FI30-20CAT FI30-20/ID Low cost
(Hirose Electric) FI30-20CAT1 HHP-502
FI30-20GP
FCN-247J020 FCN-237T-T043/H FCN-237T-T109/H
-G/S (Fujitsu) FCN-247T-T066/H
FCN-237T-T044/H
FCN-237T-T062/H
52622-2011 57829-5000 57830-5000 Low cost
(Molex) 57823-5000 57824-5000

NOTE
1 Those tools indicated by shading are available
from FANUC (specification number
A02B-0120-K391).
2 The tools available from each manufacturer are
specifically designed for use with the connectors
manufactured by that manufacturer.

- 444 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

B.3.2 Applicable Cables

Materials for cable assemblies

Machine tool builders are required to manufacture or procure the
materials for the cable assemblies to be used with their products.
FANUC recommends the following materials as being suitable for
interface connectors. Individual machine tool builders are
encouraged to contact each cable manufacturer for themselves, as
required.
Constitutio FANUC specification
Material Use Manufacturer Remark
n number
10-pair cable General use 0.08mm2 A66L-0001-0284 #10P Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
10-pair Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
SHINKO ELECTRIC
INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
12-conductor Pulse coder, 0.5mm2 A66L-0001-0286 Hitachi Cable, Ltd. 20 m or less
composite cable linear scale, 6-conductor Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
manual pulse 0.18mm2 SHINKO ELECTRIC
generator 3-pair INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
0.75mm2 A66L-0001-0402 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 30 m or less
6-conductor Usable on
0.18mm2 movable parts
3-pair
1.25mm2 A66L-0001-0403 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 50 m or less
6-conductor Usable on
0.18mm2 movable parts
3-pair
5-core coaxial CRT interface 5-conductor A66L-0001-0371 Hitachi Cable, Ltd. 50 m or less
cable coaxial

- 445 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

10-pair cable
(a) Specifications
Item Unit Specifications
Product No. - A66L-0001-0284#10P
Manufacturer - Hitachi Cable,Ltd.
Oki Electric Cable, Co.,Ltd.
SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES
CO., LTD.
Rating - 60°C 30V : UL2789
80°C 30V : UL80276
Material Conductor - Stranded wire of tinned annealed
copper (ASTM B-286)
Insulator - Cross-linked vinyl
Shield braid - Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath - Heat-resistant oilproof vinyl
Number of pairs Pairs 10
Conductor Size AWG 28
Structure Conductors/ 7/0.127
mm
Outside diameter mm 0.38
Insulator Thickness mm 0.1
Thinnest portion : 0.8 (3.1mm)
Outside diameter mm 0.58
(approx.)
Core style (rating) mm UL15157(80°C , 30V)
Twisted pair Outside diameter mm 1.16
(approx.)
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay - Collect the required number of twisted
pairs into a cable, then wrap binding
tape around the cable. To make the
cable round, apply a cable separator
as required.
Lay diameter (approx.) mm 3.5
Drain wire Conductors/ Hitachi Cable : Not available
mm Oki Electric Cable : Available,10/0.12
SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES
CO., LTD. : Not available
Shield braid Element wire mm 0.12
diameter
Braid density % 85 or more
Sheath Color - Black
Thickness mm 1.0
Outside diameter mm 6.2
(approx.)
Standard length m 200
Packing method - Bundle
Electrical Electric resistance (at Ω/km 233 or less
performance 20°C )
Insulation resistance MΩ-km 10 or less
(at 20°C )
Dielectric strength V/min. 300
(AC)
Flame resistance - Shall pass flame resistance test
VW-1SC of UL standards.

- 446 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

(b) Structure drawing

- 447 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Composite 12-core cable

(a) Specifications
Item Unit Specifications
Product No. - A66L-0001-0286
Manufacturer - Oki Cable, Ltd.
Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES
CO., LTD.
Rating - 80°C, 30V
Material Conductor,braid-shiel - Strand wire of tinned annealed
ded wire,drain wire copper (JIS C3152)
Insulator - Heat-resistant flame-retardant vinyl
Sheath - Oilproof, heat-resistant,
flame-retardant vinyl
Number of wires (wire ons.) Cores 6 (1 to 6) 6 (three pairs)
(7 to 9)
Conductor Size mm2 0.5 0.18
Structure Conductors/ 20/0.18 7/0.18
mm
Outside diameter mm 0.94 0.54
Insulator Standard thickness mm 0.25 0.2
(The minimum
thickness is at least
80% of the standard
thickness.)
Outside diameter mm 1.50 0.94
Twisted pair Outside diameter mm 1.88
Direction of lay - Left
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay - Twist the wires at an appropriate
pitch so the outermost layer is
right-twisted, and wrap tape around
the outermost layer. Apply a cable
separator as required.
Lay diameter (approx.) mm 5.7
Drain wire Size mm2 0.3
Structure Wires/mm 12/0.18
Outside diameter mm 0.72
Shield braid Element wire mm 0.12
diameter
Thickness mm 0.3
Braid density % 70
Outside diameter mm 6.3
Sheath Color - Black
Standard thickness mm 1.1
(The minimum
thickness is at least
85% of the standard
thickness.)
Outside diameter mm 8.5Max. 9.0 (Note)
Standard length m 100
Packing method - Bundle

- 448 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

Item Unit Specifications

Electrical Electric resistance (at Ω/km 39.4 (1 to 6) 113 (7 to 9)
performance 20°C) (wire nos.)
Insulation resistance MΩ-km 15
(at 20°C)
Dielectric strength V/min. 500
(AC)
Flame resistance - Shall pass flame resistance test
VW-1SC of UL standards.

NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions
other than the drain wire.

(b) Cable structure

The cable structure is shown below.

- 449 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

(c) Specifications
Item Specification
FANUC specification number A66L-0001-0402 A66L-0001-0403
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
A-conductor B-conductor A-conductor B-conductor
Conductor Constitution 16/0.12 3/22/0.12 16/0.12 7/16/0.12
Number of conductors/ (0.18mm2) (0.75mm2) (0.18mm2) (1.25mm2)
mm
Typical outside 0.55 1.20 0.55 1.70
diameter (mm)
Insulation Color White, red, black Red, black White, red, black Red, black
(polyester) Typical thickness (mm) 0.16 0.23 0.16 0.25
Typical outside 0.87 1.66 0.87 2.20
diameter (mm)
Pair twisting Constitution White-red, White-red,
white-black, and white-black, and
black-red black-red
Direction of twisting Left Left
Typical pitch: 20 Typical pitch: 20
mm mm
Assembling by Number of strands or 3 6 3 6
twisting conductors
Direction of twisting Left Left
Taping Twisting is wrapped with washi, or Twisting is wrapped with washi, or
Japanese paper, tape. Japanese paper, tape.
Typical outside 5.7 6.9
diameter (mm)
Braided Typical strand 0.14
shielding diameter (mm)
Typical density (mm) 80
Drain A 12/0.18 mm wire is roughly wrapped under braided shielding.
Typical outside 6.4 7.6
diameter (mm)
Sheath Color Black (matted)
(polyurethane) Typical thickness (mm) 1.05 1.1
Vertical taping Vertically taped with washi under sheathing.
Outside diameter (mm) 8.5±0.3 9.8±0.3
Finished Typical length (m) 100
assembly Short size Basically not approved.
Finished Rating 80°C 30V
assembly Standard Shall comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A 80°C 30V
performance FT-1.
Flame resistance Shall comply with VW-1 and FT-1.
Electrical Conductor resistance 103 or lower 25.5 or lower 103 or lower 15.0 or lower
performance Ω/km (20°C)
Insulation resistance 1 or higher
MΩ/km (20°C)
Dielectric strength A.C 500
V-min

- 450 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

Item Specification
Insulation Tensile strength 9.8 or higher
performance N/mm2
Elongation % 100 or higher
Tensile strength after At least 70% of that before aging
aging %
Elongation after At least 65% of that before aging
aging %
Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C
Sheathing Tensile strength 9.8 or higher
performance N/mm2
Elongation % 100 or higher
Tensile strength after At least 70% of that before aging
aging %
Elongation after At least 65% of that before aging
aging %
Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C
Cable cross
section

- 451 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

5-core coaxial cable

(a) Specifications
Item Unit Description
Specification - A66L-0001-0371
Manufacture - HITACHI CABLE CO., LTD.
Number of Conductors Core 5
Inside Size mm2 0.14
Conductor Components Conductors(PCS) 7/0.16
/mm
Material - Tin-coated Soft Copper Wire
Diameter mm 0.48
(approx.)
Insulator Material (Color) - Polyethylene (White),
heat-resistant 80°C
Thickness mm 0.71
Diameter mm 1.90
(approx.)
Outside Material - Tin-coated Soft Copper Wire
Conductor (Rolled)
Diameter of mm 0.08
Component-Wire
Density % 95 or more
Thickness mm 0.2
Jacket Material - Vinyl, heat-resistant 80°C
Color - Black. White. Red. Green. Blue
Thickness mm 0.15
Diameter mm 2.6
(approx.)
Twisted Assembly Diameter mm 7.1
(approx.)
Thickness of Paper Tape mm 0.05
Shield braid Wire dia. Material mm 0.12 (Tin-coaded soft copper
wire)
Density % 80 or more (typ 82%)
Thickness mm 0.3
Diameter mm 7.8
Sheath Material, Color - Oil Tight Vinyl (A), Black,
heat-resistant 80°C
Thickness mm 0.7 (Min. thickness: 0.56)
Finish Diameter mm 9.2±0.3
Conductor Resistance (20°C) Ω/km 143 or less
Dielectric strength - 1000 VAC must be withstood for
(between internal conductor one minute.
and external conductor)
Insulation resistance MΩ-km 1000 or more
(between internal conductor
and external conductor, 20°C)
Impedance (10MHz) Ω 75±5
Standard Capacitance (1MHz) nF/km 56
Standard Attention dB/km 53
Weight kg/km 105
Standard Length m 200
Package form - Bundle

- 452 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

An example of circuit testing 20-pin interface cable

⋅
⋅
⋅

Ω
Resistor

Check every ⋅
pin ⋅
⋅

Cable (20-pin interface connector)

PCB connector PCR-E20LMD-SL (Honda)

Available from general manufacturers

- 453 -
C.CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

C CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM

US)
Maximum allowable cable length between units
Maximum
Cable type Use and condition cable length
(m)
MDI cable Control unit-to-MDI unit 20m
Electrical cable 10m (Note 2)
I/O Link cable Electrical-to-optical conversion adapter 2m
Optical cable 200m
Electrical cable (control unit-to-spindle
20m
servo unit)
Serial spindle cable
Electrical-to-optical conversion adapter 2m
Optical cable 200m
Position coder cable Control unit-position coder 50m
Connector panel I/O operator's panel I/O
MPG cable 50m
module-to-manual pulse generator
FSSB cable See APPENDIX D.
HSSB cable See APPENDIX D.
RS-232-C communication 4800 baud or less 100m
cable 9600 baud or less 50m
RS-422 communication 9600 baud or less 800m
cable 19.2 k baud 50m

NOTE
1 The maximum cable lengths listed above apply
only when the respective recommended cables
stated in the text are used. If a
non-recommended cable is used, the maximum
cable length may not be guaranteed. Cables
other than those listed above are used between
units in the 30i series. See the respective
descriptions in this manual for details of these
cables.
2 This cable can be extended to up to 15 m if it is
used within the cabinet.

- 454 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX C.CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)

Purpose Description Specification Length

Spindle signal cable PCR-E20FA

(when 3 or 4 serial
A02B-0236-K845 5m
spindles are connected)

Electrical-to-electrical FI-20-CV7
Spindle signal cable
PCR-E20FA
(when 3 or 4 serial
spindles are connected)
A02B-0236-K846 5m
For serial connection
between the second and PCR-E20FA
third spindles
Spindle signal cable
PCR-E20FA
(when 3 or 4 serial
spindles are connected)
A02B-0236-K847 1m
When an electrical-to-
optical conversion adapter FI-20-CV7
is used
Power supply cable for AMP2-178288-3
I/O unit

Control unit (CP1B) A02B-0236-K843 5m

↑
↓
SMS3PNS-5
I/O Unit (CP31)
MDI signal cable
LCD-mounted type FI-20-CV7
control unit or A02B-0236-K812 25cm
stand-alone type LCD
unit (CA55)
↑
↓ A02B-0236-K813 45cm
MDI unit LY10-DC20
(CK1)
Power supply cable for
stand-alone type LCD
AMP2-178288-3
unit

stand-alone type MDI

A02B-0166-K880 55cm
(CPD2)
↑
↓ AMP1-178288-3
Stand-alone type LCD
(CP5)

- 455 -
C.CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Purpose Description Specification Length

Manual pulse generator
cable (for one unit)
FI40-2015S
Control unit (JA3)
A02B-0120-K847 7m
↑
↓ M3 crimp style terminal
Manual pulse generator
terminal board
Manual pulse generator
cable (for two units)

FI40-2015S
Control unit (JA3)
A02B-0120-K848 7m
↑
↓ M3 crimp style terminal
Manual pulse generator
terminal board
Manual pulse generator
cable (for three units)
FI40-2015S

3
Control unit (JA3)
A02B-0120-K841 7m
↑
↓ M3 crimp style terminal
2

2
Manual pulse generator
terminal board
I/O Link cable

Control unit (JD1A)

A02B-0120-K842 5m
↑
↓ PCR-E20FA
I/O unit (JD1B)
Control unit power supply
M3 crimp style terminal
cable

Stabilized power supply

A02B-0124-K830 5m
(24 VDC)
↑
↓ AMP1-178288-3
Control unit (CP1A)

Serial spindle signal cable

Control unit (JA41)

A02B-0120-K844 1m
↑ PCR-E20FA
↓
Electric/optical converter

Serial spindle signal cable

Control unit (JA41)

A02B-0200-K810 5m
↑
↓ PCR-E20FA
α series amplifier (JA7B)

- 456 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

D OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

The 30i series uses optical fiber cables for the following interfaces.
This table lists the usable combinations.
Maximum
Recommended allowable Applicable
Interface Remark
optical cable transmission junction adapter
distance
Serial spindle interface A66L-6001-0026#L~ 100m
A66L-6001-0029#L~ 55m A63L-0020-0004 For junction
only
I/O Link interface A66L-6001-0026#L~ 200m A63L-0020-0002
High-speed serial bus A66L-6001-0026#L~ 50m None
(HSSB) interface A66L-6001-0029#L~ 35m A63L-0020-0004 For junction
only
Serial servo bus (FSSB) A66L-6001-0023#L~ 10m None
interface A66L-6001-0026#L~ 50m None
Between stand-alone A66L-6001-0026#L~ 50m None
control unit and LCD

- 457 -
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Notes on the specifications of optical fiber cable

(1) Supported optical cables
<1> Internal cord type cable .............. A66L-6001-0023#LxRxxx
Cable length................................ 0.15 to 10m
Code diameter............................. φ2.2mm × 2 cords
Tensile strength
Optical fiber cord ......... 7 kg per cord
Between optical fiber cord and connector ..... 2kg
Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord.......... 25mm
Operating temperature ................ -20 to 70 °C
Unit: mm
7

6.7 14 max. 100 typ. Two cords are bound together.

21

Code

Fig. D (a) External dimensions of internal cord type cable

<2> External type cable ........................A66L-6001-0026#LxRxxx

.......................................A66L-6001-0029#LxRxxx
Cable length...................................1 to 200m
Optical fiber cord diameter............φ2.2mm × 2 cords
Diameter of cable with reinforced cover .................φ7.6mm
Tensile strength
Cable with reinforced cover ........................75kg
Optical fiber cord .........................7 kg per cord
Between optical fiber cord and connector ...2kg
Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord........25mm
Minimum bending radius of cable with reinforced cover
.........................50mm
Bending resistance (cable with reinforced cover)
10 million bending cycles at room temperature (when the
bending radius is 100 mm)
Flame resistance.............................Equivalent to UL VW-1
Operating temperature ...................-20 to 70 °C
Unit: mm

8.2

6.7 19 max. 150 typ. 35 typ.

21

Code Bush Reinforced cover

Fig. D (b) External dimensions of external cable

- 458 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

Table D (a) Standard cable length

Internal cord type cable External cable
A66L-6001-0023＃ A66L-6001-0026#
Specification Length Specification Length
L150R0 0.15m L1R003 1.0 m
L300R0 0.3 m L2R003 2.0 m
L500R0 0.5 m L3R003 3.0 m
L1R003 1.0 m L5R003 5.0 m
L2R003 2.0 m L7R003 7.0 m
L3R003 3.0 m L10R03 10.0m
L5R003 5.0 m L15R03 15.0m
L7R003 7.0 m L20R03 20.0m
L10R03 10.0 m L30R03 30.0m
L50R03 50.0m
L100R03 100m
L200R03 200m

(2) Cable selection

• Always use an external cable (A66L-6001-0026#~) when the
cable is to be laid outside the power magnetics cabinet or main
unit cabinet, where it may be pulled, rubbed, or stepped on.
• Use an external cable when part of the cabling is to be subject to
movement. For example, when connecting a movable portable
operation pendant box to the power magnetics cabinet, the use of
an external cable is desirable because the cable is likely to be
bent, pulled, or twisted repeatedly even though frequent system
operation is not expected. However, the force likely to be
applied when the cable is installed or moved for maintenance
purposes does not need to be taken into consideration.
• Use an external cable in locations where sparks or flame are a
danger. Although the internal cord type cable
(A66L-6001-0023#~) is covered by nonflammable resin, the
cover, if exposed to frame for a long time, may melt, allowing
the fiber cable inside to burn.
• Use an external cable when the cable is expected to be pulled
with considerable force during installation (the force applied to
the cable must be within the specified tensile strength limit at all
times). For example, even though installing a cable in a cable
duct can be regarded as internal cabling, a cable of the
appropriate type must be selected according to the tensile force to
be applied to the cable during installation.
• Both the internal cord type and external cables have the same oil
and heat resistance properties.

- 459 -
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

(3) Procuring the cable

All the optical fiber cables mentioned above are special cable products
with optical connectors, which are designed, produced, and tested to
ensure the required system performance and reliability. It is
technically impossible for users to produce these cables or process
(cut and reconnect) them after purchase. Users are requested to
purchase cables of the necessary length from an appropriate supplier.
Cables are available from either FANUC or any of the
FANUC-approved manufacturers listed in Table D(d).

Table D(d) FANUC-approved cable manufacturers and cable model

numbers (retail)
<1> Internal cord type cable : A66L-6001-0023#LxRxxx
Manufacturer Model number Remark
Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. *-353373-*
Japan Aviation PF-2HB209-**M-F-1 ** indicates the cable
Electronics Industry, Ltd. length (m).
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. H07-P22-F2VCFA-** ** indicates the cable
length (m).

<2> External Cable : A66L-6001-0026#LxRxxx

Manufacturer Model number Remark
Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. *-353199-*
Japan Aviation CF-2HB208-**M-F-1 ** indicates the cable
Electronics Industry, Ltd. length (m).
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. H07-P22-F2NCFA-** ** indicates the cable
length (m).
Oki Electric Cable Co., OPC201HPXF-**MB ** indicates the cable
Ltd. length (m).

(4) Handling precautions

<1> Protection during storage
When the electrical/optical conversion module mounted on the
printed circuit board and the optical fiber cable are not in use,
their mating surfaces must be protected with the lid and caps with
which they are supplied. If left uncovered, the mating surfaces
are likely to become dirty, possibly resulting in a poor cable
connection.
Electrical/optical conversion module Lid

Optical fiber cable Optical fiber cable caps

Fig. D (c) Protection of electrical/optical conversion module and optical fiber cable (when not in use)

- 460 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

<2> Optical fiber cable

• Make sure that the bending radius and tensile strength of the
cable are always within their ranges described in the
specifications (see the first item), regardless of whether the
cable is stored or routed and whether operation is in
progress or not.
• Although the reinforcing cover of the external cable has
sufficient mechanical strength, be careful not to drop heavy
objects on the cable.
• Grasp the optical connector firmly when connecting or
disconnecting the cable. Do not pull on the optical fiber
cord itself. (The maximum tensile strength between the
fiber cord and connector is 2 kg. Applying greater force to
the cord is likely to cause the connector to come off, making
the cable unusable.)
• Once connected, the optical connector is automatically
locked by the lock levers on its top. To remove the
connector, release the lock levers and pull the connector.
• Although optical connectors cannot be connected in other
than the correct orientation, always take note of the
connector's orientation before making the connection.
• Before installing an external cable, fix either a wire with a
hook or a tension member to the reinforcing cover of the
optical connector and pull the wire or tension member, as
shown in Fig. D(d). This is done to prevent a tensile force
from being applied between the fiber cord and connector.
If no tensile force is applied between the fiber cord and
connector when installing the cable, you can hold the
reinforcing cover of the connector directly and pull it. In
the case of an internal cord, which does not have a
reinforcing cover, apply the same protective measures, as
instructed in Fig. D(d), for that portion of the cable where
the two cords are bound together, in order to prevent a
tensile force from being applied between the fiber cord and
connector. In the same way as for an external cable, if no
tensile force is applied between the fiber cord and connector
during installation, you can hold the shielded part of the
cable directly and pull it. Because the combined tensile
strength of the two cords is only 14 kg, however, avoid
applying too great a force to the cable during installation,
regardless of whether you have taken the protective
measures.

- 461 -
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Optical connector Reinforcing cover Optical connector

Wire with a hook

Reinforcing cover
Tension member

Tape Tape

2 cords combined

Fig. D (d) Prior to installing a cable

• Take care to keep both parts of the optical connector (cable

side and PCB side) clean. If they become dirty, wipe them
with tissue paper or absorbent cotton to remove dirt. The
tissue paper or absorbent cotton may be moistened with
ethyl alcohol. Do not use any organic solvent other than
ethyl alcohol.
• Fix the reinforcing cover of the external cable or the cord
binding portion of the internal cord type cable by using a
cable clamp, as shown in Fig. D(e), to prevent the weight of
the optical fiber cable from being applied directly to the
connecting part of the optical connector.
(Recommended cable clamp) Recommended cable clamps are
listed below. Use a clamp that
grasps the optical cable lightly;
the clamp should not apply
excessive pressure to the cable.
For an external cable CKN-13SP (with sponge)
(Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
For an internal cord type cable
MN-1 (Kitagawa Industry Co.,
Ltd.)

- 462 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

Reinforcing cover of external cable or cord

Optical connector Optical fiber cord binding portion of internal cord type cable

Bending radius of 25 mm or more

(Make the bending radius as large
as possible.)

Cable clamp Bending radius of 50 mm or more (for reinforcing cover)

Bending radius of 25 mm or more (for cord binding portion)
(Make the bending radius as large as possible.)

Fig. D(e) Fixing the cable with a clamp

• Any superfluous portion of the cable may be wound into a

loops. Should this prove necessary, make sure the
diameter of each loop is at least 150 mm (for an external
cable) or at least 100 mm (for an internal cord type cable).
Winding the cable into smaller loops may produce sharp
curves that exceed the specified bending radius limit
without the user being aware. Such bending can result in a
greater transmission loss, ultimately leading to a
communication failure.
• When using a nylon band (cable tie) as a cable clamp,
follow the instructions given below. Also, take care not to
apply a bending force to one particular part of the cable
when fixing it with a clamp. Failing to clamp the cable
correctly may cut or damage it.
(External cable)
Do not clamp the uncovered portion of the cable with a
nylon band. When clamping the cable by the
reinforcing cover, the clamping force is not an
important factor to consider. However, ensure that
the clamping force is as small as possible to ensure that
the reinforcing cover is not deformed by the clamping.
If possible, the clamping force should be 5 kg or less.
(Internal cord type cable)
Lightly clamp the optical cable with a nylon band so
that the cable shield is not deformed. If possible, the
clamping force should be 1 or 2 kg (make sure that no
force is applied to the cable). Due care is required
when clamping the internal cord type cable because its
cable shield is weaker than the reinforcing cover of the
external cable.

- 463 -
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

(5) Optical fiber cable relay of FANUC I/O Link

When used for the FANUC I/O Link application, optical fiber cables
can be connected by using an optical fiber adapter, as follows.

(a) External view of an optical fiber adapter

32±0.3

10.16
R1.6

6.6

8.2
21±0.5
3.2 42±0.5

18.2±0.5
2.2

(b) Example of the use of an optical fiber adapter

Optical fiber adapter (A63L-0020-0002)

Optical fiber cable Optical fiber cable

Mounting board

NOTE
Up to one relay points are permitte.

- 464 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

(6) Optical fiber cable relay of FANUC high-speed serial bus

With the FANUC high-speed serial bus, special low-loss optical
cables can be connected by using a special low-loss optical relay
adapter as an optical fiber relay adapter.

(a) External view of the low-loss optical relay adapter

32±0.5

10.16
R1.6

6.6

8.2
21±0.3
3.2 42±1.0

18.1
2.2

(b) Example of use of the optical fiber relay adapter

Low-loss optical relay adapter (A63L-0020-0004)

Low-loss optical fiber cable Low-loss optical fiber cable

Mounting board

NOTE
Only one relay point is permitted.

- 465 -
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

(7) Precautions for connection with low-loss optical junction adapter

• Features and attention in use of low-loss optical junction adapter
(A63L-0020-0004)
When optical connectors for a conventional optical junction
adapter (A63L-0020-0002) are jointed, the facing ferrules(Note
1) are located about 60 um from each other. This is because the
optical fiber of conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cables
(A66L-6001-0008, -0009, -0026) may protrude from the tip of
the ferrules (by up to about several um), resulting in the fiber
protrusion being damaged when the ferrules are butted against
each other.
In the low-loss optical junction adapter, the ferrules are butted
against each other, thus greatly reducing the reduction in repeater
loss. Therefore, the two optical cables used with the low-loss
optical junction adapters must be dedicated to the adapters.
If a conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cable
(A66L-6001-0008, -0009, -0026) is used as even one of the two
optical fiber cables for joining the low-loss optical junction
adapter, both cables may be damaged, resulting in deteriorated
characteristics.

NOTE
Ferrule: Movable metal at the tip of an optical
connector; the fiber is bonded to the ferrule.

Ferrule

Protective cover

Optical cable
Optical connector

• Features of low-loss optical cable (A66L-6001-0029#~)

A low-loss optical cable is selected from conventional PCF
optical cables (A66L-6601-0026). The selected cable offers
low loss, and its connector section is given special treatment; the
fiber ends are provided with a depression so that the ferrules can
be butted against each other. The two optical cables used with
the low-loss optical junction adapter must be of low-loss type.
• Appearance of the low-loss optical junction adapter and cable
(how to distinguish them from conventional types)
The body of the conventional optical junction adapter is black,
but that of the low-loss optical junction adapter is blue. In
addition, the protective cover(Note 1) of the conventional PCF
optical cable is black, but that of the low-loss optical cable is
blue.

- 466 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

(8) Installing the optical fiber junction adapter

The optical fiber junction adapter should be installed within a cabinet,
as a rule. If it is impossible to avoid installing it within a cabinet,
protect the adapter and the optical cable portions (such as connectors
and cords) not covered with reinforcement coating from the outside air
by, for example, covering them with packing.

(9) Environmental resistance of the optical fiber junction adapter

• The optical fiber junction adapter is not waterproof. Even when
optical cables are attached to both ends of the adapter, there are
very small gaps in the linked portions, so water resistance can not
be expected.
• When optical cables are attached to both ends of the junction
adapter installed in a normal environment (such as within a
cabinet), it is unlikely that dust will penetrate between the
adapter and optical fiber to the degree that it may hamper normal
optical linkage. If one or both ends of the adapter are left open,
dust and dirt may accumulate even when the adapter is in a
normal environment (such as within a cabinet). The dust and
dirt on the adapter ends is likely to hamper normal optical
linkage when the optical cables are attached. In such a case,
clean the junction adapter and the optical connector using the
optical fiber junction adapter cleaning method described below.
• Do not allow cutting fluid to splash over the adapter or those
optical cable portions (such as connectors and cords) that are not
covered with reinforcement coating. If the inside of the adapter
and fiber end surfaces are contaminated with cutting fluid, a
malfunction may occur.

(10) Cleaning
If the optical fiber junction adapter, optical-to-electrical conversion
module, or optical cable are soiled, clean them according to the
following procedures.
• Cleaning the optical fiber junction adapter and
optical-to-electrical conversion module
First, clean the entire housing by wiping it with a cloth moistened
with, or by washing it in, ethyl alcohol or HCFC141B
(alternative CFC; High Shower spray can DS-2168,
manufactured by Sun Hayato). Similarly, wash the two sleeves
in the adapter or wipe them with a cotton swab or the like.
• Cleaning optical cables
For the optical cables, it is important to clean the connectors at
their ends. Any soiling on the optical fiber end surfaces will
hamper optical transmission, resulting in a malfunction. Wipe
the optical fiber end surfaces (that is, the ferrule end surfaces)
thoroughly with a soft, clean cloth (like gauze) moistened with
ethyl alcohol or HCFC141B, in the same way as described above.
The use of cotton swabs may prove convenient. The fiber end
surfaces of low-loss optical cables are lower than the ferrules.
To remove any soiling from the fiber end surfaces completely,
push the cotton swab or gauze into the depressions all the way
through while rotating the ferrule. If the ferrules and optical
- 467 -
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

connectors are contaminated with oily substances, and they may

extend over a cleaned fiber end surface when it is attached to the
optical-to-electrical conversion module, it is a good idea to wash
them before wiping the optical fiber end surfaces, using the
procedure stated above.

- 468 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX E.LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)

E LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)

Brightness of the monochrome LCD
When the ambient temperature is low, the brightness of the LCD
decreases. (The LCD screen is dark particularly immediately after
the power is turned on.) This phenomenon is not a failure but is a
property specific to the LCD. When the ambient temperature
increases, the LCD screen becomes brighter. The monochrome LCD
has a brightness control function. For the method of adjustment, see
Maintenance Manual (B-63945EN).

LCD with a touch panel

The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen.
For this operation, be sure to use a FANUC-supplied pen
(A02B-0236-K111) dedicated to the touch panel. If a sharp-pointed
pen is used, for example, to touch the LCD screen, the LCD surface
may be flawed or damaged. Moreover, do not touch the LCD screen
directly with a finger. Otherwise, the operability of the LCD may
deteriorate, and the LCD screen may get dirty.

Protection sheet for the touch panel

A protection sheet is attached the face of an LCD with a touch panel
to protect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. If the protection
sheet is damaged, it can be replaced. (The protection sheet is a
consumable part.)

Replacing the protection sheet

- Materials used
(1) Protection sheet : A02B-0236-K110
(2) Neutral detergent (detergent that can clean oily dirt off =
detergent for kitchen can be used)
(3) Soft cloth (such as towel)

- Replacement procedure
(1) Before replacement
<1> Turn off the power to the machine.
<2> Peel off the old protection sheet from the surface of the
touch panel.
<3> Wipe off adhesive residue if any on the screen surface with
alcohol.
<4> Use the detergent to remove oil or dirt stuck to the surface
of the touch panel.
<5> With a soft, damp cloth, wipe off detergent completely.
⇒ If the touch panel surface becomes cloudy, oil is still
left on the surface. Remove oil completely.

- 469 -
E.LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

⇒ If oil or detergent is left on the surface of the touch

panel, the protection sheet cannot adhere to the panel
completely and will sometimes peel off easily.
<6> With a dry soft cloth, wipe off moisture completely.

(2) Applying the protection sheet

(2-1) For A02B-0236-K110
<1> Fold the tab over the front side (the side opposite to the
backing sheet).

Fold

<2> Peel off the backing sheet.

<3> Position the sheet, then attach the upper and lower
sides of the sheet first. Check that the sides of the
protection sheet do not touch the escutcheon.

OK NG

<4> Attach the right and left sides of the protection sheet
while pushing out air between the touch panel and
protection sheet.
⇒ With part of the protection sheet kept stuck to the
touch panel, do not attempt to correct the position of
the protection sheet by pulling the sheet.
<5> Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach
the entire sheet completely.
⇒ Check that the four corners and four sides of the
protection sheet do not float.

- 470 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX E.LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)

(2-2) For A02B-0236-K130

<1> Peel off the white film attached on the back (facing the
LCD) of the new protection sheet.
<2> Attach the protection sheet so that it is to the lower-left
of the replacement tab. At this time, align the
overhang edge at bottom of the escutcheon with the
corresponding part of the protection sheet. In
addition, prevent dust from entering between the LCD
and protection sheet.

<3> Attach the four sides while pushing out air between the
touch panel and protection sheet.
Do not pull the protection sheet to correct its position
with the part of the sheet kept stuck to the touch panel.
<4> Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach
the sheet completely.
Check that the four corners and four sides of the
protection sheet do not float.

(3) Checks after replacement

<1> Check that there is no wrinkle on the surface of the
protection sheet.
<2> After power-on, check that there is no touch panel portion
kept pressed.
<3> Press the touch panel, and check that correct operation takes
place.

- 471 -
F.MEMORY CARD INTERFACE APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

F
Overview
MEMORY CARD INTERFACE

Using the memory card interface located on the left side of the LCD,
input/output of data inside the CNC and remote diagnosis using a
modem card can be performed. This appendix describes the memory
card interface for data input/output. For an explanation of remote
diagnosis using a modem card, see the related document.

ATA CARD
１. Compact Flash and ATA Flash cards confirmed to be worked
The table below provides a list of Compact Flash and ATA Flash
cards that have been confirmed to work with the 30i series. The
word and symbols used in the table have the meaning indicated
below. Note that the recommended card depends on the
application.

Available: The card confirmed to be worked by FANUC

-: No planning to test
CF: Compact Flash
(Blank): To be evaluated

Usage
Manufacture Model Size Data I/O and automatic Remark
Data server
operation by PCMCIA ports
SanDisk SDCFB-128-801 128MB Available Available CF
SDCFB-256-801 256MB Available Available CF
SDCFB-384-801 384MB - Available CF
SDCFB-512-801 512MB Available Available CF
HITACHI HB28D032C8H 32MB Available - CF
HB28B064C8H 64MB Available - CF
HB28B128C8H 128MB Available - CF
HB28B256C8H 256MB Available - CF
HB28D096A8H 96MB - Available
HB28D160A8H 160MB - Available
HB28B192A8H 192MB - Available
HB28B320A8H 320MB - Available
HB28B640A8H 640MB - Available
HB28B1000A8H 1GB - Available
* Adaptor for Compact Flash cards
- For confirmation of data input/output operation and
automatic operation based on the PCMCIA port, the
Compact Flash card adaptor (A02B-0303-K150) is
used.
- For confirmation of data server operation, the adaptor
(SDCF-31-03) manufactured by SanDisk Corporation
is used.

- 472 -
B-63943EN/02 APPENDIX F.MEMORY CARD INTERFACE

NOTE
1 If a card other than the above is used, the
operation is not guaranteed.
2 The cards for 3.3 V cannot be used.
3 The cards for 5 and 3.3 V (automatic switching)
can be used.

2. Miscellaneous
• The flash ATA card uses a quick format.
If your flash ATA card has not been formatted, do so using
a personal computer.

Using the compact flash adapter

1. Attachment
• Attach the compact flash card to the compact flash card
adapter (A02B-0303-K150, called the CF adapter later).
• Make sure lock lever A is in the upper position and then
insert the CF adapter above into the memory card interface.
• Push lock lever A downward.
• Close the cover of the memory card interface.

NOTE
1 To perform continuous operation with the CF
adapter attached, be sure to push lock lever A
downward and then close the cover of the memory
card interface.
2 The lock function is enabled only when the CF
adapter (A02B-0303-K150) is used.
3 The CF adapter must be inserted with label surface
facing toward the screen.

2. Removal
• Open the cover of the memory card interface.
• Push lock lever A upward.
• Push eject button B once to project the button.
• Push eject button B again to eject the CF adapter.
• Remove the CF card with your fingers.
• Close the cover of the memory card interface.

NOTE
4 When lock lever A is in the lower position (in the
locked state), eject button B cannot be pushed.

- 473 -
F.MEMORY CARD INTERFACE APPENDIX B-63943EN/02

Lock lever A

Eject button B Compact flash card

Compact flash card adapter

- 474 -
B-63943EN/02 INDEX

INDEX
CAUTIONS ABOUT MULTIPATH CONTROL.........286
<Number>
CONFIGURATION ..........................................................1
20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND
Configuration ........................................................ 174, 359
CABLES ....................................................................... 439
Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units.......2
2A DO (Output Signal) Connection .............................. 185
Configurations of Optional Boards ...................................9
2A Output Connector Pin Allocation ............................ 184
Configurations of Stand-alone Type Control Units...........5
2A Output DO Signal Specifications ............................ 186
Connecting Five or Six Serial Spindles.........................114
<A> Connecting I/O Devices ..................................................79
ACTION AGAINST NOISE........................................... 29 Connecting One to Four Serial Spindles .......................107
Address Assignment by Ladder .................................... 247 Connecting Seven or Eight Serial spindles....................115
Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation ........................ 187 CONNECTING THE FANUC SERVO UNIT β
ANALOG INPUT SEPARATE DETECTOR SERIES WITH I/O LINK .............................................246
INTERFACE................................................................. 139 CONNECTING THE HIGH-SPEED SKIP (HDI)..........93
Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Connecting the High-speed Skip (HDI) ..........................93
(Analog 1Vp-p Interface) .............................................. 145 Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control
Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit Unit .................................................................................34
Specification.................................................................. 143 CONNECTION.............................................................156
Analog Input Signal Connections.................................. 188 Connection ............................................................ 243, 246
Analog Input Signal Specifications............................... 189 Connection Between the Analog Input Separate
Analog Input Specifications .......................................... 190 Detector Interface Unit and Additional Unit .................148
Anti-Noise Measure ...................................................... 101 Connection Between the Basic Unit and Additional
Applicable Cables ......................................................... 445 Unit ...............................................................................134
CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US).......454
<B>
Connection Diagram .....................................................175
Backup Unit .................................................................. 296
CONNECTION DIAGRAM .........................................319
BATTERIES ................................................................... 58
CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is.............288
Batteries for PANEL i (3VDC) ....................................... 64
Connection of Basic and Extension Modules................194
Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor
Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector
(6VDC) ........................................................................... 68
.............................................................................. 132, 147
Battery for Memory Backup in the CNC Control Unit
CONNECTION OF CONNECTOR PANEL I/O
(3 VDC) .......................................................................... 58
MODULE......................................................................174
Battery for Separate Absolute Pulse Coders (6VDC)...... 66
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable ......158
BOARD-MOUNTED CONNECTORS ........................ 440
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Optical Fiber
Buzzer Output ............................................................... 316
Cable .............................................................................159
<C> Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles ...................104
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing................................ 39 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O
CABLE CONNECTORS .............................................. 441 MODULE (FOR MATRIX INPUT) .............................206
CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O
UNIT ............................................................................... 57 MODULE AND POWER MAGNETICS CABINET I/O
Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator .................... 193 MODULE......................................................................223
CABLING DIAGRAM ................................................... 46 Connection of Power Supply................................. 124, 143
CAUTIONS .......................................................... 318, 324 CONNECTION TO ATANDARD MACHINE
OPERATOR'S PANEL .................................................248
i-1
INDEX B-63943EN/02

CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS ............ 69, 295 <E>

CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link ......................... 154 Each Connections..........................................................251
CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS ................. 287 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL....................................283
Connection to Peripheral Devices ................................. 363 Emergency stop signal connection ................................254
Connection to the Ethernet Interface............................... 96 Environmental Conditions for Control Units ................293
Connection to the MDI Unit Environmental Conditions outside the Cabinet ...............19
(LCD-mounted Type 30i Series)..................................... 70 Environmental requirement...........................................269
Connection to the PANEL i .......................................... 360 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE
CONNECTION TO THE SERVO AMPLIFIERS........ 117 THE CABINET...............................................................19
Connection when Multiple Channels of FANUC I/O Ethernet .........................................................................351
Links are Used .............................................................. 162 Ethernet Interface (10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX) ............300
Connection with an LCD Unit ........................................ 75 External 24 VDC Power Specification and Circuit
CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES..... 78 Configuration ..................................................................51
CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT External View........................................................ 216, 232
(LCD- MOUNTED TYPE 30i SERIES)......................... 70
<F>
CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT
FA full keyboard and an MDI unit other than QWERTY
(STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES)........................... 75
MDI...............................................................................333
Connection with the Standard MDI Unit......................... 71
FANUC Handy FILE ......................................................92
Connector (on the cable side) specifications ................. 261
FANUC I/O LINK CONNECTION UNIT ...................239
Connector Layout Diagram........................................... 336
Floppy Disk Drive.........................................................348
Connector Locations ............................................. 135, 149
Connector locations of main panel................................ 268 <G>
Connector Names and Connector Layout...................... 291 General-purpose DI signal connection ..........................255
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................... 44 General-purpose DI signal definition ............................270
CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND General-purpose DO signal connection.........................257
COMPONENT NAMES ...................................................2 General-purpose DO signal definition...........................270
Ground ............................................................................31
<D>
Ground Terminal Connection of Units..........................335
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ..
DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF <H>
THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET.......... 23 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS......................................321
Detachable key top........................................................ 273 Hard Disk Unit ..............................................................347
DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection..... 209, 226 HARDWARE OVERVIEW............................................11
DI (Input Signal) Connection ........................................ 179 Heat Output of Each Unit................................................26
DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection ............................ 211 HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) ..........................317
DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement.............. 208, 225, 178 High-speed serial Bus (HSSB) ......................................344
DI/DO Signal Specifications ......................................... 182 High-speed Serial Bus (HSSB) [For Stand-alone
Display Unit for is Series .............................................. 292 Type] .............................................................................315
Display Unit for is Series CNC (Stand-Alone Type) .... 290
<I>
Distribution I/O Setting................................................. 204
I/O Address ...................................................................262
DO (Output Signal) Connection.................... 181, 212, 230
I/O link connection........................................................253
DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND
I/O Link interface..........................................................243
PENDANT BOXES ........................................................ 47
I/O Mapping ..................................................................264
Input Signal Requirements (Parallel interface) .............130

i-2
B-63943EN/02 INDEX

Input Signal Rules for the High-speed Skip (HDI) ......... 95 Module Specifications...................................................176
Input Signal Specifications............................................ 146
<N>
INSTALLATION............................................................ 18
Network Installation......................................................101
Installation............................................................. 136, 150
Noise Suppressor.............................................................37
INSTALLATION.......................................................... 291
Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit .137
Installation Conditions of the CNC and Servo Unit in
Notes on Installing an Analog Input Separate Detector
the Cabinet ...................................................................... 20
Interface Unit ................................................................152
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT............................ 320
Installation Environmental Conditions.......................... 326 <O>
INSTALLATION SPACE ............................................ 330 Operating Environment .................................................359
Installation space of the 10.4" LCD type basic unit ...... 330 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE............................................457
Installation space of the 12.1" LCD type basic unit ...... 331 Order specification ........................................................269
Installation space of the 15.0" LCD type basic unit ...... 332 OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS.............................369
Installation Space of the Basic Unit .............................. 330 Outline of main panel....................................................265
Installation space of the HDD unit ................................ 333 Outline of sub panel A ..................................................266
Installing the LCD-mounted Type Control Unit ............. 44 Outline of sub panel D ..................................................267
Installing the Stand-alone Type Control Unit ................. 45 Overall Connection Diagram................................. 206, 223
Interface to the Servo Amplifiers .................................. 118 Override signals ............................................................263

<K> <P>
KEY CODES OF SOFT KEYS .................................... 366 PANEL i........................................................................323
Key Layout of MDI......................................................... 72 Parallel Port...................................................................342
Key Symbol Indication on Machine Operators Panel ... 271 PCI Extension Board.....................................................356
Keyboard and Mouse .................................................... 345 PCMCIA Card...............................................................355
Keyboard of main panel ................................................ 262 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND CONNECTION...336
PERSONAL COMPUTER SPECIFICATION..............320
<L>
Pin assignment ..............................................................251
LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview................... 11
Power Connection ................................................. 207, 224
LCD-mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is............... 291
Power ON/OFF control signal connection ....................254
LCD-Mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is Control
Power Supply Capacities of CNC-related Units..............21
Unit ............................................................................... 289
POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY ......................................21
Linking The EMBEDDED Ethernet Interface ................ 96
Power Supply Capacity .................................................294
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)......................... 469
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION ................................48
<M> Power supply connection ..............................................252
Main panel specification ............................................... 269 Power Supply for the Control Unit..................................50
Main Power Input.......................................................... 295 Power Supply Specification .................................. 270, 328
Main Power Supply Input ............................................. 337 Power-off Sequence ........................................................55
Maintenance Parts ......................................................... 277 Power-on Sequence .........................................................55
Manual Pulse Generator Connection..... 192, 215, 232, 258 PREFACE ...........................................................................
Maximum Number of Units that can be Connected ...... 247 PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING PERSONAL
MDI............................................................................... 354 COMPUTER INTERFACE BOARDS .........................321
Meaning of key symbols ............................................... 271 Punch Panel for PANEL i .............................................358
Measures Against Surges due to Lightning..................... 42 QWERTY MDI used in cases other than
MEMORY CARD INTERFACE .................................. 472 combination (2) .............................................................334
Module Installation ....................................................... 195 RECOMMENDED CABLES .......................................322

i-3
INDEX B-63943EN/02

Recommended Connectors............................................ 444 UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED USING FANUC

RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE I/O Link.........................................................................173
HOUSINGS, AND CABLES........................................ 443
<U>
Replacing the lithium battery .......................................... 59
USB...............................................................................350
RS-232-C Interface Specification ................................... 83
USB port (front side).....................................................314
RS-232-C Serial Port....................................................... 81
USB port (rear side) ......................................................313
<S>
<V>
SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE ...................... 121
Vertical-type Connectors...............................................440
Separate Detector Interface (Parallel interface) ............ 128
Video Port .....................................................................352
Separate Detector Interface (Serial Interface) ............... 126
Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification ............. 123 <W>
Separating Signal Lines................................................... 29 When the QWERTY MDI and 10.4" LCD type basic
Serial Port 1........................................................... 308, 338 unit are used ..................................................................334
Serial Port 2........................................................... 311, 340
Serial Port and USB Port............................................... 308
SERIAL SPINDLE ....................................................... 104
SERVO INTERFACE................................................... 116
Shutdown ...................................................................... 329
SHUTTING OFF THE MOTOR POWER.................... 280
Soldering Type Connector ............................................ 442
Specification.................................................................. 240
Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable................................ 98
Specifications ................................ 217, 233, 269, 326, 358
SPINDLE CONNECTION............................................ 103
Stand-alone Type Control Unit Overview....................... 12
STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP ............................... 278
STOP MODES .............................................................. 279
STOPPING THE SERVO MOTOR.............................. 282
STOPPING THE SPINDLE MOTOR .......................... 281
Straight and Right-angled Connectors (for Spring
and Screw-fixing Connector Housings) ........................ 440
Strand Wire Press-mount Connector ............................. 441
Sub panel A/D specification.......................................... 269

<T>
Temperature Rise within the Machine Tool Magnetic
Cabinet ............................................................................ 25
Thermal Design of Operator's Panel ............................... 27
THERMAL DESIGN OF THE MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC CABINET ................................................. 25
Total Connection Diagram ............................................ 250
TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS........... 13, 289, 325
TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................... 50

i-4
 Revision Record
FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL
A, Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) (B-63943EN)

Addition of functions
Addition of following models
02 May, 2004 - Series 31i /310i /310is-MODEL A5
- Series 31i /310i /310is-MODEL A
- Series 32i /320i /320is-MODEL A

01 Apr., 2003

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

• No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

• All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.